division 16 electrical - Prime Construction Group

DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Requirements specified within this section apply to all sections in Division 16,
ELECTRICAL. Work specified herein shall be performed as if specified in the
individual sections.
B.
Refer to Division 2, SITEWORK, for all excavation, backfill, and compaction
requirements.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
All electronic boards as part of electrical equipment shall meet the atmospheric
conditions of the space the equipment is installed in. All electronic boards that are
not installed in a conditioned environment shall be fungus-resistant.
B.
All electrical equipment shall be rated for the conditions the equipment is
installed in.
ELECTRICAL COORDINATION
A.
Major Work Provided Under this Contract:
1.
Provide one (1) new 4160V, 1000kW standby generator including
associated equipment with all testing and commissioning, but not limited
to, mufflers, neutral grounding resistors, battery chargers, etc. within new
operations building as shown on drawings and as described in the
specifications complete in place.
2.
Provide new 4160V distribution and generator switchgear to include the
new control and breaker sections with associated protection devices as
shown on drawings and as described in the specifications complete in
place. New control section shall include a Modicon Quantum PLC.
3.
Provide and install new pad mounted transformers, motor control centers,
solid state reduced voltage starters, constant speed starter, variable
frequency drives, low voltage transformer, panelboards, etc. as shown on
drawings and as described in the specifications complete in place.
16010-1
4.
Provide and install new power distribution system at the new buildings
including motor control centers, power panel, lighting transformer,
lighting panels, etc. as shown on drawings and as described in the
specifications complete in place.
5.
Provide and install all necessary hardware, software, and programming for
the new fuel system as shown on drawings and as described in the
specifications complete in place.
6.
Provide new electrical equipment at Well Sites No.1, No.2, No.3, No.4,
No.5 and No.6 to accommodate new well buildings. Maintain minimum
clearances as required per NEC and manufacturer’s recommendations.
Provide new transformers in-line with incoming feeders and pour new
concrete pads in new locations. Provide MODBUS Ethernet-capable PQM
to new MCC’s.
7.
Provide and install new lighting systems, convenience power systems, and
communication raceway system as shown in the drawings and as described
in specifications complete in place.
8.
Provide and install all conduit and wire to support instrumentation and
control systems, unless otherwise noted in the drawings and specifications,
complete in place.
9.
Provide and install lightning protection and grounding systems as shown
on drawings and as described in the specifications complete in place.
10.
Provide and install fire alarm system as shown on drawings and as
described in the specifications complete in place.
11.
Provide all miscellaneous electrical including disconnect switches,
terminations, fittings, etc. not specified but obviously necessary for
complete working systems in place.
12.
Contractor shall perform an arc flash study and a short circuit and
protective device coordination study of the electrical system to determine
proper protective device settings and verify expected fault current levels
for all equipment as per specification 16015. Provide arc flash labels on all
equipment. Provide electronic versions of arc flash, short circuit, and
protective device coordination studies in the original software format (i.e.
SKM or equal) and in PDF format to OWNER and ENGINEER on a
CD/DVD.
13.
Provide and install all yard conduits, pull boxes, manholes, and spare
conduits as described in the drawings and specifications complete in place.
16010-2
B.
14.
Contractor shall coordinate with Process, I&C, Mechanical, HVAC, and
Generator Contractor for all required wire, conduit, power and signal
requirements for all package systems. Contractor shall review all Process,
Mechanical, I&C, HVAC and other systems shop drawings for all
electrical requirements and provide all materials and labor as necessary.
15.
Contractor shall provide all coordination with governing Electrical Utility.
Contractor shall provide and pay for all Electrical Utility costs for new
service to facility. Contractor shall encase underground portions of new
service in concrete with (2) two spare conduits, sized as noted on the
drawings, for future use.
Temporary Power:
1.
C.
Emergency Power:
1.
D.
Contractor shall furnish and install temporary construction power and
temporary distribution system to Contractor’s and Engineer’s trailers.
Contractor shall coordinate all construction power with the local power
utility. No power will be available on site for contractors during
construction.
See Project Plans and Section 16230, STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR
SETS.
Functional Testing:
1. Function Test Checklist:

Installation Complete
All equipment is set into its final location
Fuel system fully operational
All battery systems fully charged and functional
The coordination study available for programming protective
relays
Generators ready for operation after Ring Powers pre-start
inspections.
It is highly recommended that all protective relays are set and
tested. And that all bus bar and cabling to be Hi-pot and Megger
tested prior to energizing by a third party testing origination.

Manually Start Generators at their LOCAL Control Panel (AVR
Disconnected)
16010-3
Verify LOCAL Control from Generator Control Panel
Verify residual voltage
Verify frequency
Verify proper operation per Caterpillar

Verify Manual Control from IPS Control Panel
Verify Start / Stop Control
Verify frequency control

Voltage, Circuit Breaker Control and Phasing verification
Enable the AVR, manually run the generator and verify proper
voltage
Verify voltage control from IPS Control Panel
Isolate all LOADS from the emergency bus and verify generator
circuit breaker operation
Verify proper rotation, (typically by site electrician using a known
load for reference)

Generator and System Alarms and Shutdowns and PLC I/O
Verify all PLC Inputs and Outputs
Verify all alarms and shutdowns from each generator to the IPS
Controls and the SCADA
Verify all indications (Circuit Breaker Status, Power Readings,
ETC.) from the IPS Controls to the SCADA

Load Sharing and Load Banking
A load bank needs to be temporally installed, (typically by the
generator supplier or electrician). It typically is connected to a
spare feeder or one that can be shut-down and used for testing.
With the load bank connected, IPS and RPC can begin verifying
system Load Sharing. With the Load Sharing completed, the
required load testing can begin.

Manual Operation
Verify Manual Operation, transfer to generators, feeder and utility
breaker operation

Automatic Operation
Verify Utility Outage Sequences
Verify System Transfers

Witness Testing followed by System Training.
16010-4
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.05
The following information shall be provided for all electrical equipment:
1.
A copy of each specification section, with addendum updates included,
and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates
included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification
compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification
requirements. Check-marks (√) shall denote full compliance with a
paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated,
and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be
underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the
identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not
underlined shall signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the
specifications. The submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed, written
justification for each deviation.
2.
Electrical equipment submittals shall be made by specification section.
Submit one package per specification section and do not group multiple
specification sections under one submittal package.
3.
Provide complete conduit and equipment layouts: a scaled plan layout of
the electrical room(s) showing spatial relationships of all equipment as
well as the overall size of the room. Minimum scale shall be ¼”=1’-0”. All
electrical plans shall be in AutoCAD 2013 or later compatible with County
Engineering standards.
4.
Provide a conduit plan for all conduit runs, instrumentation and control
conduits, both interior and exterior, showing routing, size and stub up
locations for buried or in slab conduits.
B.
As part of the electrical submittal, the contractor shall provide a minimum of
¼”=1’-0” scaled layout of the electrical equipment in the electrical room or major
electrical equipment in a mechanical room showing sizes of all equipment and
their spatial relationship. Non-electrical equipment shall be approved before
finalizing the electrical layout in mechanical rooms.
C.
Provide six (6) copies of the latest Overall Power Distribution Schematic on
24”x36” full-size plots to Owner.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A.
All chemical rooms and areas shall be corrosive areas.
16010-5
B.
1.06
1.07
INSPECTION OF THE SITE AND EXISTING CONDITIONS
A.
Before submitting a bid, visit the site and determine conditions at the site in order
to become familiar with all existing conditions which will, in any way or manner,
affect the work required under this Contract. No subsequent increase in Contract
cost will be allowed for additional work required because of the
CONTRACTOR's failure to fulfill this requirement.
B.
After award of Contract, locate all existing underground utilities at each area of
construction activity. Protect all existing underground utilities during
construction. Pay for all required repairs without increase in Contract cost, should
damage to underground utilities occur during construction.
RESPONSIBILITY
A.
1.08
All indoor chemical and process equipment areas shall be considered wet
locations.
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for:
1.
Complete systems in accordance with the intent of these Contract
Documents.
2.
Coordinating the details of facility equipment and construction for all
Specification Divisions that affect the work covered under Division 16,
ELECTRICAL.
3.
Furnishing and installing all incidental items not actually shown or
specified, but which are required by good practice to provide complete
functional systems.
4.
Obtain and pay for all permits as necessary for work being done under
division 16 specifications.
5.
Obtain, pay and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction as
needed for all work being done under division 16 specifications.
INTENT OF DRAWINGS
A.
Electrical plan Drawings show only general location of equipment, devices, and
raceway, unless specifically dimensioned. The Drawings are not intended to show
exact locations, routing or all conduits of conduit runs. The CONTRACTOR shall
be responsible for the proper routing of raceway, subject to the approval of the
ENGINEER.
16010-6
B.
The basis of design for the major electrical equipment sizes and characteristics has
been Square D for switchgear, switchboards, MCC’s, panelboards, transformers,
motor starters and VFDs; Modicon for PLCs, Caterpillar for generators; and
Hubbell for light fixtures. If the CONTRACTOR chooses to and is allowed to
substitute manufacturers or equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible
for fitting all the equipment in the available space as shown on the Drawings and
providing any additional hardware and/or software for a fully functional system
per the intent of the design. Equipment shall not be installed without submittals
documenting the equipment size and location to ensure adequate space for
installation. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all costs associated with
any modifications to the substitute in order to adhere to the intent of the design.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide credit(s) to the OWNER for any cost savings
associated with the substitute. No change orders shall be issued for the use of a
substitute.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
Provide materials and equipment listed by UL wherever standards have been
established by that agency.
B.
Equipment Finish:
1.
Provide manufacturers' standard finish and color, except where specific
color is indicated.
2.
If manufacturer has no standard color, provide equipment with ANSI No.
61, light gray color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Electrical Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and raceway,
unless specifically dimensioned.
B.
Install work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation, unless otherwise
specified.
C.
Contractor shall label all control circuits, feeder circuits, lighting circuits, analog
instrumentation signals at the panel and the load.
16010-7
D.
3.02
3.03
LOAD BALANCE
A.
Drawings and Specifications indicate circuiting to electrical loads and distribution
equipment.
B.
Balance electrical load between phases as nearly as possible on switchboards,
panel boards, motor control centers, and other equipment.
C.
When loads must be reconnected to different circuits to balance phase loads,
maintain accurate record of changes made, and provide circuit directory that lists
final circuit arrangement.
STARTUP
A.
3.04
Contractor shall label all conduits and raceway (including spares) at each point of
termination (motor, junction boxes, pull boxes, final device etc.) and its source
(power panel, control panel etc.) with its final destination and source.
Startup:
1.
Demonstrate satisfactory operation of all Medium Voltage, and Low
Voltage (less than 600 volt) electrical equipment. Participate with other
trades in all startup activities.
2.
Assist the PICS Contractor in verifying signal integrity of all control and
instrumentation signals.
STANDARDS, CODES, PERMITS, AND REGULATIONS
A.
Perform all work; furnish and install all materials and equipment in full
accordance with the latest applicable rules, regulations, requirements, and
specifications of the following:
1.
Local Laws and Ordinances.
2.
State and Federal Laws.
3.
National Electrical Code (NEC).
4.
State Fire Marshal.
5.
Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).
6.
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
16010-8
3.05
7.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
8.
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
9.
National Electrical CONTRACTOR's Association (NECA) Standard of
Installation.
10.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
11.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA).
12.
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
13.
National Electrical Testing Association (NETA).
14.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
B.
Conflicts, if any, which may exist between the above items, will be resolved at the
discretion of the ENGINEER.
C.
Wherever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the
above items, the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings govern. Code
compliance is mandatory. Construe nothing in the Contract Documents as
permitting work not in compliance with these codes.
D.
Obtain all permits and pay all fees required by any governmental agency having
jurisdiction over the work. Arrange all inspections required by these agencies. On
completion of the work, furnish satisfactory evidence to the ENGINEER that the
work is acceptable to the regulatory authorities having jurisdiction.
TESTING
A.
B.
All medium voltage equipment, systems and accessories shall be tested by an
independent testing agency. Certified test results shall be given to the OWNER.
Testing shall include:
a. Verify all set points per the electrical study
b. Meg Ohm testing
c. Ohm resistance
d. Hi Pot testing as necessary
END OF SECTION
16010-9
SECTION 16015
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The requirements of this specification shall apply to the new electrical distribution
system at Malcolm Road Water Supply Facility (MRWSF), including new
electrical distribution at Process Building, High Service Pump Building, Post
Treatment Building and Well Sites. The end result shall be a fully protected, and
properly coordinated, system with proper arc flash safety labels and personal
protective equipment recommendations.
B.
Contractor shall furnish short-circuit and protective device coordination studies as
described herein. The coordination study shall begin with the utility company's
feeder protective device and the complete plant including but not limited to all of
the electrical protective devices down to, and including, the main breaker and
feeder circuit in each 208 Volt panelboard. The study shall also include variable
frequency drives, harmonic filters, power factor correction equipment,
transformers and protective devices associated with variable frequency drives,
emergency and standby generators associated paralleling equipment and
distribution switchgear.
C.
The contractor shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, reference Article 130.3 and
Annex D. Provide Arc Flash label as shown on section 3.02 of this specification.
D.
Contractor shall provide Ethernet capable power monitoring equipment for all
new MCCs.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:
1.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
a.
IEEE 141 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power
Distribution and Coordination of Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems
b.
IEEE 241 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power
Systems in Commercial Buildings
16015-1
c.
d.
2.
e.
IEEE 1015 – Recommended Practice for Applying LowVoltage Circuit Breakers Used in Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems
f.
IEEE 1584-2002: Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard
Calculations.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a.
C57.12.00, Standard General Requirements for Liquidimmersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating
Transformers.
b.
ANSI C37.13 – Standard for Low Voltage AC Power
Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures
c.
ANSI C37.010 – Standard Application Guide for AC High
Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current
Basis
d.
ANSI C 37.41 – Standard Design Tests for High Voltage
Fuses, Distribution Enclosed Single-Pole Air Switches,
Fuse Disconnecting Switches and Accessories
ANSI C37.5 – Methods for Determining the RMS Value of
a Sinusoidal Current Wave and Normal-Frequency
Recovery Voltage, and for Simplified Calculation of Fault
Currents
e.
3.
4.
IEEE 242: Recommended Practice for Protection and
Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power
Systems.
IEEE 399: Recommended Practice for Industrial and
Commercial Power System Analysis.
National Fire Protection Association:
a.
NFPA 70E: National Electrical Safety Code Chapter 1.
b.
NFPA 70: National Electrical Code.
Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA):
a.
29-CFR, Part 1910, sub part S.
16015-2
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.04
1.05
Shop drawings: the results of the short-circuit, protective device coordination, and
arc flash hazard analysis studies shall be summarized in a preliminary and final
summary report. Submit five (5) three-ring binder bound copies of the complete
preliminary and final study reports. The preliminary short circuit and device
coordination study report shall be submitted within 30 days of notice to proceed
and shall be a basis for approval of all other electrical equipment in the power
distribution system. The contractor is expected to review the results of the
preliminary short circuit and device coordination study report against all other
applicable shop drawings, including industrial control panels, prior to shop
drawing submittal to coordinate appropriate fault duty ratings of all electrical
equipment. The final short circuit and device coordination study report shall
incorporate all comments from shop drawing submittals and include the arc-flash
hazard analysis. The contractor shall ensure proper arc-flash warning labels are
applied to all appropriate electrical equipment when the final study has been
approved.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Short circuit, protective device coordination, and arc flash studies shall be
prepared by the manufacturer furnishing the electrical power distribution
equipment or a professional electrical engineer registered in the State of Florida,
hired by the manufacturer, in accordance with IEEE 242 and IEEE 399.
B.
Manufacturer shall have unit responsibility for the equipment and protective
device coordination.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
An initial, complete short circuit and arc flash study must be submitted and
reviewed before Engineer will approve Shop Drawings for switchgear, unit sub
stations, breakers, MCC’S, switchboard, VFD’S, manufactured industrial control
panels and circuit breaker panelboard equipment. Failure to do so will delay the
approval of major equipment submittals.
B.
The short circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash studies shall be
updated prior to Project Substantial Completion. Utilize characteristics of asinstalled equipment actual wire run lengths and materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
Contractor shall furnish all field data as required for the power system studies.
The Engineer performing the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc
flash hazard analysis studies shall furnish the Contractor with a listing of required
16015-3
data immediately after award of the contract. The Contractor shall expedite
collection of the data to eliminate unnecessary delays and assure completion of the
studies as required for final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings
and/or prior to the release of the equipment for manufacturing. Contractor shall
contact the Owner for the existing available data from the previous projects and
field verify/collect all other necessary for the studies.
B.
Source combination may include present and future utility supplies, motors, and
generators.
C.
Load data utilized may include existing and proposed loads obtained from
Contract Documents provided by Owner or Contractor.
D.
Equipment and component titles used in the studies shall be identical to the
equipment and component titles shown on the Drawings.
E.
Perform studies using digital computer with a software package such as SKM
Power*Tools for Windows DAPPER, CAPTOR and ARC FLASH, or
approved equal.
F.
Perform complete fault calculations for all busses on utility and generator power
sources. Perform load flow and voltage drop studies for major feeders and loads
with long feeder runs. Analysis shall include expected fault currents at industrial
control panels manufactured in accordance with UL 508A and NEC article 409.
G.
Fault source combinations shall include large motors, large transformers, utility
and generator.
H.
Utilize proposed and existing load data for the study obtained from Contract
Documents and field survey. Coordinate with local power utility for available
fault currents from utility services.
I.
Existing Equipment:
1.
J.
No existing equipment is installed on this project.
Provide a comprehensive report document containing the short circuit, device
coordination and arc flash studies. As a minimum the report structure shall
contain the following:
1.
Executive Summary.
2.
Methodology.
3.
One Line Diagram(s).
16015-4
2.02
4.
Short Circuit Analysis.
5.
Short Circuit Analysis Results/Conclusions/Recommendations.
6.
Device Coordination Analysis.
7.
Recommended protective devices settings.
8.
Arc Flash Analysis.
9.
Arc Flash PPE recommendations.
SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY
A.
General:
1.
Use cable impedances based on copper conductors. Use actual conductor
impedances if know. If unknown, use typical conductor impedances based
on IEEE Standards 141, latest edition.
2.
Use bus impedances based on copper bus bars.
3.
Use cable and bus resistances calculated at 25 degrees C.
4.
Use 600-volt cable reactances based on use of typical data of conductors to
be used in this project.
5.
B.
Use transformer impedances 92.5 percent of "nominal" impedance based
on tolerances specified in ANSI C57.12.00.
Provide:
1.
Calculation methods and assumptions.
2.
Selected base per unit quantities.
3.
One-line diagrams annotated with results of short circuit analysis
including:
4.
a.
Three phase, line-to-line and single line to ground faults.
b.
Equipment Short Circuit Rating.
Source impedance data, including electric utility system and motor fault
contribution characteristics.
16015-5
C.
D.
5.
DAPPER (or equal) Short circuit report, demand load report, load flow
report and input data reports.
6.
Results, conclusions, and recommendations.
Calculate short circuit interrupting and momentary (when applicable) duties for an
assumed symmetrical three-phase bolted fault, bolted line-to-ground fault, and
bolted line-to-line fault at each:
1.
Electric utility's supply termination point.
2.
Main breakers, generator breakers and feeder breakers.
3.
Unit substations and medium voltage switchgear.
4.
Low voltage switchgear, switchboard and/or distribution panelboard.
5.
Motor control centers.
6.
Standby generator.
7.
Automatic Transfer Switch (if applicable).
8.
All branch circuit panelboards.
9.
Variable Frequency Drives.
10.
Industrial control panels manufactured in accordance with UL 508A and
NEC article 409.
11.
Other significant locations throughout the system.
12.
Future load contributions as shown on one-line diagram.
Protective Device Evaluation:
1.
Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short circuit
ratings Verify all equipment, main breakers, ATS, and protective devices
are applied within their ratings.
2.
Adequacy of switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, unit
substations and panelboard bus bar bracing to withstand short-circuit
stresses
3.
Adequacy of transformer windings to withstand short-circuit stresses
16015-6
E.
2.03
4.
Cable and busway sizes for ability to withstand short-circuit heating
besides normal load currents.
5.
Notify Owner in writing, of existing, circuit protective devices improperly
rated for the calculated available fault current
Through the General Contractor, furnish expected fault currents for industrial
control panels, constructed and installed under other divisions and specifications
of this contract, to the panel builder for his coordination with meeting the
requirements of UL 508A and NEC article 409.
PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
A.
Proposed protective device coordination time-current curves for distribution
system, graphically displayed on log-log scale paper. Time Current Curve plots
from SKM CAPTOR (or equal) program are acceptable.
B.
Each curve sheet to have title and one-line diagram with legend identifying the
specific portion of system associated with time-current curves on that sheet.
C.
Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical
or asymmetrical fault current to which device is exposed.
D.
Identify device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if
applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.
E.
Perform device coordination on time-current curves for low voltage distribution
system(s).
F.
Provide Individual protective device time-current characteristics on log-log paper
or software generated graphs.
G.
Plot Characteristics on Curve Sheets:
1.
Electric utility's relays or protective device (if applicable).
2.
Electric utility's fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total
clearing, tolerance, and damage bands (if applicable).
3.
Medium voltage equipment relays.
4.
Medium and low voltage fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt,
tolerance, and damage bands.
5.
Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including
manufacturer’s tolerance bands.
16015-7
Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI
transformer withstand parameters.
7.
Transformer damage curves.
8.
Conductor damage curves.
9.
ANSI transformer with stand parameters.
10.
Significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.
11.
Ground fault protective devices and settings (if applicable).
12.
Pertinent motor starting characteristics and motor damage points.
13.
Pertinent generator short circuit decrement curve and generator damage
point.
14.
Circuit breaker panelboard main breakers, where appropriate.
15.
Motor circuit protectors for major motors
H.
Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective
operation is provided, while providing proper protection.
I.
Primary Protective Device Settings for Delta-Wye Connected Transformer:
J.
2.04
6.
1.
Secondary Line-to-Ground Fault Protection: Primary protective device
operating band within the transformer's characteristics curve, including a
point equal to 58 percent of ANSI C57.12.00 withstand point.
2.
Secondary Line-To-Line Faults: 16 percent current margin between
primary protective device and associated secondary device characteristic
curves.
Separate medium voltage relay characteristics curves from curves for other
devices by at least 0.4-second time margin.
ARC FLASH ANALYSIS
A.
Perform incident energy calculations in accordance with IEEE 1584-2002 Guide
for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations for all equipment analyzed in the
short circuit study. Tabular results and recommended labels from SKM ARC
FLASH (or equal) are acceptable.
16015-8
2.05
B.
When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the
phase overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination
study model.
C.
The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all
significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards,
switchgear, motor-control centers, panelboards, bussway and unit substations,
variable frequency drives, industrial control panels) where work could be
performed on energized parts.
D.
The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all medium voltage, low voltage and
significant locations in 240 volt and 208 volt systems fed from transformers equal
to or greater than 125 kVA. Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis on low voltage systems
120V and below is not required.
E.
Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based upon
the calculated arc flash boundary considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.
F.
The Arc Flash Hazard analysis shall include calculations for maximum and
minimum contributions of fault current magnitude. The minimum calculation
shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume a
minimum motor load. Conversely, the maximum calculation shall assume a
maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating
under full-load conditions.
G.
Arc flash computation shall include both line and load side of main breaker
calculations, where necessary.
H.
Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device
clearing time. Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE
1584-2002 section B.1.2.
I.
Furnish recommendations for Personal Protective Equipment, in accordance with
OSHA standards, and proper labels to be located on the electrical equipment in
accordance with NEC Article 110.16.
J.
Use manufacturer data for: enclosure type; gap between exposed conductors or
buss way; grounding type; number of phases and connection; and working
distance.
TABULATIONS
A.
Input Data:
1.
Utility three-phase and line-to-ground available contribution with
associated X/R ratios.
16015-9
B.
C.
2.
Short circuit reactance of rotating machines and associated X/R ratios.
3.
Cable type, construction, size, quantity per phase, length, impedance and
conduit type.
4.
Bus data, including impedance.
5.
Transformer primary & secondary voltages, winding configurations, kVA
rating, impedance, and X/R ratio.
Short Circuit Data:
1.
Source fault impedance and generator contributions.
2.
X to R ratios.
3.
Asymmetry factors.
4.
Motor contributions.
5.
Short circuit kVA.
6.
Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.
Recommended Protective Device Settings:
1.
Phase and ground relays:
a.
Relay name.
b.
Device number.
c.
Description.
d.
TCC catalog number.
e.
Short circuit ratings.
f.
Current transformer ratio.
g.
Current tap.
h.
Time dial setting (as applicable).
i.
Instantaneous pickup setting (as applicable).
16015-10
2.
3.
j.
Ground fault setting (as applicable).
k.
Specialty, non-overcurrent device settings.
l.
Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable
Circuit Breakers:
a.
Breaker name.
b.
Breaker Description.
c.
Model number.
d.
TCC catalog number.
e.
Short circuit rating.
f.
Frame/Sensor rating.
g.
Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground).
h.
Adjustable time-current characteristic.
i.
Adjustable instantaneous pickup.
j.
Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP):
a.
MCP name.
b.
MCP Description.
c.
Model number.
d.
TCC catalog number.
e.
Short circuit rating.
f.
Frame/Sensor rating.
g.
Instantaneous settings.
16015-11
4.
D.
2.06
Fuses:
a.
Fuse name.
b.
Fuse Description.
c.
Model number.
d.
TCC catalog number.
e.
Short circuit rating.
f.
Fuse rating.
Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations.
1.
Arcing fault magnitude
2.
Device clearing time
3.
Duration of arc
4.
Arc flash boundary
5.
Working distance
6.
Incident energy
7.
Hazard Risk Category
8.
Recommendations for arc flash energy reduction
STUDY ANALYSES
A.
Written Summary:
1.
Scope of studies performed.
2.
Explanation of bus and branch numbering system.
3.
Prevailing conditions.
4.
Selected equipment deficiencies.
5.
Results of short circuit and coordination studies.
16015-12
6.
Comments or suggestions.
B.
Suggest changes and additions to equipment rating and/or characteristics.
C.
Notify Engineer in writing of existing circuit protective devices improperly rated
for new fault conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
GENERAL
A.
Adjust relay and protective device settings according to values established by
coordination study.
B.
Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance
with the short circuit and protective device coordination studies.
C.
Notify Engineer in writing of any required major equipment modifications.
SAMPLE ARC FLASH LABEL
A. Provide and attach all electrical equipment with appropriate Arc Flash label. Arc
Flash label shall be weather resistant material and shall match existing Orange
County’s Standard Arc Flash label.
F
END OF SECTION
16015-13
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES
A.
The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a.
C55, 1, Standard for Shunt Power Capacitors.
b.
C62.11, Standard for Metal-Oxide Surge Arrestors for AC Circuits.
c.
Z55.1, Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a.
A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
b.
A240, Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
Pressure Vessels.
c.
A570, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and Strip, Carbon,
Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality.
Federal Specifications (FS):
a.
W-C-596, Connector, Receptacle, Electrical.
b.
W-S-896E, Switches - Toggle, Flush Mounted.
National Electrical Contractor's Association, Inc. (NECA): 5055, Standard
of Installation.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
b.
AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
c.
CP I, Shunt Capacitors.
d.
ICS 2, Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
e.
KS 1, Enclosed Switches.
f.
LA I, Surge Arrestors.
g.
PB 1, Panelboards.
h.
ST 20, Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications.
i.
WD I, General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code
(NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a.
67, Standard for Panelboards.
b.
98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.
c.
198C, Standard for Safety High-Interpreting-Capacity Fuses,
Current-Limiting Types.
16050-1
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
1.04
Device boxes for use in hazardous areas.
Junction and pull boxes used at, or below grade & weather, water
proofing.
Hardware.
Terminal junction boxes.
Panelboards and circuit breaker data.
Fuses.
Contactors.
Transformers.
All other miscellaneous material part of this project.
Wire pulling compound.
Quality Control Submittals:
1.
1.03
198E, Standard for Class Q Fuses.
486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals.
489, Standard for Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit
Breaker Enclosures.
508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
810, Standard for Capacitors.
943, Standard for Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters.
1059, Standard for Terminal Blocks.
1561, Standard for Dry-Type General-Purpose and Power
Transformers.
Test Report: Sound test certification for dry type power transformers (0 to
600-volt, primary).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
UL Compliance: Materials manufactured within scope of Underwriters
Laboratories shall conform to UL Standards and have an applied UL listing mark.
B.
Hazardous Areas: Materials and devices shall be specifically approved for
hazardous areas of the class, division, and group shown and of a construction that
will ensure safe performance when properly used and maintained.
SPARE PARTS
A.
Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts:
16050-2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fuses, 0 to 600 Volts: Ten for each transformer of each type and rating
installed.
Lamps, 10 lamps for each size and wattage
Fuses, 10 fuses of each type
Touch up paint for each color of cabinet.
TVSS, provide 1 spare of each type of TVSS provided throughout project
wa
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
A.
Sheet Steel: One-piece drawn type, zinc- or cadmium-plated.
B.
Cast Metal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Cast Aluminum:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Box: Cast ferrous metal.
Cover: Gasketed, weatherproof, cast ferrous metal, with stainless steel
screws.
Hubs: Threaded.
Lugs (Cast Mounting) Manufacturer:
a.
Crouse-Hinds; Type FS or FD.
b.
Appleton; Type FS or FD.
c.
Or equal.
Material:
a.
Box: Cast, copper-free aluminum.
b.
Cover: Gasketed, weatherproof, cast copper-free aluminum with
stainless steel screws.
Hubs: Threaded.
Lugs: Cast mounting.
Manufacturers:
a.
Crouse-Hinds; Type FS-SA or FD-SA
b.
Appleton; Type FS or FD.
c.
Or equal.
PVC-Coated Sheet Steel:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Type: One-piece.
Material: Zinc- or cadmium-plated.
Coating: All surfaces; 40-mil PVC.
Manufacturer: Appleton, or equal.
16050-3
E.
Nonmetallic: (use only if shown in drawings)
1.
2.
3.
2.02
Box: PVC.
Cover: PVC, weatherproof, with stainless steel screws.
Manufacturer: Carlon; Type FS or FD, with Type E98 or E96 covers.
JUNCTION, ENCLOSURES AND PULL BOXES
A.
Outlet Boxes Used as Junction or Pull Box: As specified under 3.02 OUTLET
AND DEVICE BOXES.
B.
Large Stainless Steel Box: NEMA 250, Type 4X.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Large Nonmetallic Box: (Use only if shown on drawings or in corrosive areas)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Box: 14-gauge, ASTM A240, Type 316 stainless steel.
Cover: Hinged with screws.
Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 31 stainless steel.
Manufacturers:
a.
Hoffman Engineering Co.
b.
Robroy Industries.
c.
Or equal.
NEMA 250, Type 4X.
Box: High-impact, fiberglass-reinforced polyester or engineered
thermoplastic, with stability to high heat.
Cover: Hinged with screws.
Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.
Conduit hubs and mounting lugs.
Manufacturers:
a.
Crouse-Hinds; Type NJB.
b.
Carlon; Series N, C, or H.
c.
Robroy
Industries.
Concrete Box:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Box: Reinforced, cast concrete.
Cover: Cast iron.
Cover Marking: ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, or as shown.
Manufacturers:
a.
Brooks Products Inc.; No. 36/36T.
b.
Qwikset; W 17.
c.
Or equal.
16050-4
2.03
WIRING DEVICES
A.
Switches:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Receptacle, Single and Duplex:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
NEMA WD I and FS W-S-896E.
Specification grade, totally-enclosed, ac type, with quiet tumbler switches
and screw terminals.
Capable of controlling 100 percent tungsten filament and fluorescent lamp
loads.
Rating: 20 amps, 120/277 volts.
Color:
a.
Office Areas: White.
b.
Other Areas: Brown.
Switches with Pilot Light: 125-volt, neon light with red jewel, or lighted
toggle when switch is ON.
Manufacturers:
a.
Square D.
b.
Hubbell.
c.
Or equal.
NEMA WD 1 and FS W-C-596.
Specification grade, two-pole, three-wire grounding type with screw type
wire terminals suitable for No. 10 AWG.
High strength, thermoplastic base color.
Color:
a.
Office Areas: White.
b.
Other Areas: Brown.
c.
UPS power: Red Color Outlet, no exception.
Contact Arrangement: Contact to be made on two sides of each inserted
blade without detent.
Rating: 125 volts, NEMA WD 1, Configuration 5-20R, 20 amps.
Manufacturers:
a.
Square D.
b.
Hubbell.
c.
Or equal.
Receptacle, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter: Duplex, specification grade, tripping
at 5 mA.
1.
2.
Color: White.
Rating: 125 volts, NEMA WD 1, Configuration 5-20R, 20 amps, capable
of interrupting 5,000 amps without damage.
16050-5
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Receptacle, Special-Purpose:
1.
2.
2.04
Rating and number of poles as indicated or required for anticipated
purpose.
Matching plug with cord-grip features for each special-purpose receptacle.
DEVICE PLATES
A.
General: Sectional type plates not permitted.
B.
Metal:
1.
C.
Size: For 2-inch by 4-inch outlet boxes.
Standard Model: NEMA WD 1 with No. 12 AWG copper
USE/RHH/RHW-XLPE insulated pigtails and provisions for testing.
Feed-Through Model: NEMA WD 1, with No. 12 AWG copper
USE/RHH/RHW-XLPE insulated pigtails and provisions for testing.
Manufacturers:
a.
Square D GFSR.
b.
Hubbell GF.
c.
Or equal.
2.
3.
Cast Metal:
1.
2.
D.
Material: Malleable ferrous metal, with gaskets.
Screw: Oval-head stainless steel.
Engraved:
1.
2.
E.
Material: Specification grade, one-piece, 0.040-inch nominal thickness
stainless steel.
Finish: ASTM A167, Type 302/304, satin.
Mounting Screw: Oval-head, finish matched to plate.
Character Height: 3/16 inch.
Filler: Black.
Weatherproof:
1.
2.
For Receptacles: Gasketed, cast metal or stainless steel, with individual
cap over each receptacle opening.
Mounting Screw: Stainless steel.
a.
Cap Spring: Stainless steel.
b.
Manufacturers:
1) General Electric.
2) Bryant.
16050-6
3.
F.
2.05
3) Hubbell.
4) Sierra.
5) Pass and Seymour.
6) Crouse-Hinds; Type WLRD or WLRS.
7) Bell.
8) Arrow Hart.
For Switches: Gasketed, cast metal incorporating external operator for
internal switch.
a.
Mounting Screw: Stainless steel.
b.
Manufacturers:
1)
Crouse-Hinds; DS-181 or DS-185.
2)
Appleton; FSK-LVTS or FSK-IVS.
3)
Or equal.
Raised Sheet Metal: 1/2-inch high zinc- or cadmium-plated steel designed for
one-piece drawn type sheet steel boxes.
LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD
A.
NEMA PB I, NFPA 70, and UL 67, including panelboards installed in motor
control equipment.
B.
Panelboards and Circuit Breakers: Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full
NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.
C.
Short-Circuit Current Equipment Rating: Fully rated; series connected
unacceptable.
D.
Interrupting ratings: as shown on the drawings.
E.
Rating: As indicated on drawings and verified by short circuit and device
coordination study required by specification section 16015. Final ratings shall be
adjusted by recommendations of short circuit and device coordination study.
F.
Where ground fault interrupter circuit breakers are indicated or required by code:
5 mA trip, 10,000 amps interrupting capacity circuit breakers.
G.
Cabinet: As shown on plans.
H.
Bus Bar:
1.
2.
Material: Copper, tin coated, full sized throughout length.
Provide for mounting of future circuit breakers along full length of bus
regardless of number of units and spaces shown. Machine, drill, and tap as
required for current and future positions.
16050-7
3.
4.
5.
6.
I.
Circuit Breakers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
J.
2.06
Neutral: Insulated, rated 150 percent of phase bus bars with at least one
terminal screw for each branch circuit.
Ground: Copper, installed on panelboard frame, bonded to box with at
least one terminal screw for each circuit.
Lugs and Connection Points:
a.
Suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors.
b.
Solderless main lugs for main, neutral, and ground bus bars.
c.
Sub feed or through-feed lugs as shown.
Bolt together and rigidly support bus bars and connection straps on molded
insulators.
NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.
Thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, molded case, of the
indicating type showing ON/OFF and TRIPPED positions of operating
handle.
Non-interchangeable, in accordance with NFPA 70.
Locking: Provisions for handle padlocking, unless otherwise shown.
Type: Bolt-on circuit breakers in all panelboards.
Multi-pole circuit breakers designed to automatically open all poles when
an overload occurs on one pole.
Do not substitute single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties for multipole breakers.
Do not use tandem or dual circuit breakers in normal single-pole spaces.
Ground Fault Interrupter:
a.
Equip with conventional thermal-magnetic trip and ground fault
sensor rated to trip in 0.025 second for a 5-milliampere ground
fault (UL 943, Class A sensitivity).
b.
Sensor with same rating as circuit breaker and a push-to-test
button.
Manufacturers:
1.
Cutler-Hammer;
2.
Square D;
3.
GE;
CIRCUIT BREAKER, INDIVIDUAL, 0 TO 600 VOLTS
A.
NEMA AB I, UL 489 listed for use at location of installation.
B.
Minimum Interrupt Rating: As shown or as required.
C.
Thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, indicating type, showing ON/OFF
and TRIPPED indicating positions of the operating handle.
16050-8
2.07
D.
Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.
E.
Locking: Provisions for padlocking handle.
F.
Multi-pole breakers to automatically open all poles when an overload occurs on
one-pole.
G.
Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12, Industrial Use, 4X - outdoors, wet locations and
corrosive areas, unless otherwise shown.
H.
Interlock: Enclosure and switch shall interlock to prevent opening cover with
switch in the ON position.
I.
Do not provide single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties where multi-pole
circuit breakers are shown.
J.
Manufacturers:
1.
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer;
2.
Square D;
3.
GE;
FUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, 0 TO 600 VOLTS
A.
UL 98 listed for use and location of installation.
B.
NEMA KS 1 and UL 98 Listed for application to system with available short
circuit current of 22,000 amps rms symmetrical.
C.
Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HD) type with
external markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions.
D.
Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C
ampacity.
E.
Fuse mountings shall reject Class H fuses and accept only current-limiting fuses
specified.
F.
Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12, Industrial Use, 4X - outdoors, wet locations and
corrosive areas, unless otherwise shown.
G.
Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in the ON
position.
H.
Manufacturers:
16050-9
1.
2.
3.
2.08
2.09
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer;
Square D;
GE;
NONFUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, 0 TO 600 VOLTS
A.
NEMA KS 1.
B.
Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HD) type with
external markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions.
C.
Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C
ampacity.
D.
Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12, industrial use, 4X- outdoors, wet locations and
corrosive areas, unless otherwise shown.
E.
Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in the ON
position.
F.
Manufacturers:
1.
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer;
2.
Square D;
3.
GE;
FUSE, 0 TO 600 VOLTS
A.
Current-limiting, with 200,000-ampere rms interrupting rating.
B.
Provide to fit mountings specified with switches and features to reject Class H
fuses.
C.
Motor and Transformer Circuits, 0- to 600-Volt:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Amperage: 0 to 600.
UL 198E, Class RK-1, dual element, with time delay.
Manufacturers:
a.
Bussmann; Type LPS-RK.
b.
Gould-Shawmut; Type LLS-RK.
c.
Or approved equal.
Motor and Transformer Circuits, 0- to 250-Volt:
1.
2.
Amperage: 0 to 600.
UL 198E, Class RK-1, dual element, with time delay.
16050-10
3.
E.
Feeder and Service Circuits, 0- to 600-Volt:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Manufacturers:
a.
Bussmann; Type LPN-RK.
b.
Gould-Shawmut; Type LLN-RK.
c.
Or approved equal.
Amperage: 0 to 600.
UL 198E, Class RK-I, dual element, with time delay.
Manufacturers:
a.
Bussmann; Type LPS-RK.
b.
Gould-Shawmut; Type LLS-RK.
c.
Or approved equal.
Feeder and Service Circuits, O- to 250-Volt:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Amperage: 0 to 600.
UL 198E, Class RK-I, dual element, with time delay.
Manufacturers:
a.
Bussmann; Type LPN-RK.
b.
Gould-Shawmut; Type LLN-RK.
c.
Or approved equal.
Feeder and Service Circuits, 0- to 600-Volt:
1.
2.
3.
2.10
Amperage: 601 to 6,000.
UL 198C, Class L, double O-rings and silver links.
Manufacturers:
a.
Bussmann; Type KRP-C.
b.
Gould-Shawmut; Type KLPC.
c.
Or approved equal.
PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCHES
A.
Contact Rating: NEMA ICS 2, Type A600.
B.
Selector Switch Operating Lever: Standard.
C.
Indicating Lights: Push-to-test.
D.
Pushbutton Color:
1.
2.
ON or START: Black.
OFF or STOP: Red.
16050-11
E.
Pushbuttons and selector switches lockable in the OFF position where
indicated.
F.
Legend Plate:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
2.11
Heavy-Duty, Oil tight Type:
a.
Square D; Type T.
b.
Cutler-Hammer; Type CH10250T.
c.
Or equal.
Heavy-Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion-Resistant Type:
a.
Square D; Type SK.
b.
Cutler-Hammer; Type E34.
c.
Or equal.
TERMINAL JUNCTION BOX
A.
Cover: Hinged, unless otherwise shown.
B.
Terminal Blocks: Provide separate connection point for each conductor entering
or leaving box.
1.
C.
2.12
Material: Aluminum.
Engraving: 11 character/spaces on one line, 14 character/spaces on each of
two lines, as required, and indicating specific function.
Letter Height: 7/64 inch.
Spare Terminal Points: 25 percent.
Interior Finish: Paint with white enamel or lacquer.
TERMINAL BLOCK (0 TO 600 VOLTS)
A.
UL 486E and UL 1059.
B.
Size components to allow insertion of necessary wire sizes.
C.
Capable of termination of all control circuits entering or leaving equipment,
panels, or boxes.
D.
Screw clamp compression, dead front barrier type, with current bar providing
direct contact with wire between the compression screw and yoke.
16050-12
E.
Yoke, current bar, and clamping screw of high strength and high conductivity
metal.
F.
Yoke shall guide all strands of wire into terminal.
G.
Current bar shall ensure vibration-proof connection.
H.
Terminals:
1.
2.
3.
I.
Marking system: allowed use of preprinted or field-marked tags.
J.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.13
Marathon, series 200.
Square D 9070GR6.
Or equal.
MAGNETIC CONTROL RELAY
A.
NEMA ICS 2, Class A600 (600 volts, 10 amps continuous, 7,200VA make,
720VA break), industrial control with field convertible contacts.
B.
Time Delay Relay Attachment:
1.
2.
2.14
Capable of wire connections without special preparation other than
stripping.
Capable of jumper installation with no loss of terminal or rail space.
Individual, rail mounted.
Pneumatic type, timer adjustable from 0.2 to 60 seconds (minimum).
Field convertible from ON delay to OFF delay and vice versa.
C.
Latching Attachment: Mechanical latch having unlatching coil and coil clearing
contacts.
D.
Manufacturers:
1.
Cutler-Hammer; Type M-600.
2.
Square D.
3.
Potter Brumfield.
4.
Eagle Signal.
5.
Agastat
RESET TIMER
A.
Drive: Synchronous motor, solenoid-operated clutch.
16050-13
B.
Mounting: Semi-flush, panel.
C.
Contacts: 10-amp, 120-volt.
D.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.15
ELAPSED TIME METER
A.
Drive: Synchronous motor.
B.
Range: 0 to 99,999.9 hours, non-reset type.
C.
Mounting: Semi-flush, panel.
D.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.16
Eagle Signal; Bulletin 125.
Automatic Timing and Controls; Bulletin 305.
Or approved equal.
Engler: AC-200-10NG7.
Hecon: TO621134.
Or approved equal.
MAGNETIC CONTACTOR
A.
NEMA ICS 2, UL 508.
B.
Electrically operated, electrically held.
C.
Main Contacts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Power driven in one direction with gravity dropout.
Silver alloy with wiping action and arc quenchers.
Continuous-duty, rated 30 amperes, 600-volt.
Three-pole.
D.
Control: Two-wire.
E.
One normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contacts rated 10 amperes
at 480-volt.
F.
Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12, unless otherwise shown.
16050-14
G.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.17
2.18
Cutler-Hammer; ECL Series.
General Electric; CR 353.
Allen-Bradley; Bulletin 500 Line.
THERMOSTAT
A.
Rating: 7.4 amps continuous, 44 amps locked rotor current at 120 volts and 3.7
amps continuous, 22 amps locked rotor current at 240 volts.
B.
Line voltage, single-stage, treated to resist corrosion, dust, dirt, and humidity
with sealed SPDT contacts.
C.
Heating Adjustment Range: 35 to 100 degrees F.
D.
Cooling or Ventilating Adjustment Range: 70 to 140 degrees F.
E.
Manufacturer: Honeywell; Type T631F1084.
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER (0- TO 600-VOLT PRIMARY)
A.
UL 1561, NEMA ST 20, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Self-cooled, two winding, UL K-4 rated for nonlinear loads.
C.
Insulation Class and Temperature Rise: Manufacturer's standard.
D.
Core and Coil:
1.
2.
E.
Encapsulated for single-phase units 1/2 to 25 kVA and for three-phase
units 3 to 15 kVA.
Thermosetting varnish impregnated for single-phase units 37.5 kVA and
above, and for three-phase units 30 kVA and above.
Enclosure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Single-Phase, 3 to 25 kVA: NEMA 250, Type 3R, non-ventilated.
Single-Phase, 37-1/2 kVA and above: NEMA 250, Type 2, ventilated.
Three-Phase, 3 to 15 kVA: NEMA 250, Type 3R, non-ventilated.
Three-Phase, 30 kVA and above: NEMA 250, Type 2, ventilated.
Outdoor Transformers: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Wall Bracket: For single-phase units, 15 to 37-1/2 kVA, and for threephase units, 15 to 30 kVA.
16050-15
F.
Voltage Taps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Impedance: 4.5 percent minimum on units 75 kVA and larger.
H.
Maximum Sound Level: NEMA ST 20:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I.
3.
4.
J.
40 decibels for 0 to 9 kVA.
45 decibels for 10 to 50 kVA.
50 decibels for 51 to 150 kVA.
55 decibels for 151 to 300 kVA.
60 decibels for 301 to 500 kVA.
Vibration Isolators:
1.
2.
Rated for transformer's weight.
Isolation Efficiency: 99 percent, at fundamental frequency of sound
emitted by transformer.
Less Than 30 kVA: Isolate entire unit from structure with external
vibration isolators.
30 kVA and above: Isolate core and coil assembly from transformer
enclosure with integral vibration isolator.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
2.19
Single-Phase, 3 to 10 kVA: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above
and two below normal voltage rating.
Single-Phase, 15 kVA and above: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two
above and two below normal voltage rating.
Three-Phase, 3 to 15 kVA: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above
and two below normal voltage rating.
Three-Phase, 30 kVA and above: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two
above and two below normal voltage rating.
Square D;
Or Orange County approved equal.
SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNELS
A.
Material:
1.
2.
B.
Dry indoors – Type 316 stainless steel.
All Other Areas: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.
Finish:
16050-16
1.
2.
2.20
D.
C.
Inserts: Continuous.
D.
Beam Clamps: 316 stainless steel.
E.
Manufacturers:
1.
B-Line.
2.
Unistrut
3.
Kindorf.
NAMEPLATES
A.
Material: Laminated plastic.
B.
Attachment Screws: Stainless steel.
C.
Color: White, engraved to a black core.
Engraving:
1.
2.
E.
Pushbuttons/Selector Switches: Name of drive controlled on one, two, or
three lines, as required.
Panelboards: Panelboard designation, service voltage, and phases.
Letter Height:
1.
2.
2.21
Dry indoors – Type 316 stainless steel.
All Other Areas: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.
Pushbuttons/Selector Switches: 1/8 inch.
Panelboards: 1/4 inch.
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE
A.
This section describes the material and installation requirements for surge
protection devices (SPD) in service entrance equipment, panelboards, all low
voltage, all incoming power, all controls and control panels for the protection of
all AC electrical circuits.
B.
SPD shall be listed and component recognized in accordance with UL 1449, UL
1283 and ANSI/IEEE 62.41 testing.
C.
SPD shall be installed and warranted by and shipped from the electrical
distribution equipment manufacturer’s factory.
16050-17
D.
SPD shall provide surge current diversion paths for all modes of protection; L-L,
L-N, L-G, N-G in WYE systems, and L-L, L-G in DELTA systems.
E.
SPD shall be modular in design. Each module shall be fused with a surge rated
fuse.
F.
A UL approved disconnect switch shall be provided as a means of disconnect in
the switchboard device or any TVSS that is not connected thru a breaker.
G.
SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1.
Minimum surge current capability (single pulse rated) shall be:
a.
Service entrance equipment: 150kA per mode or 300kA per phase
b.
Branch panelboards: 80kA per mode or 160kA per phase
c.
Control panels: 40kA per mode or 80kA per phase
2.
UL 1449 Third Edition Listed and Recognized Component Suppression
Voltage Ratings shall not exceed the following:
Voltage
208Y/120
480Y/277
L-G
400V
800V
N-G
400V
800V
H.
SPD shall have a minimum EMI/RFI filtering of -44dB at 100kHz with an
insertion ratio of 50:1 using MIL STD. 220A methodology.
I.
SPD shall have a minimum warranty for a period of five years from final
acceptance, incorporating unlimited replacements of suppressors if they are
destroyed by transients during the warranty period. Warranty will be the
responsibility of the electrical distribution equipment manufacturer.
J.
For any external SPD, provide and install conduits/cables, indicated or not on
drawings, as recommended by the SPD supplier and place SPD unit as close as
possible to the equipment/panel to be protected.
K.
Approved manufactures are:
1.
2.
3.
2.22
L-N
400V
800V
Surge Suppression Incorporated
Current Technologies
Joslyn/Total Protection Solutions
LIMIT SWITCH (INTRUSION SWITCH)
A.
Limit switch shall be of the heavy-duty industrial type oiltight, watertight, and
corrosion resistant NEMA 4 enclosure with at least one SPDT 24V DC 5A rated
16050-18
sealed contact switches of the FORM C type. The level arm shall be suitable for
the application and shall be heavy duty corrosion resistant.
B.
The switch shall be UL listed as manufactured by Allen-Bradley Type 802R lever
type, spring return, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
3.02
Install equipment in accordance with NECA 5055.
OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
A.
Install suitable for conditions encountered at each outlet or device in the wiring or
raceway system, sized to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
B.
Size:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Depth: Minimum 2 inches, unless otherwise required by structural
conditions. Box extensions not permitted.
a.
Hollow Masonry Construction: Install with sufficient depth such
that conduit knockouts or hubs are in masonry void space.
Ceiling Outlet: Minimum 4-inch octagonal sheet steel device box, unless
otherwise required for installed fixture.
Switch and Receptacle: Minimum 2-inch by 4-inch sheet steel device box.
Drawing locations are approximate.
To avoid interference with mechanical equipment or structural features,
relocate outlets as directed by ENGINEER.
Light Switch: Install on lock side of doors.
Light Fixture: Install in symmetrical pattern according to room layout
unless otherwise shown.
Mounting Height:
1.
2.
3.
General:
a.
Measured to bottom of box.
b.
Where specified heights do not suit building construction or finish,
mount as directed by ENGINEER.
Light Switch: 48 inches above floor.
Thermostat: 54 inches above floor.
16050-19
4.
5.
6.
7.
Telephone Outlet: 6 inches above counter tops or 15 inches above floor.
Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet: 52 inches above floor.
Convenience Receptacle:
a.
General Interior Areas: 15 inches above floor.
b.
General Interior Areas (Counter Tops): Install device plate bottom
or side flush with top of splashback, or 6 inches above countertops
without splashback.
c.
Industrial Areas, Workshops: 48 inches above floor.
d.
Outdoor, All Areas: 24 inches above finished grade.
Special-Purpose Receptacle: 54 inches above floor or as shown.
E.
Install plumb and level.
F.
Flush Mounted:
1.
2.
3.
Install with concealed conduit.
Install proper type extension rings or plaster covers to make edges of
boxes flush with finished surface.
Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive
box.
G.
Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or
structural member.
H.
Install bar hangers in frame construction, or fasten boxes directly with wood
screws on wood, bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, toggle bolts on
hollow masonry units, and machine screws threaded into steelwork.
I.
Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and
nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.
J.
Provide plaster rings where necessary.
K.
Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported.
L.
Install stainless steel mounting hardware in all areas.
M.
Boxes Supporting Fixtures: Provide means of attachment with adequate strength
to support fixture.
N.
Open no more knockouts in sheet steel device boxes than are required; seal
unused openings.
O.
Box Type (Steel Raceway System):
16050-20
1.
2.
P.
Box Type (Nonmetallic Raceway System):
1.
2.
3.
4.
Q.
3.03
All Locations:
a.
Exposed Raceways: Stainless Steel.
b.
Concealed Raceways: Stainless Steel.
c.
Concrete Encased Raceways: Stainless Steel.
d.
Class I, II, or III Hazardous Areas: Stainless Steel.
Interior Climate Controlled Dry Locations:
a.
Exposed Rigid Conduit: Cast metal.
b.
Exposed EMT: Sheet steel.
c.
Concealed Raceways: Sheet steel.
d.
Concrete Encased Raceways: Cast metal.
e.
Lighting Circuits, Ceiling: Sheet steel.
f.
Class I, II, or III Hazardous Areas: Cast metal.
Corrosive Locations: Nonmetallic.
Exposed Raceways: Nonmetallic.
Concealed Raceways: Nonmetallic.
Concrete Encased Raceways: Nonmetallic.
Box Type, Corrosive Locations (PVC-Schedule 80 Raceway System): PVC
Schedule 80.
JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A.
Install where shown and where necessary to terminate, tap-off, or redirect multiple
conduit runs.
B.
Install pull boxes where necessary in raceway system to facilitate conductor
installation.
C.
Install in conduit runs at least every 150 feet or after the equivalent of three right
angle bends.
D.
Use outlet boxes as junction and pull boxes wherever possible and allowed by
applicable codes.
E.
Installed boxes shall be accessible.
F.
Do not install on finished surfaces.
G.
Install plumb and level.
H.
Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or
structural member.
16050-21
I.
Install bar hangers in frame construction, or fasten boxes directly with wood
screws on wood, bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, toggle bolts on
hollow masonry units, and machine screws or welded threaded studs on steelwork.
J.
Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and
nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.
K.
Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported.
L.
At or Below Grade:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
M.
Flush Mounted:
1.
2.
3.
N.
Install with concealed conduit.
Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive
box.
Make edges of boxes flush with final surface.
Mounting Hardware:
1.
2.
O.
Install boxes for below grade conduits flush with finished grade in
locations outside of paved areas, roadways, or walkways.
If adjacent structure is available, box may be mounted on structure surface
just above finished grade in accessible but unobtrusive location.
Obtain ENGINEER's written acceptance prior to installation in paved
areas, roadways, or walkways.
Use boxes and covers suitable to support anticipated weights.
Boxes with traffic bearing covers shall have Orange County logo.
Non-corrosive Interior Areas: 316 Stainless Steel.
All Other Areas: 316 Stainless steel.
Location/Type:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Finished, Indoor, Dry, climate controlled: NEMA 250, Type 1.
Unfinished, Indoor, Dry: NEMA 250, Type 12, 316 Stainless Steel.
Unfinished, Indoor and Outdoor, Wet and Corrosive: NEMA 250, Type
4X, 316 Stainless Steel.
Unfinished, Indoor and Outdoor, Wet, Dust, or Oil: NEMA 250, Type 13,
316 Stainless Steel.
Unfinished, Indoor and Outdoor, Hazardous: NEMA 250, Type 7 and
Type 9, where indicated.
Underground Conduits (all): Concrete Encased.
Corrosive Locations: Nonmetallic.
16050-22
3.04
WIRING DEVICES
A.
Switches:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Receptacles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.05
Mounting Height: See 3.02 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES.
Install with switch operation in vertical position.
Install single-pole, two-way switches such that toggle is in up position
when switch is on.
Install with grounding slot down except where horizontal mounting is
shown, in which case install with neutral slot up.
Ground receptacles to boxes with grounding wire only.
Weatherproof Receptacles:
a.
Install in cast metal box.
b.
Install such that hinge for protective cover is above receptacle
opening.
Ground Fault Interrupter: Install feed-through model at locations where
ground fault protection is specified for "downstream" conventional
receptacles.
Special-Purpose Receptacles: Install in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
DEVICE PLATES
A.
Securely fasten to wiring device; ensure a tight fit to the box.
B.
Flush Mounted: Install with all four edges in continuous contact with finished
wall surfaces without use of mats or similar materials. Plaster fillings will not be
acceptable.
C.
Surface Mounted: Plate shall not extend beyond sides of box unless plates have no
sharp corners or edges.
D.
Install with alignment tolerance to box of 1/16 inch.
E.
Engrave with designated titles.
F.
All boxes/panels will have name plates/warning labels, voltage, what is inside
enclosure, where to and from equipment is fed from and feeding. Building signage
shall include FACP location, key box location and warnings.
G.
Types (Unless Otherwise Shown):
16050-23
1.
2.
3.
3.06
PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH
A.
Heavy-Duty, Oil tight Type: Locations (Unless Otherwise Shown): Nonhazardous, indoor, dry locations, including motor control centers, control panels,
and individual stations.
B.
Heavy-Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion-Resistant Type:
1.
2.
3.07
Locations (Unless Otherwise Shown): Non-hazardous, outdoor, or
normally wet areas.
Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure.
TERMINAL JUNCTION BOX
A.
Install in accordance with Paragraph JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES.
B.
Label each block and terminal with permanently attached, non-destructible tag.
C.
Do not install on finished outdoor surfaces.
D.
Location:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.08
Office: Stainless Steel.
Exterior: Weatherproof.
Interior:
a.
Flush Mounted Boxes: Stainless Steel.
b.
Surface Mounted, Cast Metal Boxes: Cast metal.
c.
Surface Mounted, Sheet Steel Boxes: Stainless Steel.
d.
Surface Mounted, Nonmetallic Boxes: Plastic.
Finished, Indoor, Dry: NEMA 250, Type 1.
Unfinished, Indoor, Dry: NEMA 250, Type 12 Gasketed.
Unfinished, Indoor and Outdoor, Wet and Corrosive: NEMA 250, Type
4X.
Unfinished, Indoor and Outdoor, Wet, Dust, or Oil: NEMA 250, Type 13.
LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD
A.
Install securely, plumb, in-line and square with walls.
B.
Install top of cabinet 6 feet above floor unless otherwise shown.
C.
Provide typewritten circuit directory for each panelboard.
16050-24
3.09
3.10
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER (0- TO 600-VOLT PRIMARY)
A.
Load external vibration isolator such that no direct transformer unit metal is in
direct contact with mounting surface.
B.
Provide moisture proof, flexible conduit for electrical connections.
C.
Connect voltage taps to achieve (approximately) rated output voltage under
normal plant load conditions.
D.
Provide wall brackets for single-phase units, 15 to 167-1/2 kVA, and three-phase
units, 15 to 112 kVA.
SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNEL
A.
Furnish zinc-rich primer; paint cut ends prior to installation, where applicable.
B.
3.11
3.12
Install where required for mounting and supporting electrical equipment and
raceway systems.
MOTOR SURGE PROTECTION
A.
Ground in accordance with NFPA 70.
B.
Low Voltage: Ground terminals to equipment bus.
WARRANTY
A.
All electrical equipment shall at minimum a 3 year warranty unless otherwise
noted in specifications or drawings. If a longer warranty is noted for specific
equipment elsewhere in the specifications or drawings the longer warranty will be
required. All warranty periods shall commence at final completion.
END OF SECTION
16050-25
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It
includes requirements for electrical identification components including, but not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Buried electrical line warnings.
Identification labeling for cables and conductors.
Operational instruction signs.
Warning and caution signs.
Equipment labels and signs.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the
items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include:
1.
Product Data for each type of product specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Wires and Cables: Self-adhesive, vinyl tape not less
than 3 mils thick by 1 inch to 2 inches in width. Colored tape shall not be acceptable on
cables 1/0 awg and smaller in which case the contractor shall provide cable with the correct
colored insulation.
B. Pre-tensioned Flexible Wraparound Colored Plastic Sleeves for Cable Identification:
Flexible acrylic bands sized to suit raceway diameter and arranged to stay in place by pretensioned gripping action when coiled around the cable.
C. Wire/Cable Designation Markers: Slip on Heat Shrinkable, cable/conductor markers with
pre-printed numbers and letter.
D. Aluminum, Wraparound Cable Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014-inch-thick aluminum
sheet, fitted with slots or ears for securing permanently around wire or cable jacket or around
groups of conductors. Provide for legend application with stamped letters or numbers.
16075-1
E. Engraved, Plastic Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock
melamine plastic laminate, 1/16 inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches or 8
inches in length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in white letters on black
face and punched for mechanical fasteners.
F.
Baked Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: Pre-printed aluminum signs,
punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location.
G. Exterior Metal-Backed Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading,
pre-printed cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 20-gauge galvanized steel backing, with
colors, legend, and size appropriate to location. Provide 1/4-inch grommets in corners for
mounting.
H. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or
Number 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
I.
Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18
inch minimum width, 50-pound minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature
range from minus 50 to 350 degrees F. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color
coding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations
used in electrical identification Work with corresponding designations specified or indicated.
Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by Code.
B. Underground Electrical Line Identification: During trench backfilling for nonconcrete
encased underground power, signal, and communications lines, install continuous
underground plastic line marker located directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished
grade. Provide red fill from conduit up to warning tape. Where multiple lines installed in a
common trench, do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches; install a single line marker.
C. Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct buried and in raceway.
D. Conductor Color Coding: Provide color coding for secondary service, feeder, and branch
circuit conductors throughout the Project secondary electrical system as follows:
16075-2
Phase
A
B
C
Neutral
Ground
480/277 Volts
Brown
Orange
Yellow
White
Green
12,470 & 4160 Volts
Black
Red
Blue
White
Green
E. Wiring Standards:
1.
4160 Volt, 3-phase
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
480/277 Volt, 3-Phase Power:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Black.
Red.
White Neutral.
Motor Leads, Control Cabinet/MCC:
a.
6.
Black.
Red.
Blue.
240/120 Volt, 1-Phase Power:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Brown.
Orange.
Yellow.
White Neutral.
208 Volt, 3-Phase Power:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Black
Red
Blue
Gray Neutral
Black, numbered L1-T1, etc.
Control Wiring:
a.
Red
b.
Yellow
c.
Blue
Control circuit wiring that is de-energized when the main disconnect
is opened.
Control circuit wiring that remains energized when the main disconnect
is opened.
DC.
16075-3
d.
F.
Green
Ground.
Use conductors with color factory applied entire length of conductors except as follows:
1.
The following field applied color coding methods may be used in lieu of factory-coded
wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG.
a.
Apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of
6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply
last 2 laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch-wide
tape in colors as specified. Do not obliterate cable identification markings by
taping. Tape locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent such obliteration.
b.
In lieu of pressure-sensitive tape, colored cable ties may be used for color
identification. Apply 3 ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice
point starting 3 inches from the terminal spaced 3 inches apart. Apply with a special
tool or pliers, tighten for snug fit, and cut off excess length.
G. Power Circuit Identification: Securely fasten identifying metal tags of aluminum wraparound
marker bands to cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes, junction boxes,
manholes, and switchboard rooms with 1/4-inch steel letter and number stamps with legend
to correspond with designations on Drawings. If metal tags are provided, attach them with
approximately 55-pound test monofilament line or one-piece self-locking nylon cable ties.
H. Install wire/cable designation tape markers at termination points, splices, or junctions in each
circuit. Circuit designations shall be as indicated on Drawings.
I.
Signage:
1.
Electrical Distribution Equipment: Voltage, Power Source, Arc Flash Warning.
2.
Medium Voltage Distribution Equipment: High Voltage Warning, Power Source,
Device’s Served, Arc Flash Warning.
3.
Electrical Equipment with automatic or remote control: “Warning: This equipment
starts and stops automatically”.
4.
Electrical Equipment with external control power circuits: “Warning: This equipment
contains control circuits from an external source”.
END OF SECTION
16075-4
SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES
A.
The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO): Division I, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges,
Fourteenth Edition.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a.
C80.1, Rigid Steel Conduit-Zinc Coated.
b.
C80.3, Electrical Metallic Tubing-Zinc Coated.
c.
CS0.5, Rigid Aluminum Conduit.
d.
C80.6, Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)-Zinc Coated.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a.
A123 El, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
b.
C857, Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading
for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.
National Electrical Contractor's Association, Inc. (NECA): 5055, Standard
of Installation.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
RN 1, Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized
Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
b.
TC 2, Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and
EPC-80).
c.
TC 3, PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
d.
TC 6, PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground
Installation.
e.
VE 1, Metallic Cable Tray Systems.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code. (NEC)
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a.
1, Standard for Safety Flexible Metal Conduit.
b.
6, Standard for Safety Rigid Metal Conduit.
c.
360, Standard for Safety Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
d.
514B, Standard for Safety Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes.
e.
514C, Standard for Safety Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device
Boxes, and Covers.
f.
651, Standard for Safety Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduit.
16110-1
g.
651A, Standard for Safety Type EB and Rigid PVC Conduit and
HDPF Conduit.
h.
i.
797, Standard for Safety Electrical Metallic Tubing.
870, Standard for Safety Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and
Associated Fittings.
1242, Standard for Safety Intermediate Metal Conduit.
1660, Standard for Safety Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic
Conduit.
j.
k.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manufacturer's Literature:
a.
Rigid galvanized steel conduit.
b.
Electric metallic tubing.
c.
Rigid aluminum conduit.
d.
PVC Schedule 40 conduits.
e.
PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit.
f.
Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.
g.
Flexible, nonmetallic, liquid-tight conduit.
h.
Conduit fittings.
i.
Wireways.
Precast Manholes and Handholes:
a.
Dimensional drawings and descriptive literature.
b.
Traffic loading calculations.
c.
Accessory information.
Cable Tray Systems:
a.
Dimensional drawings, calculations, and descriptive information.
b.
NEMA load/span designation and how it was selected.
c.
Support span length and pounds-per-foot actual and future cable
loading at locations, with safety factor used.
d.
Location and magnitude of maximum simple beam deflection of
tray for loading specified.
e.
Layout drawings and list of accessories being provided.
Conduit Layout:
a.
Plan and section type, showing arrangement and location of
conduit and duct bank required for:
1)
Low and medium voltage feeder and branch circuits.
2)
Instrumentation and control systems.
3)
Communications systems.
4)
Empty conduit for future use.
b.
Reproducible drawings showing all conduits in AutoCAD with
scale not greater than 1 inch equal 20 feet.
16110-2
5.
6.
1.03
Equipment and machinery proposed for bending metal conduit.
Method for bending PVC conduit less than 30 degrees.
UL COMPLIANCE
A.
Materials manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall conform
to UL Standards and have an applied UL listing mark.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
CONDUIT AND TUBING
A.
Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT):
1.
2.
3.
B.
Rigid Aluminum Conduit:
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.
Meet requirements of NEMA TC 2 and UL 651.
UL listed for underground direct burial, concealed or direct sunlight
exposure, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors.
3/4” minimum.
Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Meet requirements of ANSI C80.5 and UL 6.
Material: Type 6063, copper-free aluminum alloy.
3/4” minimum.
PVC Schedule 40 or 80 Conduit:
1.
2.
D.
Meet requirements of ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
Material: Hot-dip galvanized, with chromated and lacquered protective
layer.
3/4” minimum.
UL 360 listed for 105 degrees C insulated conductors.
Material: Galvanized steel, with an extruded PVC jacket.
3/4” minimum.
Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid-Tight Conduit:
1.
2.
Material: PVC core with fused flexible PVC jacket.
UL 1660 listed for:
a.
Dry Conditions: 80 degrees C insulated conductors.
b.
Wet Conditions: 60 degrees C insulated conductors.
16110-3
2.02
3.
3/4” minimum.
4.
Manufacturers:
a.
Carlon; Carflex or X-Flex.
b.
T & B; Xtraflex LTC or EFC.
c.
Or equal.
FITTINGS
A.
Electric Metallic Tubing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Meet requirements of UL 514B.
Type: Steel body and locknuts with steel or malleable iron compression
nuts. Set screw and drive-on fittings not permitted.
Compression Ring: Stainless steel.
Coupling Manufacturers:
a.
Appleton; Type 95T.
b.
Crouse-Hinds; Type CPR.
c.
Or equal.
Connector Manufacturers:
a.
Appleton; Type 86T.
b.
Crouse-Hinds; Type CPR.
c.
Or equal.
Rigid Aluminum Conduit:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
General:
a.
Meet requirements of UL 514B.
b.
Type: Threaded, copper-free. Set screw fittings not permitted.
Insulated Bushing:
a.
Material: Cast aluminum, with integral insulated throat, rated for
150 degrees C.
b.
Manufacturer: O.Z. Gedney; Type AB, or equal.
Grounding Bushing:
a.
Material: Cast aluminum with integral insulated throat, rated for
150 degrees, with solderless lugs.
b.
Manufacturer: O.Z. Gedney; Type ABLG, or equal.
Conduit Hub:
a.
Material: Cast aluminum, with insulated throat.
b.
Manufacturers:
1)
O.Z. Gedney; Type CHA.
2)
T & B; Series 370AL.
3)
Or equal.
Conduit Bodies:
a.
Manufacturers (For Normal Conditions):
16110-4
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
C.
PVC Conduit and Tubing:
1.
2.
D.
Meet requirements of NEMA TC-3.
Type: PVC, slip-on.
PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
1)
Appleton; Form 85 threaded Unilets.
2)
Crouse-Hinds; Mark 9 or Form 7-SA threaded condulets.
3)
Killark; Series O Electrolets.
b.
Manufacturers (For Hazardous Locations):
1)
Appleton.
2)
Crouse-Hinds.
3)
Killark.
Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer.
Conduit Sealing Fitting Manufacturers:
a.
Appleton; Type EYF-AL or EYM-AL.
b.
Crouse-Hinds; Type EYS-SA or EZS-SA.
c.
Killark; Type EY or EYS.
Drain Seal Manufacturers:
a.
Appleton; Type EYDM-A.
b.
Crouse-Hinds; Type EYD-SA or EZD-SA.
c.
Or equal.
Drain/Breather Fitting Manufacturers:
a.
Appleton; Type ECDB.
b.
Crouse-Hinds; ECD.
c.
Or equal.
Expansion Fitting Manufacturers:
a.
Deflection/Expansion Movement: Steel City; Type DF-A, or equal.
b.
Expansion Movement Only: Steel City; Type AF-A, or equal.
Cable Sealing Fittings: To form watertight nonslip cord or cable
connection to conduit.
a.
Bushing: Neoprene at connector entry.
b.
Manufacturer: Appleton CG-S, or equal.
Meet requirements of UL 514B.
Type: Rigid galvanized steel, PVC coated by conduit manufacturer.
Overlapping pressure sealing sleeves.
Conduit Hangers, Attachments, and Accessories: PVC-coated.
Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:
1.
2.
Metal insulated throat connectors with integral nylon or plastic bushing
rated for 105 degrees C.
Insulated throat and sealing O-rings.
16110-5
3.
4.
F.
Flexible, Nonmetallic, and Liquid-Tight Conduit: Meet requirements of UL 514B.
1.
2.
G.
2.
Manufacturer: Crouse-Hinds; Type ECGJH, or equal.
Corrosive Locations:
1.
2.
2.03
New Construction:
a.
Material: Oversized sleeve, malleable iron body with sealing ring,
pressure ring, grommet seal, and pressure clamp.
b.
Manufacturer: O.Z./Gedney; Type FSK or WSK, or equal as
required.
Gored-Hole Application:
a.
Material: Assembled dual pressure disks, neoprene sealing ring,
and membrane clamp.
b.
Manufacturer: O.Z./Gedney; Series CSM, or equal.
Hazardous Locations: Approved for use in the atmosphere involved.
1.
I.
Type: One-piece fitting body, complete with lock nut, O-ring, threaded
ferrule, sealing ring, and compression nut.
Manufacturers:
a.
Carlon; Type LT.
b.
Kellems; Polytuff.
c.
T & B; LT Series.
Watertight Entrance Seal Device:
1.
H.
Long design type extending outside of box or other device at least 2
inches.
Manufacturer: T & B; Series 5300, or equal.
Material: 40-mil PVC-coated rigid steel.
Manufacturers:
a.
Robroy Industries.
b.
Carlon.
c.
Crouse-Hinds.
WIREWAYS
A.
Meet requirements of UL 870.
B.
Type: Steel-enclosed, with removable, hinged cover.
C.
Rating: Outdoor raintight if outdoor, and indoor if indoor.
16110-6
2.04
D.
Finish: Gray, baked enamel.
E.
Manufacturers:
1.
Square D.
2.
B-Line Systems, Inc.
3.
Or equal.
CABLE TRAYS
A.
Meet requirements of NEMA VE 1.
B.
Type: Ladder of welded construction.
C.
Material: Copper-free aluminum alloys 6063-T6 finishes.
D.
Cover: Louvered, minimum 0.40-inch thick aluminum.
E.
Barrier Strip: Vertical, solid type, with horizontal fittings and strip clamps.
F.
Fittings of same cross-sectional tray area, and hardware of same material as cable
tray.
G.
Tray Grounding: Conform to NFPA 70 and NEMA VE 1.
H.
Provide next higher NEMA VE 1 class designation than required for support of
designed span length.
I.
Design Loads: Use working load adequate for actual cable installed plus 50
percent additional weight allowance for future cables plus 200-pound
concentrated static load applied between side rails at midspan, with safety factor
of 2 in accordance with NEMA VE 1, Table 3-1.
J.
Expansion Joints: NEMA VE 1 for 50 degrees F maximum temperature variation.
K.
Furnish Cable Tray with no sharp edges, burrs, or weld projections.
L.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.05
B-Line Systems, Inc.
Square-D.
P. W. Industries.
PRECAST MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
A.
Concrete Strength: Minimum, 3,000 psi compressive, in 28 days.
16110-7
B.
Loading: AASHTO Division 1, H-20 in accordance with ASTM C857.
C.
Access: Provide cast concrete 6- or 12-inch risers and access hole adapters
between top of manhole and finished grade at required elevations.
D.
Drainage:
1.
2.
E.
Raceway Entrances:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Provide on all four sides.
For raceways to be installed under this Contract, provide knockout panels
or precast individual raceway openings.
At entrances where raceways are to be installed by others, provide
minimum 12-inch high by 24-inch wide knockout panels for future
raceway installation.
Embedded Pulling Iron:
1.
2.
G.
Slope floors toward drain points, leaving no pockets or other non-draining
areas.
Provide drainage outlet or sump at low point of floor constructed with a
heavy, cast iron, slotted or perforated hinged cover, and 4-inch minimum
outlet and outlet pipe.
Material: 3/4-inch diameter stock, fastened to overall steel reinforcement
before concrete is placed.
Location:
a.
Wall: Opposite each raceway entrance and knockout panel for
future raceway entrance.
b.
Floor: Centered below manhole or handhole cover.
Cable Racks:
1.
2.
Arms and Insulators: Adjustable, of sufficient number to accommodate
cables for each raceway entering or leaving manhole, including spares.
Wall Attachment:
a.
Adjustable inserts in concrete walls. Bolts or embedded studs not
permitted.
b.
Insert Spacing: Maximum 3-foot on center entire inside perimeter
of manhole.
c.
Arrange so that spare raceway ends are clear for future cable
installation.
16110-8
H.
Manhole Frames and Covers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
Handhole Frames and Covers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Material: Steel, hot-dipped galvanized.
Cover Type: Solid, bolt on, of checkered design.
Cover Loading: H-20.
Cover Designation: Burn by welder, on upper side in integral letters,
minimum 2 inches in height, appropriate titles:
a.
600 Volts and Below: ELECTRIC LV.
b.
TELEPHONE.
Manufacturers:
a.
US Foundry.
b.
Vulcan.
c.
Or equal.
J.
Hardware: Steel, hot-dip galvanized.
K.
Furnish knockout for ground rod in each handhole and manhole.
L.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.06
Material: Machined cast iron.
Cover Type: Indented, solid top design, with two drop handles each.
Cover Loading: AASHTO Division I, H-20.
Cover Designation: Cast, on upper side, in integral letters, minimum 2
inches in height, appropriate titles:
a.
Above 600 Volts: ELECTRIC HV.
b.
600 Volts and Below: ELECTRIC LV.
c.
TELEPHONE.
Allied Precast.
Atlantic Precast, Inc.
Dura Stress, Inc.
Mack Precast.
Standard Precast, Inc.
Hanson Pipe & Products.
Oldcastle Precast.
Delzotto Precast.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Duct Bank Spacers:
1.
Type: Nonmetallic, interlocking, for multiple conduit sizes.
16110-9
2.
3.
B.
Identification Devices:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Suitable for all types of conduit.
Manufacturer: Underground Device, Inc.; Type WUNPEECE, or equal.
Raceway Tags:
a.
Material: Permanent, nylon.
b.
Shape: Round.
c.
Raceway Designation: Pressure stamped, embossed, or engraved.
d.
Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers not permitted.
Warning Tape:
a.
Material: Polyethylene, 4-mil gauge.
b.
Color: Red.
c.
Width: Minimum 6-inch.
d.
Designation: Warning on tape that electric circuit is located below
tape.
e.
Manufacturers:
1)
Blackburn, Type RT.
2)
Griffolyn Co.
3)
Or equal.
Buried Raceway Marker:
a.
Material: Sheet bronze, consisting of double-ended arrows, straight
for straight runs and bent at locations where routing changes
direction.
b.
Designation: Incise to depth of 3/32 inch, ELECTRIC CABLES in
letters 1/4-inch high.
c.
Minimum Dimension: 1/4-inch thick, 10 inches long and 3/4-inch
wide.
Electronic Marker Systems
a.
Manufacturer: 3M, or equal
1)
Scotchmark EMS11 Electronic Marker Locator #125.
2)
Scotchmark electronic marker.
3)
Greenball marker #1404
Raceway Coating:
1.
2.
Material: Bitumastic or plastic tape coating.
Manufacturers:
a. Koppers bitumastic; No. 505.
b. Scotchwrap; No. 51, plastic tape.
c. Or approved equal.
16110-10
D.
Wraparound Duct Band:
1.
2.
Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin, precoated with hotmelt adhesive.
Manufacturer: Raychem; Type TWDB, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Conduit and Tubing sizes shown are based on the use of copper conductors.
Reference Section 16120, CONDUCTORS, concerning conduit sizing for
aluminum conductors.
B.
All installed Work shall comply with NECA 5055.
C.
Crushed or deformed raceways not permitted.
D.
Maintain raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture.
E.
Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with watertight and dusttight seals until time for pulling in conductors.
F.
Aluminum Conduit: Do not install in direct contact with concrete.
G.
Sealing Fittings: Provide drain seal in vertical raceways where condensate may
collect above sealing fitting.
H.
Avoid moisture traps where possible. When unavoidable in exposed conduit runs,
provide junction box and drain fitting at conduit low point.
I.
Group raceways installed in same area.
J.
Proximity to Heated Piping: Install raceways minimum 12 inches from parallel
runs.
K.
Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways. Avoid
obstruction of passageways.
L.
Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or
intersections of vertical planes.
16110-11
3.02
M.
Block Walls: Do not install raceways in same horizontal course with reinforcing
steel.
N.
Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations.
O.
Paint threads, before assembly of fittings, of galvanized conduit or IMC installed
in exposed or damp locations with zinc-rich paint or liquid galvanizing
compound.
P.
All metal conduit to be reamed, burrs removed, and cleaned before installation of
conductors, wires, or cables.
Q.
Do not install raceways in concrete equipment pads, foundations, or beams.
R.
Horizontal raceways installed under floor slabs shall lie completely under slab,
with no part embedded within slab.
S.
Install concealed, embedded, and buried raceways so that they emerge at right
angles to surface and have no curved portion exposed.
T.
Provide grounding bushing in all junction boxes and enclosures
U.
Where total number of bends exceed 270 degrees, provide additional junction box
sized for application.
CONDUIT APPLICATION
A.
Diameter: Minimum 3/4 inch; Underground: 1 inch.
B.
Exterior, Exposed:
1. Rigid aluminum.
C.
Interior, Exposed:
1.
D.
Interior, Concealed (Not Embedded in Concrete):
1.
2.
E.
Rigid aluminum.
Rigid aluminum.
PVC Schedule 40.
Interior – Concealed within stud walls and above ceilings:
1.
EMT
16110-12
F.
Aboveground, Embedded in Concrete Walls, Ceilings, or Floors: PVC Schedule
40.
G. Concrete Encased: PVC Schedule 80 with 6“ of red fill above concrete envelope.
H.
Under Slabs-On-Grade: PVC Schedule 80. Provide rigid aluminum elbows for
below grade PLC conduit. Elbows shall be coated in mastic for corrosion control.
I.
Corrosive Areas, Exterior: PVC Schedule 80.
J.
Corrosive Areas, Interior: PVC Schedule 80.
K.
Conduits between VFD’s and motors rigid aluminum (inside and outside).
L. Classified areas: rigid aluminum.
3.04
CONNECTIONS
A.
For motors, wall or ceiling mounted fans and unit heaters, dry type transformers,
electrically operated valves, instrumentation, and other equipment where flexible
connection is required to minimize vibration:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Conduit Size 4 Inches or Less: Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.
Conduit Size Over 4 Inches: Nonflexible.
Corrosive Areas: Flexible, nonmetallic, liquid or PVC-coated metallic,
liquid-tight.
Length: 18-inch minimum, 60-inch maximum, of sufficient length to allow
movement or adjustment of equipment.
B.
Lighting Fixtures in Dry Areas: Flexible steel, non-liquid-tight conduit.
C.
Outdoor Areas, Process Areas Exposed to Moisture, and Areas required to be Oiltight and Dust-Tight: Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.
D.
Transition From Underground to Exposed: Rigid aluminum conduit unless
restricted by code. Coat aluminum conduit below grade with mastic for corrosion
control.
E.
Under Equipment Mounting Pads: Rigid aluminum conduit.
F.
Exterior Light Pole Foundations: Rigid aluminum conduit.
16110-13
3.05
PENETRATIONS
A.
Make at right angles, unless otherwise shown.
B.
Notching or penetration of structural members, including footings and beams, not
permitted.
C.
Fire-Rated Walls, Floors, or Ceilings: Fire-stop openings around penetrations to
maintain fire-resistance rating.
D.
Apply single layer of wraparound duct band to all metallic conduit in contact with
concrete floor slabs to a point 2 inches above concrete surface.
E.
Concrete Walls, Floors, or Ceilings (Aboveground): Provide non-shrink grout drypack, or use watertight seal device.
F.
Entering Structures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
General: Seal raceway at the first box or outlet with minimum 2 inches
thick expandable plastic compound to prevent the entrance of gases or
liquids from one area to another.
Concrete Roof or Membrane Waterproofed Wall or Floor:
a.
Provide a watertight seal.
b.
Without Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal
device on each side.
c.
Securely anchor malleable iron body of watertight entrance seal
device into construction with one or more integral flanges.
d.
Secure membrane waterproofing to watertight entrance seal device
in a permanent, watertight manner.
Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment:
a.
Penetrate equipment in area established by manufacturer.
b.
Terminate conduit with flexible metal conduit at junction box or
condulet attached to exterior surface of equipment prior to
penetrating equipment.
c.
Seal penetration with silicone type sealant as specified in Section
07270, FIRE STOPPING.
Corrosive-Sensitive Areas:
a.
Seal all conduits passing through chlorine and ammonia room
walls.
b.
Seal all conduit entering equipment panel boards and field panels
containing electronic equipment.
c.
Seal penetration with silicone type sealant as specified in Section
07270, FIRE STOPPING.
16110-14
5.
6.
7.
3.06
SUPPORT
A.
Support from structural members only, at intervals not exceeding NFPA 70
requirements, and in any case not exceeding 10 feet. Do not support from piping,
pipe supports, or other raceways.
B.
All supporting hardware shall be 316 stainless steel.
C.
Multiple Adjacent Raceways: Provide ceiling trapeze. For trapeze-supported
conduit, allow 40 percent extra space for future conduit.
D.
Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
3.07
Existing or Precast Wall (Underground): Core drill wall and install a
watertight entrance seal device.
Non-waterproofed Wall or Floor (Underground, without Concrete
Encasement):
a.
Provide Schedule 40 galvanized pipe sleeve, or watertight entrance
seal device.
b.
Fill space between raceway and sleeve with an expandable plastic
compound on each side.
Manholes and Handholes:
a.
Metallic Raceways: Provide insulated grounding bushings.
b.
Nonmetallic Raceways: Provide bell ends flush with wall.
c.
Install such that raceways enter as near as possible to one end of
wall, unless otherwise shown.
Wood: Wood screws.
Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.
Concrete or Brick: Expansion shields, or threaded studs driven in by
powder charge, with lock washers and nuts.
Steelwork: Machine screws.
Nails or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry for attaching raceway not
permitted. Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use wire
in lieu of straps or hangers.
BENDS
A.
Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical
distance.
B.
Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius.
C.
Install with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings.
16110-15
D.
Avoid field-made bends and offsets, but where necessary, make with acceptable
hickey or bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to facilitate bending.
E.
Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with same
radius so that bends are parallel.
F.
Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if there is change
in plane of run, and raceways are same size.
G.
PVC Conduit:
1.
2.
3.
H.
3.08
3.09
Bends 30-Degree and Larger: Aluminum conduit.
90-Degree Bends: Provide aluminum conduit elbows.
Use manufacturer's recommended method for forming smaller bends.
Flexible Conduit: Do not make bends that exceed allowable conductor bending
radius of cable to be installed or that significantly restricts conduit flexibility.
EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS
A.
Provide on all raceways at all structural expansion joints, and in long tangential
runs.
B.
Provide expansion/deflection joints for 50 degrees F maximum temperature
variation.
C.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PVC CONDUIT
A.
Solvent Welding:
1.
2.
B.
Adapters:
1.
2.
C.
Provide manufacturer recommended solvent; apply to all joints.
Install such that joint is watertight.
PVC to Metallic Fittings: PVC terminal type.
PVC to Rigid Metal Conduit or IMC: PVC female adapter.
Belied-End Conduit: Bevel the un-belled end of the joint prior to joining.
16110-16
3.10
PVC-COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
A.
3.11
3.12
Not used on project
WIREWAYS
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Locate with cover on accessible vertical face of wireway, unless otherwise shown.
CABLE TRAYS
A.
Install in accordance with Application Information Section of NEMA VE 1.
B.
Provide accessories as necessary for a complete system.
C.
Install such that joints are not made at support brackets.
D.
Install horizontal section support brackets between support point and quarter point
of tray span.
E.
Provide ceiling trapeze for all horizontal cable trays.
F.
Install support within 2 feet on each side of expansion joints and within 2 feet of
fitting extremity.
G.
Provide expansion joints in accordance with NEMA VE 1 for 50 degrees F
maximum temperature variation.
H.
Install horizontal tray level, plumb, straight, and true to line or grade within a
tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and within a cumulative maximum of 1/2 inch.
I.
Install vertical tray plumb within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
J.
Install without exposed raw edges.
K.
Maintain 9-inch vertical separation between multi-tiered trays having a common
support, and at all crossover locations.
L.
Provide bonding jumper at each expansion joint and adjustable connection.
M.
Ground Conductor: Provide properly sized clamps for each section, elbow, tee,
cross, and reducer.
16110-17
3.13
TERMINATION AT ENCLOSURES
A.
Cast Metal Enclosure: Provide manufacturer's pre-molded insulating sleeve inside
metallic conduit terminating in threaded hubs.
B.
Sheet Metal Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
3.14
Rigid Galvanized Conduit:
a.
Provide one lock nut each on inside and outside of enclosure.
b.
Install grounding bushing.
c.
Provide bonding jumper from grounding bushing to equipment
ground bus or ground pad; if neither ground bus nor pad exists,
connect jumper to lag bolt attached to metal enclosure.
d.
Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where grounding is not
required.
e.
Provide insulated throat when conduit terminates in sheet metal
boxes having threaded hubs.
Electric Metallic Tubing: Provide gland compression, insulated
connectors.
Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide two screw type, insulated, malleable iron
connectors.
Flexible, Nonmetallic Conduit: Provide nonmetallic, liquid-tight strain
relief connectors.
PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: Provide PVC-coated,
liquid-tight, metallic connector.
PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: Provide PVC terminal adapter with lock nut.
Motor Control Center, Switchboard, Switchgear, and Free-Standing Enclosures:
Terminate conduit-entering bottom with grounding bushing; provide a grounding
jumper extending to equipment ground bus or grounding pad.
UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS
A.
All conduit underground shall be concrete encased, including power and control
conduits, single conduit runs. Provide Red Dye on top of concrete ductbanks.
B.
Grade: Maintain minimum grade of 4 inches in 100 feet, either from one manhole,
handhole, or pull box to the next, or from a high point between them, depending
on surface contour.
C.
Cover: Maintain minimum 2-foot cover above conduit, unless otherwise shown.
D.
Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts.
16110-18
E.
Couplings: In multiple conduit runs, stagger so that couplings in adjacent runs are
not in same transverse line.
F.
Union type fittings not permitted.
G.
Spacers:
1.
2.
H.
Support conduit so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling or
concrete placement.
I.
Installation with Other Piping Systems:
1.
2.
3.
Crossings: Maintain minimum 12-inch vertical separation.
Parallel Runs: Maintain minimum 12-inch separation.
Installation over valves or couplings not permitted.
J.
Metallic Raceway Coating: At couplings and joints and along entire length, apply
wraparound duct band with one-half tape width overlap to obtain two complete
layers.
K.
Backfill:
1.
2.
3.15
Provide preformed, nonmetallic spacers, designed for such purpose, to
secure and separate parallel conduit runs in a trench.
Install at intervals not greater than that specified in NFPA 70 for support
of the type conduit used, but in no case greater than 10 feet.
As specified in Section 02220, EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND
COMPACTION.
Do not backfill until inspected by ENGINEER.
MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
A.
Excavate, shore, brace, backfill, and final grade in accordance with Section
02220, EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTION.
B.
Do not install until final raceway grading has been determined.
C.
Install such that raceways enter at nearly right angles and as near as possible to
one end of wall, unless otherwise shown.
D.
Grounding: As specified in Section 16450, GROUNDING.
E.
Identification: Field stamp covers with manhole or handhole number as shown.
Stamped numbers shall be 1-inch minimum height.
16110-19
3.16
3.17
EMPTY RACEWAYS
A.
Provide permanent, removable cap over each end.
B.
Provide PVC plug with pull-tab for underground raceways with end bells.
C.
Provide nylon pull cord.
D.
Identify, as specified in Paragraph IDENTIFICATION DEVICES, with
waterproof tags attached to pull cord at each end, and at intermediate pull point.
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
Raceway Tags:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Warning Tape: Install approximately 12 inches above underground raceways.
Align parallel to, and within 12 inches of, centerline of runs.
C.
Buried Raceway Markers:
1.
2.
3.18
Identify origin and destination.
Install at each terminus, near midpoint, and at minimum intervals of every
50 feet of exposed Raceway, whether in ceiling space or surface mounted.
Provide nylon strap for attachment.
Inside of Manholes: Identify origin and destination, voltage, and spares.
Install at grade to indicate direction of underground raceways.
Install at all bends and at intervals not exceeding 100 feet in straight runs.
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A.
Protect products from effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during
construction.
B.
Provide and maintain manufactured watertight and dust-tight seals over all
conduit openings during construction.
C.
Touch up painted conduit threads after assembly to cover nicks or scars.
D.
Touch up damage to coating on PVC-coated conduit with patching compound
approved by manufacturer.
16110-20
3.19
EXISTING UTILITIES
A.
Perform exploratory excavation to locate all existing utilities/irrigation etc. prior
to the installation of new equipment/conduits.
END OF SECTION
16110-21
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES
A.
The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 386, Standard for
Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems
Above 600V.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a.
A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting
Chromium-Nickel-P1ated Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
b.
B3, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
c.
B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper
Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.
d.
B263, Standard Test Method for Determination of Cross- Sectional
Area of Stranded Conductors.
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC):
a.
CS 5, Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Shielded Power Cables
Rated 5 Through 35 kV.
b.
CS 6, Ethylene- Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Shielded Power
Cables Rated 5 Through 69 kV.
Insulated Cable Engineer's Association, Inc. (ICEA): T-29-250, Procedure
for Conducting Vertical Cable Tray Flame Test With a Theoretical Heat
Input of 210,000 Btu/hour.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
a.
48, Standard Test Procedures and Requirements or High-Voltage
Alternating Current Cable Terminations.
b.
404, Standard for Cable Joints for Use with Extruded Dielectric
Cable Rated 5,000V through 46,000V and Cable Joints for Use
with Laminated Dielectric Cable Rated 2,500V through 500,000V.
National Electrical Contractors Association, Inc. (NECA): 5055, Standard
of Installation.
National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA):
a.
CC 1, Electric Power Connectors for Substations.
b.
WC 3, Rubber-insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy.
c.
WC 5, Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cable for the
Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.
16120-1
d.
8.
9.
1.02
WC 7, Crosslinked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene-lnsulated Wire
and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical
Energy.
e.
WC 8, Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable for
the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.
f.
WC 55, Instrumentation Cables and Thermocouple Wire.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code
(NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a.
13, Standard for Safety Power-Limited Circuit Cables.
b.
44, Standard for Safety Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables.
c.
62, Standard for Safety Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire.
d.
486A, Standard for Safety Wire Connector and Soldering Lugs for
Use with Copper Conductors.
e.
486B, Standard for Safety Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for
Use with Aluminum Conductors.
f.
510, Standard for Safety Insulating Tape.
g.
854, Standard for Safety Service-Entrance Cables.
h.
910, Standard for Safety Test Method for Fire and Smoke
Characteristics of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Used in Air
Handling Spaces.
i.
1072, Standard for Safety Medium-Voltage Power Cables.
j.
1277, Standard for Safety Electrical Power and Control Tray
Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members.
k.
1581, Standard for Safety Reference Standard for Electrical Wires,
Cables, and Flexible Cords.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Wire and cable descriptive product information.
Wire and cable accessories descriptive product information.
Cable fault detection system descriptive product information.
Manufactured wiring systems descriptive product information.
Manufactured wire systems rating information.
Manufactured wire systems dimensional drawings.
Manufactured wire systems special fittings.
Busway descriptive product information.
Busway rating information.
Busway dimensional drawings.
Busway special fitting information.
Busway-equipment interface information for equipment to be connected to
busways.
16120-2
B.
Quality Control Submittals:
1.
2.
1.03
Certified Factory Test Report for conductors 600 volts and below.
Certified Factory Test Report per AEIC CS6, including AEIC qualification
report for conductors above 600 volts.
UL COMPLIANCE
A.
Materials manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall conform
to UL Standards and have an applied UL listing mark.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A.
Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 3, WC 5, and WC 7.
B.
Conductor Type:
1.
2.
3.
120- and 277-Volt Lighting, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper.
120-Volt Receptacle Circuits, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper.
All Other Circuits: Stranded copper.
C.
Insulation: Type THHN/THWN, except for sizes No. 6 and larger, with XHHW
insulation.
D.
Aerial Conductors and Cables:
1.
2.
E.
Flexible Cords and Cables:
1.
2.
F.
Type USE/RHH/RHW insulation, UL 54 listed, Type RHW-2/USE-2.
Conform to physical and minimum thickness requirements of NEMA WC
3.
Type SOW-A50 with ethylene propylene rubber insulation in accordance
with UL 62.
Conform to physical and minimum thickness requirements of NEMA WC
8.
Cable Tray Conductors and Cables: Type TC.
16120-3
2.02
600-VOLT RATED CABLE
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Type: TC, meeting requirements of UL 1277, including Vertical Tray
Flame Test at 20,000 Btu/hr, and NFPA 70, Article 340, or UL 13 Listed
Power Limited Circuit Cable meeting requirements of NFPA 70, Article
725.
Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer's name, maximum
working voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing
mark.
Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit.
Minimum Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C dry locations, 75 degrees C
wet locations.
Overall Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil-resistant.
CABLE Type “A”, Wire and Connectors
1. Cable shall be rated for 600 volts and shall meet the requirements below:
2. Conductors shall be stranded
3. All wire shall be brought to the job in unbroken packages and shall bear the
data of manufacturing; not older than 12 months.
4. Type of wire shall be XHHW, rated 75 degrees C suitable for wet locations
except where required otherwise by the drawings.
5. No wire smaller than No. 12 gauge shall be used unless specifically indicated.
6. Conductor metal shall be copper.
7. All conductors shall be megger tested after installation and insulation must be
in compliance with the Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
Minimum Values of Insulation Resistance.
C.
Type l-Multiconductor Control Cable:
1.
2.
Conductors:
a.
No. 14 AWG, seven-strand copper.
b.
Insulation: 15-mil PVC with 4-mil nylon.
c.
UL 1581 listed as Type THHN/THWN rated VW-I.
d.
Conductor group bound with spiral wrap of barrier tape.
e.
Color Code: In accordance with NEMA WC 5, Method 1, and
Sequence K-2.
Cable: Passes the ICEA T-29-520 210,000 Btu/hr Vertical Tray Flame
Test.
16120-4
3.
4.
D.
Cable Sizes:
No. of
Conductors
Max. Outside
Diameter (inches)
Jacket Thickness
(mils)
3
5
7
12
19
25
37
0.41
0.48
0.52
0.72
00.83
1.00
1.15
45
45
45
60
60
60
80
Manufacturers:
a.
Okonite Co.
b.
Rome Cable.
c.
Or equal.
Type 2-Multiconductor Power Cable:
1.
2.
3.
Conductors:
a.
Class B stranded, coated copper.
b.
Insulation: Chemically crosslinked ethylene-propylene with
Hypalon jacket.
c.
UL 1581 listed as Type EPR, rated VW-1.
d.
Color Code: Conductors, size No. 8 AWG and smaller, colored
conductors, NEMA WC5 Method 1, color 5 per Article POWER
CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING. Conductors, size No. 6 AWG
and larger, NEMA WC5, Method 4.
Cable passes the ICEA T-29-520 210,000 Btu/hr Vertical Tray Flame Test.
Cable Sizes:
Conductor
Size
12
Minimum
Ground
Wire
Size
12
10
10
8
10
No. Of
Conductors
16120-5
2
3
4
2
3
4
3
4
Max.
Outside
Diameter
(Inches)
0.42
0.45
0.49
0.54
0.58
0.63
0.66
0.72
Nominal
Jacket
Thickness
(Mils)
45
45
45
60
60
60
60
Conductor
Size
4.
E.
6
Minimum
Ground
Wire
Size
8
4
6
2
6
1/0
6
2/0
4
4/0
4
No. Of
Conductors
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
Max.
Outside
Diameter
(Inches)
0.74
0.81
0.88
0.97
1.01
1.11
1.22
1.35
1.32
1.46
1.56
1.78
Nominal
Jacket
Thickness
(Mils)
60
60
80
80
80
80
80
Manufacturers:
a.
Okonite Co.
b.
Rome Cable.
c.
Or equal.
Type B-No. 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair, Instrumentation Cable: Single pair,
designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications
meeting NEMA WC 55 requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal thickness.
Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic
polymer overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
Dimension: 0.31-inch nominal OD.
Conductors:
a.
Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric,
meeting requirements of ASTM B8
b.
20 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper drain wire.
c.
Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC.
d.
Jacket: 4-mil nominal nylon.
e.
Color Code: Pair conductors black and white/clear.
Manufacturers:
a.
Okonite Co.
b.
Alpha Wire Corp.
c.
Rome Cable.
The following test shall be performed on instrumentation and control
system cables. All tests shall be end-to-end test of installed cables with
the ends supported in free air, not adjacent to any ground object. All test
16120-6
data shall be recorded on forms acceptable to the Engineer. Complete
records of all tests shall be made and delivered to the Engineer.
a.
Continuity tests shall be performed by measuring wire/shield loop
resistances of signal cable as the wires, taken one at a time, are
shorted to the channel shield. No loop resistance measurement
shall carry by more than +2 ohms from the calculated average loop
resistance valve.
b.
Insulation resistance tests shall be performed by using a 500 volt
megohmeter to measure the insulation resistance between each
channel wire and channel shield, between individual channel
shields in a multi-channel cable, between each individual channel
and the overall cable shield in multi-channel cable, between each
wire and ground, and between each shield and ground. Values of
resistance less than 10 megohms shall be unacceptable.
F.
Type B1-No. 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable: Single
triad, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log
applications meeting NEMA WC 55 requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal.
Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic
polymer, overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
Dimension: 0.32-inch nominal OD.
Conductors:
a.
Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric,
meeting requirements of ASTM B8.
b.
20 AWG, seven-strand, tinned copper drain wire.
c.
Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC.
d.
Jacket: 4-mil nylon.
e.
Color Code: Triad conductors black, red, and blue.
Manufacturers:
a.
Okonite Co.
b.
Alpha Wire Corp.
c.
Rome Cable.
Type B2-No. 18 AWG, Multi-Twisted, Shielded Pairs with a Common Overall
Shield Instrumentation Cable: Designed for use as instrumentation, process
control, and computer cable, meeting NEMA WC 55 requirements.
1.
Conductors:
a.
Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, in
accordance with ASTM B8
b.
Tinned copper drain wires.
c.
Pair drain wire size AWG 20, group drain wire size AWG 18.
d.
Insulation: 15-mil PVC.
16120-7
e.
f.
2.
3.
Jacket: 4-mil nylon.
Color Code: Pair conductors black and red with red conductor
numerically printed for group identification.
g.
Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic
polymer.
Cable Shield: 2.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer,
overlapped for 100 percent coverage.
Cable Sizes:
Number
of Pairs
Maximum Outside
Diameter
(Inches)
0.50
0.68
0.82
0.95
1.16
1.33
1.56
4
8
12
16
24
36
50
4.
H.
Nominal Jacket
Thickness
(Mils)
45
60
60
80
80
80
80
Manufacturers:
a.
Okonite Co.
b.
Alpha Wire Corp.
c.
Rome Cable.
Type B3-No. 18 AWG, Multi-twisted Pairs with a Common Overall Shield
Instrumentation Cable: Designed for use as instrumentation, process control, and
computer cable meeting NEMA WC 55.
1.
2.
3.
Conductors:
a.
Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, in
accordance with ASTM B8.
b.
Tinned copper drain wire size 18 AWG
c.
Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC.
d.
Jacket: 4-mil nylon.
e.
Color Code: Pair conductors black and red, with red conductor
numerically printed for group identification.
Cable Shield: 2.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer,
overlapped for 100 percent coverage.
Cable Sizes:
16120-8
Number
of Pairs
Maximum Outside
Diameter
(Inches)
0.46
0.63
0.75
0.83
1.06
1.21
1.42
4
8
12
16
24
36
50
4.
I.
2.03
2.04
Nominal Jacket
Thickness
(Mils)
45
60
60
60
80
80
80
Manufacturers:
a.
Okonite Co.
b.
Alpha Wire Corp.
c.
Rome Cable.
RTD Type Cable:
1. Coordinate with pump supplier for the actual RTD type (2-wire or 3-wire
type) supplied with the motor and supplier recommended RTD type cable and
provide accordingly.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Belden, or equal.
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
Equipment: Stranded copper with green, Type USE/RHH/RHW-XLPE or
THHN/THWN, insulation.
B.
Direct Buried: Bare stranded copper.
ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A.
Tape:
1.
2.
3.
General Purpose, Flame Retardant: 7-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 33,
rated for 90 degrees C minimum, meeting requirements of UL 510.
Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: 8.5-mil, vinyl plastic,
Scotch Brand 88.
Arcs and Fireproofing:
a.
30-mil, elastomer
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1) Scotch; Brand 77, with Scotch Brand 69 glass cloth tape binder.
2) Plytnount; Plyarc 30, with Plymount Plyglas glass cloth tape
binder.
16120-9
B.
Identification Devices:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Sleeve: Permanent, PVC, yellow or white, with legible machine-printed
black markings.
Marker Plate: Nylon, with legible designations permanently hot stamped
on plate.
Grounding Conductor: Permanent green heat-shrink sleeve, 2-inch
minimum.
Connectors and Terminations:
1.
D.
Nylon, Self-Insulated Crimp Connectors:
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon.
2) Burndy; Insulink.
3) ILSCO.
2.
Nylon Self-Insulated, Crimp Locking-Fork, Torque-Type Terminator:
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon.
2) Burndy; Insulink.
3) ILSCO.
Cable Lugs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
In accordance with NEMA CC I.
Rated 600 volts of same material as conductor metal.
Insulated, Locking-Fork, Compression Lugs:
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon.
2)
ILSCO; ILSCONS.
3)
Or equal.
Un-insulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators:
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Square D; Versitide.
2)
Thomas & Betts; Color-Keyed.
3)
ILSCO.
Un-insulated, Bolted, Two-Way Connectors and Terminators:
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Thomas & Betts; Locktite.
2)
Burndy; Quiklug.
3)
ILSCO.
Cable Ties: Nylon, adjustable, self-locking, and reusable.
1.
Manufacturers and Product: Thomas & Betts; TY-RAP, or equal.
16120-10
F.
Heat Shrinkable Insulation: Thermally stabilized, crosslinked polyofin.
1.
2.05
PULLING COMPOUND
A.
Nontoxic, non-corrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, wax-based lubricant;
UL listed.
B.
Suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, hypalon, CPE, and leadcovered wire and cable.
C.
Suitable for zinc-coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, and fiberglass
raceways.
D.
Manufacturers and Products:
1.
2.
3.
2.06
2.07
Manufacturers and Product: Thomas & Betts; SHRINK-KON, or equal.
Ideal Co.; Yellow 77.
Polywater, Inc.
Cable Grip Co.
BUSWAY
A.
Low impedance, copper bus bar, outdoor copper-free 1/8-inch extruded aluminum
housing with full neutral (where specified) and internal ground bus, totally
enclosed non-ventilated and joint insulation of polyester film.
B.
UL listed for support and spacing provided, meeting NFPA 70 requirements,
NEMA BU-1, UL B57, ANSI C37.23, and totally enclosed throughout its length.
C.
Suitable for mounting in vertical (edgewise) or horizontal position without
derating, and capable of withstanding short-circuit of 100,000 amperes
symmetrical.
D.
Provide expansion fitting when the bus crosses a building expansion joint.
E.
Provide integral weather seal on all outdoor entrance points.
F.
Provide flanged ends or end cable tap box on all indoor end points.
G.
Manufactured by Square D, Model I-Line II, or approved equal.
WARNING TAPE
A.
As specified in Section 16110, RACEWAYS.
16120-11
2.08
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Conductors 600-Volts and Below: Test in accordance with UL 44 and 854
Standards.
B.
Conductors Above 600 Volts: Test in accordance with NEMA W8 and AEIC CS
6 partial discharge level test for EPR insulated cable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Conductor installation to be in accordance with NECA 5055.
B.
Conductor and cable sizing shown is based on copper conductors, unless noted
otherwise.
C.
Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendations for maximum pulling
tensions and minimum bending radii.
D.
Tighten screws and terminal bolts in accordance with UL 486A for copper
conductors.
E.
Cable Lugs: Provide with correct number of holes, bolt size, and center-to-center
spacing as required by equipment terminals.
F.
Bundling: Where single conductors and cables in manholes, hand holes, vaults,
and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means,
bundle conductors from each conduit throughout their exposed length with cable
ties placed at intervals not exceeding 18 inches on center.
G.
Ream, remove burrs, and clear interior of installed conduit before pulling wires or
cables.
H.
Concrete-Encased Raceway Installation: Prior to installation of conductors, pull
through each raceway a mandrel approximately 1/4-inch smaller than raceway
inside diameter.
I.
Cable Tray Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install wire and cable parallel and straight in tray.
Bundle, in groups, all wire and cable of same voltage having a common
routing and destination; use cable ties, at maximum intervals of 8 feet.
Clamp cable bundles prior to making end termination connections.
Separate cables of different voltage rating in same cable tray with barriers.
16120-12
5.
3.02
Fasten wires, cables, and bundles to tray with nylon cable straps at the
following maximum intervals:
a.
Horizontal Runs: 20 feet.
b.
Vertical Runs: 5 feet.
POWER CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING
A.
Conductors 600 Volts and Below:
1.
2.
3.
No. 6 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at
each end, and at accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlapping
turns, covering an area 1-1/2 to 2 inches wide.
No. 8 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors.
Colors:
System
All Systems
240/120 Volts
Single-Phase, Three-Wire
Conductor
Color
Equipment Grounding
Green
Grounded Neutral
White
One Hot Leg
Black
Other Hot Leg
Red
208Y/120 Volts
Grounded Neutral
White
Three-Phase, Four-Wire
Phase A
Black
Phase B
Red
Phase C
Blue
240/120 Volts
Grounded Neutral
White
Three-Phase, Four-Wire
Phase A
Black
Delta, Center Tap
High (wild) Leg
Orange
Ground on Single-Phase
Phase C
Blue
480Y/277 Volts
Grounded Neutral
Gray
Three-Phase, Four-Wire
Phase A
Brown
Phase B
Orange
Phase C
Yellow
NOTE: Phase A, B, C implies direction of positive phase rotation
4.
3.03
Tracer: Outer covering of white with an identifiable colored strip other
than green in accordance with NFPA 70.
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Circuits Appearing in Circuit Schedules: identify power, instrumentation, and control
conductor circuits, using circuit schedule designations, at each termination and in
accessible locations such as manholes, hand holes, panels, switchboards, motor
control centers, pull boxes, and terminal boxes.
B.
Circuits Not Appearing in Circuit Schedules:
16120-13
1.
2.
C.
Method:
1.
2.
3.
3.04
Assign circuit name based on device or equipment at load end of circuit.
Where this would result in same name being assigned to more than one
circuit, add number or letter to each otherwise identical circuit name to
make it unique.
Conductors No. 3 AWG and Smaller: Identify with sleeves.
Cables, and Conductors No. 2 AWG and Larger:
a.
Identify with marker plates.
b.
Attach marker plates with nylon tie cord.
Taped-on markers or tags relying on adhesives not permitted.
CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW
A.
Install 10 AWG or 12 AWG conductors for branch circuit power wiring in
lighting and receptacle circuits.
B.
Do not splice incoming service conductors and branch power distribution
conductors No. 6 AWG and larger unless specifically indicated or approved by
ENGINEER.
C.
Connections and Terminations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Install wire nuts only on solid conductors.
Install nylon self-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for
instrumentation, control, and power circuit conductors No. 6 AWG and
smaller.
Install un-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation,
control, and power circuit conductors No. 4 AWG through No. 2/0 AWG.
Install un-insulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators for power
circuit conductors No. 4/0 AWG and larger.
Install un-insulated bolted two-way connectors for motor circuit
conductors No. 12 and larger.
Tape insulates all un-insulated connections.
Place no more than one conductor in any single-barrel pressure
connection.
Install crimp connectors with tools approved by connector manufacturer.
Install terminals and connectors acceptable for type of material used.
Compression Lugs
a.
Attach with a tool specifically designed for purpose.
b.
Tool shall provide complete controlled crimp and shall not release
until crimp is complete.
c.
Do not use plier type crimpers.
16120-14
D.
Do not use soldered mechanical joints.
E.
Splices and Terminations:
1.
Splices shall not be allowed unless approved on a case by case bases. All
approved splices shall be witnessed by R.P.R. with electrician. Schedule
splices 7 days advanced notice.
a.
Indoors: Use general purpose, flame retardant tape.
b.
Outdoors: Use flame retardant, cold- and weather-resistant tape.
F.
Cap spare conductors with UL listed end caps.
G.
Cabinets, Panels, and Motor Control Centers:
1.
2.
H.
Control and Instrumentation Wiring:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I.
J.
Remove surplus wire, bridle and secure.
Where conductors pass through openings or over edges in sheet metal,
remove bums, chamfer edges, and install bushings and protective strips of
insulating material to protect the conductors.
Where terminals provided will accept such lugs, terminate control and
instrumentation wiring, except solid thermocouple leads, with insulated,
locking-fork compression lugs.
Terminate with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in
accordance with terminal manufacturer's instructions.
Locate splices in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes using
terminal strips.
Where connections of cables installed under this section are to be made
under Division 13, leave pigtails of adequate length for bundled
connections.
Cable Protection:
a.
Under Infinite Access Floors: May be installed without bundling.
b.
All Other Areas: Install individual wires, pairs, or triads in flex
conduit under the floor or grouped into bundles at least 1/2-inch in
diameter.
c.
Maintain integrity of shielding of instrumentation cables.
d.
Ensure grounds do not occur because of damage to jacket over the
shield.
Extra Conductor Length: For conductors to be connected by others, install
minimum 6 feet of extra conductor in freestanding panels and minimum 2 feet in
other assemblies. Coil and label conductors for easy identification.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Output Power Cable:
16120-15
1.
2.
3.
3.05
3.06
3.07
Install cables in raceway.
Terminate the three ground conductors together at the motor and at the
ground bus of the VFD.
Terminate aluminum armor at motor and at VFD. At motor, terminate
shield with cable manufacturer recommended termination kit. Termination
shall be to the motor junction box. At the VFD, terminate armor to the
invertor drive frame. The termination kit must provide a 360-degree
connection of the armor to frame and motor junction box.
CONDUCTOR ARC AND FIREPROOFING
A.
Install arc and fireproofing, tape on 600-volt single conductors and cables except
those rated Type TC in manholes, hand holes, vaults, cable trays, and other
indicated locations.
B.
Install arc and fireproofing tape on 5 kV cables or 8 kV cables throughout their
entire exposed length in manholes, hand holes, vaults, cable trays, and other
indicated locations.
C.
Wrap conductors of same circuit entering from separate conduit together as a
single cable.
D.
Follow tape manufacturer's installation instructions.
E.
Secure tape at intervals of 5 feet with bands of tape binder. Each tape band shall
consist of a minimum of two wraps directly over each other.
BUSWAY
A.
Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 70.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing: 10 feet.
FIELD QUALTTY CONTROL
A.
In accordance Section 16950, ELECTRICAL TESTING.
END OF SECTION
16120-16
SECTION 16139
VAULTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Extent of underground concrete encased conduit (ductbank) handhole
work as indicated by Drawings, reference table on sheet E-102, and is hereby defined to
include those units which are utilized exclusively for installation of instrumentation,
communication, and control media and equipment; and electrical power cables, wires, and
equipment.
B. Types of handholes in this Section include, but are not limited to:
1.
2.
Electrical handholes.
Concrete encased conduit (ductbank).
C. Related Work in Other Sections:
1.
Section 02310 for excavation and backfill required in connection with handholes.
2.
Division 3 Sections for concrete Work required in connection with handholes.
3.
Division 7 Sections for waterproofing and dampproofing of handholes.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the
items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include:
1.
Prefabricator's Data: Submit prefabricator's data on factory-fabricated handholes.
2.
Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's data on concrete encased conduit handhole
components and associated specialty products.
3.
Submit Shop Drawings for system, showing raceway types and sizes, locations, and
elevations for horizontal runs. Include details of underground structures, accessories,
fittings, and connections.
16139-1
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prefabricators: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of factory fabricated handholes, of
types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than 3 years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1.
ANSI Compliance: Comply with requirements of ANSI C2, "National Electrical Safety
Code," pertaining to construction and installation of concrete encased conduit
handholes.
2.
ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of American Society for
Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards pertaining to construction and materials for
handholes.
3.
UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of Standard 486A, "Wire
Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors." Provide handhole
accessories which are UL listed and labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which
may be incorporated in Work include:
B. Prefabricated Units:
1.
2.
3.
Advance Concrete.
Hanson Pipe and Precast.
Or equal.
2.02 FACTORY FABRICATED HANDHOLES
A. Handholes and Boxes: Provide handholes and boxes for pulling, splicing, and terminating
conductors, in types and sizes indicated, with watertight cover and penta-head bolts and
knockout access holes; equip base with sump/drainage box.
1.
Provide concrete body with cast iron cover and ring.
B. Accessories: Provide handhole accessories, including pulling-in irons, embedded cable
support accessories, cable rack arms, porcelain saddles, sump pump pits, ladders, mastics,
and sealants as indicated or required.
16139-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which concrete encased conduit
handholes are to be installed, and notify CONTRACTOR in writing of those conditions
detrimental to proper completion of Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.02 UNDERGROUND CONCRETE ENCASED CONDUIT
A. Support conduit to be encased on approved spacers at the dimensions shown on Drawings.
B. Reinforce concrete encasement as indicated.
C. Slope duct runs a minimum of 0.5 percent in the direction indicated.
D. Maintain a 12-inch minimum clearance between concrete encasement and yard piping.
E. Provide 24-inch minimum clearance from top of concrete encasement to finished grade
unless otherwise noted.
F.
Mandrel and clean all underground conduits prior to cable installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES
A. Install handholes as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
with recognized industry practices to ensure that handholes comply with requirements.
B. Set manhole frames and covers flush with sidewalk, pavement, or ground surface. In gravel
driveways set covers 4 inches below surface.
C. Coordinate with other Work, including electrical raceway and wiring Work, as necessary to
interface installation of handholes with other Work.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF FACTORY FABRICATED UNITS
A. Install handholes as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
recognized industry practices to ensure that handholes comply with requirements and serve
intended purposes.
16139-3
B. Precast Concrete Units: Place precast concrete sections as indicated. Where units occur in
pavements, set tops of frames and covers flush with finish surface, unless otherwise
indicated. Use epoxy bonding compound where steps are mortared into unit walls.
1.
Apply bituminous mastic coating at joints between sections.
2.
Coordinate damp proofing and waterproofing Work with installation of precast concrete
units as necessary for proper interface.
3.
Install damp proofing and waterproofing materials as indicated.
3.05 BACKFILLING
A. Delay backfilling of excavations surrounding handholes until after initial inspection has been
completed.
3.06 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Provide equipment grounding and bonding connections for exposed metal parts in handholes
as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std
486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.
END OF SECTION
16139-4
SECTION 16230
STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Extent of diesel generator set work as indicated by Drawings and
Schedules, and is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation:
1. Diesel engines.
2. Electrical generators.
3. Engine starting system, including batteries, instrument control panel, protective housing,
day tanks, annunciator panel, exhaust silencer, wall thimble, and accessories
4. See Section 13610 for description of generator control/monitoring requirements.
5. See Section 16010 for description of electrical work.
B. Types of generator sets required for the Project include:
1. Permanent Diesel Engine-driven Generator.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 16239, Generator Set Equipment, and
Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop
Drawing submittals shall include:
1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on diesel engine-driven generator sets and
components.
a. Generator sizing calculations.
b. Generator dimensions.
c. Generator weight.
d. Generator rating.
e. Alternator rating.
f. Generator Starting System Data:
1) Battery size and ratings.
2) Charging system capacity.
3) Battery heater data.
4) Battery warranty.
5) Batter Charger.
g. Generator Control Panel Data:
1) Layout.
2) Wiring diagrams.
3) Control interconnection.
4) Instrumentation.
h. Exhaust System Data:
16230-1
2.
3.
4.
1) Muffler size.
2) Decibel reduction curve.
3) Fuel system data.
i. Cooling System Data:
1) Radiator capacity.
2) Cooling reduction capacity.
3) Jacket Heater.
j. Fuel piping material and layout.
k. Warranty data.
l. Accessory and miscellaneous equipment.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for diesel engine-driven generator units
showing connections to electrical power panels, feeders, and ancillary equipment.
Differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer installed and portions
that are field installed.
Agreement to Maintain: Prior to time of final acceptance, Installer shall submit 4 copies
of an agreement for continued service and maintenance of diesel engine-driven
generator sets for OWNER's possible acceptance. Offer terms and conditions for
furnishing parts and providing continued testing and servicing, including replacement of
materials and equipment, for 1-year period with option for renewal of Agreement by
OWNER.
Certifications: Provide diesel engine-driven generator sets certified test record of the
following final production testing:
a. Single-step load pickup.
b. Transient and steady-state governing.
c. Safety shutdown device testing.
d. Voltage regulation.
e. Rated power.
f. Maximum power.
g. Provide certified test record prior to engine-driven generator set being shipped from
factory to Project location.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
1. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 37, "Installation and
Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines," NFPA 99, "Standard for
Health Care Facilities," and NFPA 101, "Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings
and Structures."
2. UL Compliance: UL 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper
Conductors," UL 2200, "Standard for Safety for Stationary Engine Generator
Assemblies," rated 600 volts or less.
3. ANSI/NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA
MG1, "Motors and Generators," and MG2, "Safety and Use of Electric Motors and
Generators."
16230-2
4.
IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of IEEE Standard 446, "IEEE
Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Industrial and
Commercial Applications."
B. Warranty:
1. Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01740, warranties covering the
items included under this Section. Unit shall be provided with a full factory Extended
Service Coverage warranty of 5 years from date of final acceptance.
2. Provide (in bid) as part of the Extended Service Coverage warranty, a rental generator if
generator fails and requires off site repair.
C. Maintenance Agreement:
1. Provide (in bid) a Extended Service Coverage maintenance agreement from
manufacturer of supplied equipment for 5 years including all required maintenance,
parts and labor.
2. Provide as part of maintenance agreement, 24 hour on call service, to be provided by
Manufacturer of Generator Equipment.
3. Provide as part of maintenance agreement, Oil Sampling Service Analysis, at six month
interval.
4. Provide as part of maintenance agreement, load bank testing of generator at full load for
a minimum of 4 hours at the end of the first year and every two years thereafter.
D. Spare Parts:
1. (1) One complete set of hoses and belts.
2. (1) One complete replacement set of all fuses
3. (2) Two cans of touch up spray paint matching factory color.
4. (2) Two pairs of hearing protection (ear muffs).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which
may be incorporated in Work include:
1. Standby Diesel Generator Sets:
a. Caterpillar.
b. Cummins.
2.02 GENERATOR SETS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard diesel engine-driven
generator set and auxiliary equipment as indicated by published product information, and as
required for a complete installation. Generator set shall be rated to continuously power the
total accumulated load and starting load shown on Schedule at 100 degrees F ambient
temperature and at altitude where installed.
16230-3
B. Diesel Engine: Provide a 4-cycle, compression ignition type engine for operation on a
commercial grade of petroleum fuel oil such as No. 2 fuel oil. Engine operating speed shall
not exceed 1,800 rpm and shall be controlled by a governor to maintain alternator frequency
within plus or minus 3 Hertz of 60 hertz from no load to full load. Frequency shall recover to
steady-state tolerance within 5 seconds after application of 90 percent rated load.
C. Starting System: Provide engine-generator unit with 12- or 24-volt, negative ground, starting
system including positive engagement solenoid shift-starting motor, batteries, and 35ampere, or greater, automatic battery charging alternator with solid-state voltage regulator.
Mount batteries in a plastic- or epoxy-coated metal platform near the starter but not on the
generator and coat battery terminals with an anti-oxidant. Generator sets rated 150 kW or
less shall have a battery rated 650 amperes cold cranking at 0 degree F and 170 minutes
reserve capacity by SAE Standard J-537. Larger generators shall have a battery rated either
220 ampere-hours or 900 amperes cold cranking, and 430 minutes reserve capacity. Batteries
shall have a 12-month full warranty and 60-month prorated warranty beginning at final
acceptance.
D. Battery Charger: Provide a solid-state, current limiting, float-type battery charger with 5ampere minimum capacity. Charger shall operate from 120-volt AC single phase, 60 hertz
power and shall automatically keep batteries at full charge. Equip charger with ammeter and
voltmeter.
E. Alternator: Provide a single bearing brushless, self-excited alternator with inherently
regulated rotating rectifier exciter system or a revolving field design with a temperature
compensated solid-state voltage regulator. Connect the alternator housing directly to the
engine flywheel housing. Couple the alternator rotor directly to engine flywheel with a semiflexible steel disk coupling.
1. Provide windings with Class F insulation with epoxy impregnation and fungus-resistant
coating. Temperature rise shall be as defined in NEMA Standard MG1-22.40.
2. The alternator shall be capable of starting load given on Schedule with 35 percent
maximum instantaneous voltage dip. Recovery to stable equation within plus or minus 5
percent of rated voltage shall occur within 3 seconds.
F.
Engine Cooling Radiator: Provide a complete engine cooling system equipped with a
radiator and blower type fan sized to maintain safe operation, 190 degrees F engine outlet
water temperature at 100 degrees F maximum ambient temperature. The engine cooling
system shall be filled with a solution of 50 percent ethylene glycol. On indoor mounted
units, radiator shall be equipped with a duct adapter flange. An stainless steel air duct with
flexible connecting sections, and access doors, shall be provided between radiator duct
flange and exhaust damper.
G. Instrument Control Panel: Provide engine-generator unit with engine oil-pressure and watertemperature indicators, reset circuit breaker, static voltage regulator, voltage-adjusting
rheostat, voltmeter, ammeter with phase selector switch with an OFF position, and with
running time indicator and frequency meters. Select circuitry of plug-in design capable of
16230-4
quick replacement, and capable of accepting a plug-in device which allows maintenance to
test control panel performance without operating the engine.
1. Provide a cranking limiter to open starting circuit in 45 to 90 seconds if engine has not
started within that time or after a series of 3 or more cranking intervals separated by 2 or
more rest periods.
2. Provide engine safety devices to shut unit down on high engine temperature, low oil
pressure, overspeed, and overcrank. Provide, for each of these conditions, an alarm light
and an unpowered, normally open contact for remote use. Provide an audible alarm with
silence switch which is activated by any alarm condition.
3. Provide a relay with 2 normally open and 2 normally closed contacts rated 5A at 120
volts AC and which is energized when unit is running. Wire these contacts to terminal
strips for remote use.
4. Provide a RUN-OFF-AUTO switch. In AUTO position unit shall start when a remote
contact closes and stop when contact opens. In RUN position unit shall start and run
until OFF position is selected.
5. Mount instrument control panel on unit such that it is isolated from generator set
vibration.
2.03 PERMANENT ENGINE-GENERATOR SET ACCESSORIES
A. Fuel System: Provide an electric operated fuel transfer pump and a vented day tank with
level control, level indicator, and fuel strainer. Provide an electric DC solenoid valve in the
carburetor fuel line to units with a carburetor that is energized when engine is started.
Provide flexible connections at engine for all fuel lines. Interconnecting lines from fuel
storage tank and day tank to engine will be provided by CONTRACTOR. Consult Drawings
and Schedule, for location and elevation of storage tank and day tank to provide a transfer
pump of proper capacity and head.
B. Coolant Heater: Provide an engine coolant heater, of voltage indicated on Schedule, with
thermostatic controls to maintain engine coolant at proper temperature to fulfill start-up
requirements of NFPA 99.
C. Inlet and Exhaust Systems: Silencers and exhaust ducting to silencers shall be selfsupporting when assembled. Provide all necessary supporting members for ductwork
between silencer and outlet. Provide all required cutting as shown on Drawings and noted
herein. The unit shall be complete with raincap. Interior exhaust duct shall be insulated
Schedule 10 steel pipe, and exterior pipe shall be stainless steel minimum. Inlet silencer and
filter to be self-supporting. Provide necessary supports for all intake ductwork. All intake
duct shall be Schedule 10 steel pipe, minimum.
1. Provide bellows sections, insulated wall thimbles, inlet and outlet flexible section as
shown on Drawings. Design of exhaust silencer and stack including all ducting shown
shall have a pressure drop not exceeding 5 inches of water.
2. Provide a silencer which meets sound standards of a critical area. Silencer shall provide
attenuation (input to output) of 25 dB or greater at frequencies of 125 hertz to 8
kilohertz. A curve shall be submitted with Shop Drawings showing attenuation (input to
16230-5
output) in dB versus frequency. Curve shall be on manufacturer's standard data sheet or
from an independent test lab. A spiral or bellows-type flexible section of pipe shall be
installed in the exhaust line between the muffler and engine manifold connection. An
insulated thimble section shall be provided where exhaust line passes through roof or
wall. Exhaust lines shall be pitched and a condensation trap provided at non-draining
low points in line.
D. Circuit Breaker: A generator power circuit breaker shall be installed as a manual load circuit
interrupter and an automatic overload and short circuit protection device.
1. The circuit breaker shall be a solid-state trip type for all sizes rated 300 amp continuous
and larger. Solid-state trip shall include Long-time, Short-time, and Instantaneous with
shut trip option installed. Ground fault trip required on breakers 1,000 amps and above.
2. Trip settings for all breakers shall be selected for the rating of the generator power
circuit as indicated on Drawings or on Schedule.
E. Generator exhaust shroud shall be constructed of stainless steel with access doors in shroud
for maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF DIESEL ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS
A. Generator shall be shipped when designated installation site is ready for unit to be installed.
Contractor shall meet Manufacturers requiements for storage until placed in service.
B. Install diesel engine-driven generator units as indicated, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that
engine-generator units fulfill requirements. Comply with NFPA and NEMA standards
pertaining to installation of engine-generator sets and accessories.
C. Coordinate with other work, including raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, fuel tanks,
piping, and accessories, as necessary to interface installation of engine generator equipment
work with other work.
D. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors. Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to
comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B, and the National
Electrical Code.
E. Install units on steel spring type vibration isolators fastened to an inertia base in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
F.
Connect fuel piping to generator equipment as indicated, and comply with manufacturer's
installation instructions.
16230-6
G. Terminate each crank case breather tube into a crank case ventilation (CCV) filter box. The
crank case ventilation box shall be mounted onto the generator-set frame rails, where it shall
be accessible for maintenance.
3.02 GROUNDING
A. Provide equipment grounding connections with grounding resistor for diesel engine-driven
generator units as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified
in UL Standard 486A to ensure permanent and effective grounding.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Start-up Testing:
1. Engage local equipment manufacturer's representative to perform start-up and building
load tests upon completion of installation, with ENGINEER in attendance; provide
certified test record. Tests are to include the following:
a. Check fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze in liquid-cooled models for conformity to
manufacturer's recommendations under environmental conditions present.
b. Test prior to cranking engine for proper operation, accessories that normally
function while the set is in a standby mode. Accessories include: engine heaters,
battery charger, generator strip heater, and remote annunciator.
c. Check, during start-up test mode, for exhaust leaks, path of exhaust gases outside
the building, cooling air flow, movement during starting and stopping, vibration
during running, normal and emergency line-to-line voltage, and phase rotation.
d. Test, by means of simulated power outage, automatic start-up by remote-automatic
starting, transfer of load, and automatic shutdown. Prior to this test, adjust for
proper system coordination, transfer switch timers. Monitor throughout the test,
engine temperature, oil pressure, battery charge level, generator voltage, amperes,
and frequency.
1) On generating sets exceeding 50 kW, a starting load test is to be performed
after installation. Voltage dip will be observed with a recording oscilloscope
furnished by supplier for this test only. Voltage dip is defined as the peak-topeak voltage minimum, at starting compared to the average peak-to-peak
voltage with the starting load running. The difference shall be less than 20
percent of the running P-P voltage.
e. Provide a generator load bank test at full rated load for a period of 4 hours. Once
successful, provide certified copy of test results to owner.
f. Upon completion of installation, demonstrate capability and compliance of system
with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at Site, then retest
to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and
proceed with retesting. Initial testing and retesting to be at no cost to OWNER.
16230-7
3.04 PERSONNEL TRAINING
A. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner’s building personnel (2 days minimum
with 8 hours per day) in procedures for starting-up, testing, and operating diesel enginedriven generator sets. In addition, train OWNER's personnel in periodic maintenance of
batteries.
3.05 WARRANTY
A. Provide 5 years beginning at final completion on all related components. Include (in
CONTRACTORS bid) a maintenance agreement that the Owner has the option to purchase
at substantial completion.
PERMANENT ENGINE-GENERATOR SCHEDULE
Load at starting:
Load applied after the above
starting load is running:
Voltage Starting Type:
Accessories
Required
Engine Cooling Radiator
Yes
Engine Cooling Heat
Exchanger
Yes
Remarks
Engine Cooling Remote Radiator:
Horizontal Distance
feet
Radiator Elevation above
or below Engine
feet
Coolant Heater
volts
Enclosure
Sound Attenuation
Fuel System
Vertical Lift Distance
feet
16230-8
Horizontal Pumping
Distance
feet
Minimum Generator Size: 1,250 kW per Generator*
*Stated minimum does not release CONTRACTOR from successfully completing the load test.
END OF SECTION
16230-9
SECTION 16230
STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Extent of diesel generator set work as indicated by Drawings and
Schedules, and is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation:
1. Diesel engines.
2. Electrical generators.
3. Engine starting system, including batteries, instrument control panel, protective housing,
day tanks, annunciator panel, exhaust silencer, wall thimble, and accessories
4. See Section 13610 for description of generator control/monitoring requirements.
5. See Section 16010 for description of electrical work.
B. Types of generator sets required for the Project include:
1. Permanent Diesel Engine-driven Generator.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 16239, Generator Set Equipment, and
Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this Section. Shop
Drawing submittals shall include:
1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on diesel engine-driven generator sets and
components.
a. Generator sizing calculations.
b. Generator dimensions.
c. Generator weight.
d. Generator rating.
e. Alternator rating.
f. Generator Starting System Data:
1) Battery size and ratings.
2) Charging system capacity.
3) Battery heater data.
4) Battery warranty.
5) Batter Charger.
g. Generator Control Panel Data:
1) Layout.
2) Wiring diagrams.
3) Control interconnection.
4) Instrumentation.
h. Exhaust System Data:
16230-1
2.
3.
4.
1) Muffler size.
2) Decibel reduction curve.
3) Fuel system data.
i. Cooling System Data:
1) Radiator capacity.
2) Cooling reduction capacity.
3) Jacket Heater.
j. Fuel piping material and layout.
k. Warranty data.
l. Accessory and miscellaneous equipment.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for diesel engine-driven generator units
showing connections to electrical power panels, feeders, and ancillary equipment.
Differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer installed and portions
that are field installed.
Agreement to Maintain: Prior to time of final acceptance, Installer shall submit 4 copies
of an agreement for continued service and maintenance of diesel engine-driven
generator sets for OWNER's possible acceptance. Offer terms and conditions for
furnishing parts and providing continued testing and servicing, including replacement of
materials and equipment, for 1-year period with option for renewal of Agreement by
OWNER.
Certifications: Provide diesel engine-driven generator sets certified test record of the
following final production testing:
a. Single-step load pickup.
b. Transient and steady-state governing.
c. Safety shutdown device testing.
d. Voltage regulation.
e. Rated power.
f. Maximum power.
g. Provide certified test record prior to engine-driven generator set being shipped from
factory to Project location.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
1. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 37, "Installation and
Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines," NFPA 99, "Standard for
Health Care Facilities," and NFPA 101, "Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings
and Structures."
2. UL Compliance: UL 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper
Conductors," UL 2200, "Standard for Safety for Stationary Engine Generator
Assemblies," rated 600 volts or less.
3. ANSI/NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA
MG1, "Motors and Generators," and MG2, "Safety and Use of Electric Motors and
Generators."
16230-2
4.
IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of IEEE Standard 446, "IEEE
Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Industrial and
Commercial Applications."
B. Warranty:
1. Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01740, warranties covering the
items included under this Section. Unit shall be provided with a full factory Extended
Service Coverage warranty of 5 years from date of final acceptance.
2. Provide (in bid) as part of the Extended Service Coverage warranty, a rental generator if
generator fails and requires off site repair.
C. Maintenance Agreement:
1. Provide (in bid) a Extended Service Coverage maintenance agreement from
manufacturer of supplied equipment for 5 years including all required maintenance,
parts and labor.
2. Provide as part of maintenance agreement, 24 hour on call service, to be provided by
Manufacturer of Generator Equipment.
3. Provide as part of maintenance agreement, Oil Sampling Service Analysis, at six month
interval.
4. Provide as part of maintenance agreement, load bank testing of generator at full load for
a minimum of 4 hours at the end of the first year and every two years thereafter.
D. Spare Parts:
1. (1) One complete set of hoses and belts.
2. (1) One complete replacement set of all fuses
3. (2) Two cans of touch up spray paint matching factory color.
4. (2) Two pairs of hearing protection (ear muffs).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which
may be incorporated in Work include:
1. Standby Diesel Generator Sets:
a. Caterpillar.
b. Cummins.
2.02 GENERATOR SETS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard diesel engine-driven
generator set and auxiliary equipment as indicated by published product information, and as
required for a complete installation. Generator set shall be rated to continuously power the
total accumulated load and starting load shown on Schedule at 100 degrees F ambient
temperature and at altitude where installed.
16230-3
B. Diesel Engine: Provide a 4-cycle, compression ignition type engine for operation on a
commercial grade of petroleum fuel oil such as No. 2 fuel oil. Engine operating speed shall
not exceed 1,800 rpm and shall be controlled by a governor to maintain alternator frequency
within plus or minus 3 Hertz of 60 hertz from no load to full load. Frequency shall recover to
steady-state tolerance within 5 seconds after application of 90 percent rated load.
C. Starting System: Provide engine-generator unit with 12- or 24-volt, negative ground, starting
system including positive engagement solenoid shift-starting motor, batteries, and 35ampere, or greater, automatic battery charging alternator with solid-state voltage regulator.
Mount batteries in a plastic- or epoxy-coated metal platform near the starter but not on the
generator and coat battery terminals with an anti-oxidant. Generator sets rated 150 kW or
less shall have a battery rated 650 amperes cold cranking at 0 degree F and 170 minutes
reserve capacity by SAE Standard J-537. Larger generators shall have a battery rated either
220 ampere-hours or 900 amperes cold cranking, and 430 minutes reserve capacity. Batteries
shall have a 12-month full warranty and 60-month prorated warranty beginning at final
acceptance.
D. Battery Charger: Provide a solid-state, current limiting, float-type battery charger with 5ampere minimum capacity. Charger shall operate from 120-volt AC single phase, 60 hertz
power and shall automatically keep batteries at full charge. Equip charger with ammeter and
voltmeter.
E. Alternator: Provide a single bearing brushless, self-excited alternator with inherently
regulated rotating rectifier exciter system or a revolving field design with a temperature
compensated solid-state voltage regulator. Connect the alternator housing directly to the
engine flywheel housing. Couple the alternator rotor directly to engine flywheel with a semiflexible steel disk coupling.
1. Provide windings with Class F insulation with epoxy impregnation and fungus-resistant
coating. Temperature rise shall be as defined in NEMA Standard MG1-22.40.
2. The alternator shall be capable of starting load given on Schedule with 35 percent
maximum instantaneous voltage dip. Recovery to stable equation within plus or minus 5
percent of rated voltage shall occur within 3 seconds.
F.
Engine Cooling Radiator: Provide a complete engine cooling system equipped with a
radiator and blower type fan sized to maintain safe operation, 190 degrees F engine outlet
water temperature at 100 degrees F maximum ambient temperature. The engine cooling
system shall be filled with a solution of 50 percent ethylene glycol. On indoor mounted
units, radiator shall be equipped with a duct adapter flange. An stainless steel air duct with
flexible connecting sections, and access doors, shall be provided between radiator duct
flange and exhaust damper.
G. Instrument Control Panel: Provide engine-generator unit with engine oil-pressure and watertemperature indicators, reset circuit breaker, static voltage regulator, voltage-adjusting
rheostat, voltmeter, ammeter with phase selector switch with an OFF position, and with
running time indicator and frequency meters. Select circuitry of plug-in design capable of
16230-4
quick replacement, and capable of accepting a plug-in device which allows maintenance to
test control panel performance without operating the engine.
1. Provide a cranking limiter to open starting circuit in 45 to 90 seconds if engine has not
started within that time or after a series of 3 or more cranking intervals separated by 2 or
more rest periods.
2. Provide engine safety devices to shut unit down on high engine temperature, low oil
pressure, overspeed, and overcrank. Provide, for each of these conditions, an alarm light
and an unpowered, normally open contact for remote use. Provide an audible alarm with
silence switch which is activated by any alarm condition.
3. Provide a relay with 2 normally open and 2 normally closed contacts rated 5A at 120
volts AC and which is energized when unit is running. Wire these contacts to terminal
strips for remote use.
4. Provide a RUN-OFF-AUTO switch. In AUTO position unit shall start when a remote
contact closes and stop when contact opens. In RUN position unit shall start and run
until OFF position is selected.
5. Mount instrument control panel on unit such that it is isolated from generator set
vibration.
2.03 PERMANENT ENGINE-GENERATOR SET ACCESSORIES
A. Fuel System: Provide an electric operated fuel transfer pump and a vented day tank with
level control, level indicator, and fuel strainer. Provide an electric DC solenoid valve in the
carburetor fuel line to units with a carburetor that is energized when engine is started.
Provide flexible connections at engine for all fuel lines. Interconnecting lines from fuel
storage tank and day tank to engine will be provided by CONTRACTOR. Consult Drawings
and Schedule, for location and elevation of storage tank and day tank to provide a transfer
pump of proper capacity and head.
B. Coolant Heater: Provide an engine coolant heater, of voltage indicated on Schedule, with
thermostatic controls to maintain engine coolant at proper temperature to fulfill start-up
requirements of NFPA 99.
C. Inlet and Exhaust Systems: Silencers and exhaust ducting to silencers shall be selfsupporting when assembled. Provide all necessary supporting members for ductwork
between silencer and outlet. Provide all required cutting as shown on Drawings and noted
herein. The unit shall be complete with raincap. Interior exhaust duct shall be insulated
Schedule 10 steel pipe, and exterior pipe shall be stainless steel minimum. Inlet silencer and
filter to be self-supporting. Provide necessary supports for all intake ductwork. All intake
duct shall be Schedule 10 steel pipe, minimum.
1. Provide bellows sections, insulated wall thimbles, inlet and outlet flexible section as
shown on Drawings. Design of exhaust silencer and stack including all ducting shown
shall have a pressure drop not exceeding 5 inches of water.
2. Provide a silencer which meets sound standards of a critical area. Silencer shall provide
attenuation (input to output) of 25 dB or greater at frequencies of 125 hertz to 8
kilohertz. A curve shall be submitted with Shop Drawings showing attenuation (input to
16230-5
output) in dB versus frequency. Curve shall be on manufacturer's standard data sheet or
from an independent test lab. A spiral or bellows-type flexible section of pipe shall be
installed in the exhaust line between the muffler and engine manifold connection. An
insulated thimble section shall be provided where exhaust line passes through roof or
wall. Exhaust lines shall be pitched and a condensation trap provided at non-draining
low points in line.
D. Circuit Breaker: A generator power circuit breaker shall be installed as a manual load circuit
interrupter and an automatic overload and short circuit protection device.
1. The circuit breaker shall be a solid-state trip type for all sizes rated 300 amp continuous
and larger. Solid-state trip shall include Long-time, Short-time, and Instantaneous with
shut trip option installed. Ground fault trip required on breakers 1,000 amps and above.
2. Trip settings for all breakers shall be selected for the rating of the generator power
circuit as indicated on Drawings or on Schedule.
E. Generator exhaust shroud shall be constructed of stainless steel with access doors in shroud
for maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF DIESEL ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS
A. Generator shall be shipped when designated installation site is ready for unit to be installed.
Contractor shall meet Manufacturers requiements for storage until placed in service.
B. Install diesel engine-driven generator units as indicated, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that
engine-generator units fulfill requirements. Comply with NFPA and NEMA standards
pertaining to installation of engine-generator sets and accessories.
C. Coordinate with other work, including raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, fuel tanks,
piping, and accessories, as necessary to interface installation of engine generator equipment
work with other work.
D. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors. Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to
comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B, and the National
Electrical Code.
E. Install units on steel spring type vibration isolators fastened to an inertia base in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
F.
Connect fuel piping to generator equipment as indicated, and comply with manufacturer's
installation instructions.
16230-6
G. Terminate each crank case breather tube into a crank case ventilation (CCV) filter box. The
crank case ventilation box shall be mounted onto the generator-set frame rails, where it shall
be accessible for maintenance.
3.02 GROUNDING
A. Provide equipment grounding connections with grounding resistor for diesel engine-driven
generator units as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified
in UL Standard 486A to ensure permanent and effective grounding.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Start-up Testing:
1. Engage local equipment manufacturer's representative to perform start-up and building
load tests upon completion of installation, with ENGINEER in attendance; provide
certified test record. Tests are to include the following:
a. Check fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze in liquid-cooled models for conformity to
manufacturer's recommendations under environmental conditions present.
b. Test prior to cranking engine for proper operation, accessories that normally
function while the set is in a standby mode. Accessories include: engine heaters,
battery charger, generator strip heater, and remote annunciator.
c. Check, during start-up test mode, for exhaust leaks, path of exhaust gases outside
the building, cooling air flow, movement during starting and stopping, vibration
during running, normal and emergency line-to-line voltage, and phase rotation.
d. Test, by means of simulated power outage, automatic start-up by remote-automatic
starting, transfer of load, and automatic shutdown. Prior to this test, adjust for
proper system coordination, transfer switch timers. Monitor throughout the test,
engine temperature, oil pressure, battery charge level, generator voltage, amperes,
and frequency.
1) On generating sets exceeding 50 kW, a starting load test is to be performed
after installation. Voltage dip will be observed with a recording oscilloscope
furnished by supplier for this test only. Voltage dip is defined as the peak-topeak voltage minimum, at starting compared to the average peak-to-peak
voltage with the starting load running. The difference shall be less than 20
percent of the running P-P voltage.
e. Provide a generator load bank test at full rated load for a period of 4 hours. Once
successful, provide certified copy of test results to owner.
f. Upon completion of installation, demonstrate capability and compliance of system
with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at Site, then retest
to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and
proceed with retesting. Initial testing and retesting to be at no cost to OWNER.
16230-7
3.04 PERSONNEL TRAINING
A. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner’s building personnel (2 days minimum
with 8 hours per day) in procedures for starting-up, testing, and operating diesel enginedriven generator sets. In addition, train OWNER's personnel in periodic maintenance of
batteries.
16230-8
3.05 WARRANTY
A. Provide 5 years beginning at final completion on all related components. Include (in
CONTRACTORS bid) a maintenance agreement that the Owner has the option to purchase
at substantial completion.
PERMANENT ENGINE-GENERATOR SCHEDULE
Load at starting:
Load applied after the above
starting load is running:
Voltage Starting Type:
Accessories
Required
Engine Cooling Radiator
Yes
Engine Cooling Heat
Exchanger
Yes
Remarks
Engine Cooling Remote Radiator:
Horizontal Distance
feet
Radiator Elevation above
or below Engine
feet
Coolant Heater
volts
Enclosure
Sound Attenuation
Fuel System
Vertical Lift Distance
feet
Horizontal Pumping
Distance
feet
Minimum Generator Size: 1,250 kW per Generator*
*Stated minimum does not release CONTRACTOR from successfully completing the load test.
16230-9
END OF SECTION
16230-10
SECTION 16405
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.02
This section applies only when referenced by a motor-driven equipment
specification. Application, horsepower, enclosure type, mounting, shaft type,
synchronous speed, and any deviations from this section will be listed in the
equipment specification. Where such deviations occur, they shall take precedence
over this section.
REFERENCES
A.
The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers' Association (AFBMA):
a.
9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
b.
11, Load Rating and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI): C50.41, Polyphase
Induction Motors for Power Generating Stations.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
a.
85, Test Procedure for Airborne Sound Measurements on Rotating
Machines.
b.
112, Standard Test Procedures for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators.
c.
114, Standard Test Procedures for Single-Phase Induction Motors.
d.
620, Guide for Construction and Interpretation of Thermal Limit
Curves for Squirrel-Cage Motors Over 500 Horsepower.
e.
841, Recommended Practice for Chemical Industry Severe-Duty
Squirrel-Cage Induction Motors, 600V and Below.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
MG 1, Motors and Generators.
b.
MG 13, Frame Assignments for Alternating Current Integral
Horsepower Induction Motors.
c.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code. (NEC)
Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
a.
547, Thermal Protectors for Electric Motors.
b.
674, Electric Motors and Generators Used in Hazardous
(Classified) Locations.
16405-1
1.03
1.04
DEFINITIONS
A.
CISD-TEFC: Chemical industry, severe-duty enclosure.
B.
DIP: Dust-ignition-proof enclosure.
C.
EXP: Explosion-proof enclosure.
D.
ODP: Open drip-proof enclosure.
E.
TEFC: Totally enclosed, fan cooled enclosure.
F.
TENV: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated enclosure.
G.
WPI: Open weather protected enclosure, Type I.
H.
WPII: Open weather protected enclosure, Type II.
I.
Motor Nameplate Horsepower: That rating after any de-rating required to allow
for extra heating caused by the harmonic content in the voltage applied to the
motor by its controller.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Descriptive information.
Nameplate data in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Additional Rating Information:
a.
Service factor.
b.
Locked rotor current.
c.
No load current.
d.
Safe stall time for motors 200 horsepower and larger.
e.
Multispeed load classification (e.g., variable torque).
f.
Adjustable frequency drive motor load classification (e.g., variable
torque) and minimum allowable motor speed for that load
classification.
Enclosure type and mounting (e.g. horizontal, vertical).
Dimensions and total weight.
Conduit box dimensions and usable volume as defined in NEMA MG 1
and NFPA 70.
Bearing type.
Bearing lubrication.
Bearing life.
Space heater voltage and watts.
16405-2
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
Description and rating of motor thermal protection.
Motor sound power level in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Maximum brake horsepower required by the equipment driven by the
motor.
Description and rating of submersible motor moisture sensing system.
Quality Control Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
Factory test reports, certified.
Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, 100 horsepower and
larger.
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
MANUFACTURERS
A.
General Electric.
B.
U.S.Motors.
C.
Owner Approved equal.
GENERAL
A.
For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish identical motors and
accessories of a single manufacturer.
B.
In order to obtain single source responsibility, the contractor shall utilize a single
supplier to provide a drive motor, its driven equipment, and specified motor
accessories.
C.
Meet requirements of NEMA MG 1.
D.
Frame assignments in accordance with NEMA MG 13.
E.
Provide motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 and
have an applied UL listing mark.
F.
Motors shall be specifically designed for the use and conditions intended, with a
NEMA design letter classification to fit the application.
G.
Lifting lugs on all motors weighing 100 pounds or more.
16405-3
H.
Operating Conditions:
1.
2.
3.
2.03
2.04
HORSEPOWER RATING
A.
As designated in motor-driven equipment specifications.
B.
Constant Speed Applications: Brake horsepower of the driven equipment at any
head capacity point on the pump curve not to exceed motor nameplate horsepower
rating, excluding any service factor.
C.
Adjustable Frequency, Adjustable Speed Applications: Driven equipment brake
horsepower at any head capacity point on the pump curve not to exceed motor
nameplate horsepower rating, excluding any service factor.
SERVICE FACTOR
A.
2.05
Maximum ambient temperature not greater than 50 degrees C.
Motors shall be suitable for operating conditions without any reduction
being required in the nameplate rated horsepower or exceeding the rated
temperature rise.
Overspeed in either direction in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
1.15 minimum at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise indicated.
VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY RATING
A.
System Frequency: 60-Hz.
B.
Voltage Rating: Unless otherwise indicated in motor-driven equipment
specifications:
Size
1/2 hp and smaller
3/4 hp through 400 hp
450 hp and larger
Voltage
115
460
460
Phases
1
3
3
C.
Suitable for full voltage starting.
D.
One hundred horsepower and larger also suitable for reduced voltage starting with
65 or 80 percent voltage tap settings on reduced inrush motor starters.
E.
Suitable for accelerating the connected load with supply voltage at motor starter
supply terminals dipping to 90 percent of motor rated voltage.
16405-4
2.06
EFFICIENCY AND POWER FACTOR
A.
For all motors except single-phase, under 1 horsepower, multispeed, short-time
rated and submersible motors, or motors driving gates, valves, elevators, cranes,
trolleys, and hoists:
1.
2.
2.07
2.08
2.09
2.10
Efficiency:
a.
Tested in accordance with NEMA MG 1, paragraph 12.54.1.
b.
Guaranteed minimum at full load in accordance with Table 1 or as
indicated in motor-driven equipment specifications.
Power Factor: Guaranteed minimum at full load in accordance with Table
1 or as indicated in motor-driven equipment specifications.
LOCKED ROTOR RATINGS
A.
Locked rotor kVA Code F or lower if motor horsepower not covered by NEMA
MG 1 tables.
B.
Safe stall time 15 seconds or greater.
INSULATION SYSTEMS
A.
Single-Phase, Fractional Horsepower Motors: Manufacturer's standard winding
insulation system.
B.
Motors Rated Over 600 Volts: Sealed windings in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
C.
Three-Phase and Integral Horsepower Motors, Unless Otherwise Indicated in
Motor-Driven Equipment Specifications: Class F with Class B rise at nameplate
horsepower and designated operating conditions, except EXP and DIP motors
which must be Class B with Class B rise.
ENCLOSURES
A.
All enclosures to conform to NEMA MG 1.
B.
TEFC and TENV: Furnish with a drain hole with porous drain/weather plug.
TERMINAL (CONDUIT) BOXES
A.
Oversize main terminal boxes for all motors.
B.
Diagonally split, rotatable to each of four 90-degree positions. Threaded hubs for
conduit attachment.
16405-5
C.
Except ODP, furnish gaskets between box halves and between box and motor
frame.
D.
Minimum usable volume in percentage of that specified in NEMA MG 1-11.06
and 20.62 and NFPA 70, Article 430:
Voltage
Below 600
Below 600
Below 600
Above 600
E.
2.11
Horsepower
15 thru 125
150 thru 300
350 thru 600
All Sizes
Percentage
500
275
225
200
Terminal for connection of equipment grounding wire in each terminal box.
BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION
A.
Horizontal Motors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
C.
3/4 horsepower and Smaller: Permanently lubricated and sealed ball
bearings, or regreasable ball bearings in labyrinth sealed end bells with
removable grease relief plugs.
1 Through 400 horsepower: Regreasable ball bearings in labyrinth sealed
end bells with removable grease relief plugs.
Above 400 horsepower: Regreasable antifriction bearings in labyrinth
sealed end bells with removable grease relief plugs.
Minimum 100,000 hours L-10 bearing life for ball and roller bearings as
defined in AFBMA 9 and 11.
Vertical Motors:
1.
Thrust Bearings:
a.
Antifriction bearing.
b.
Manufacturer's standard lubrication 100 horsepower and smaller.
c.
Oil lubricated 125 horsepower and smaller.
d.
Minimum 50,000 hours L-10 bearing life.
2.
Guide Bearings:
a.
Manufacturer's standard bearing type.
b.
Manufacturer's standard lubrication 200 horsepower and smaller.
c.
Oil lubricated 250 horsepower and smaller.
d.
Minimum 100,000 hours L-1O bearing life.
Regreasable Antifriction Bearings:
16405-6
1.
2.
D.
Oil Lubrication Systems:
1.
2.
3.
2.12
2.13
Readily accessible, grease injection fittings.
Readily accessible, removable grease relief plugs.
Oil reservoirs with sight level gauge.
Oil fill and drain openings with opening plugs.
Provisions for necessary oil circulation and cooling.
NOISE
A.
Measured in accordance with IEEE 85 and NEMA MG 1.
B.
Motors controlled by adjustable frequency drive systems shall not exceed sound
levels of 3 dBA higher than NEMA MG 1.
BALANCE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
A.
In accordance with NEMA MG 1-12.06.
2.14 EQUIPMENT FINISH
2.15
A.
External Finish: Prime and finish coat manufacturer's standard. Field painting in
accordance with Sections 09900 PAINTING.
B.
Internal Finish: Bore and end turns coated with clear polyester or epoxy varnish.
SPECIAL FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Screen Over Air Openings: Stainless steel on motors with ODP, WPI, and WPII
enclosures meeting requirements for Guarded Machine in NEMA MG 1.
B.
Winding Thermal Protection:
1.
Thermostats, unless otherwise noted in the pump specification:
a.
Motors for constant speed and adjustable speed application 30
through 75 horsepower.
b.
Bi-metal disk or rod type thermostats embedded in stator windings
(normally closed contact).
c.
Automatic reset contacts rated 120 volts ac, 5 amps minimum, and
opening on excessive temperature. (Manual reset will be provided
at motor controller.)
2.
RTD (Resistance Temperature Detectors), unless otherwise noted in the
pump specification:
16405-7
a.
b.
c.
3.
C.
Motor Space Heaters: All motors 30 horsepower and larger except if
otherwise noted, shall be furnished with 120V ac space heaters. The rating
of the space heaters shall be determined in accordance with the motor
manufacturer's standard for particular frame size and type. Coordinate the
power requirements of the space heater with the manufacturer of motor
starters or adjustable frequency drive for sizing of the control transformer.
Space heater wire leads shall be brought out in the conduit box on the
motor and clearly identified.
Nameplates:
1.
2.
3.
2.16
Motors for constant speed and adjustable speed application above
75 horsepower.
six (6) RTD’s per motor with 2 per phase.
Provide RTD transducers to be installed in the starter enclosure or
PLC panel, unless otherwise noted in the drawings.
Raised or stamped letters on stainless steel or aluminum.
Display all motor data required by NEMA MG 1-10.37 and NEMA MG 110.38 in addition to bearing numbers for both bearings.
Premium efficiency motor nameplates to also display NEMA nominal
efficiency, full load power factor, and maximum allowable kVAR for
power factor correction capacitors.
FACTORY TESTING
A.
Tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
In accordance with IEEE 112 for poly-phase motors and IEEE 114 for
single-phase motors.
Routine (production) tests on all motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1,
plus no load power at rated voltage and poly-phase, rated voltage
measurement of locked rotor current. Test multispeed motors at all speeds.
For energy efficient motors, test efficiency at 50, 75, and 100 percent of
rated horsepower:
a.
In accordance with IEEE 112, Test Method B, and NEMA MG 1,
paragraphs 12.54 and 12.57.
b.
For motors 500 horsepower and larger where facilities are not
available to test by dynamometer (Test Method B), determine
efficiency by IEEE 112, Test Method F.
Power factor:
a.
Speed.
b.
Current at rated horsepower.
c.
kW input at rated horsepower.
16405-8
d.
5.
B.
On motors of 100 horsepower and smaller, furnish a certified copy
of a motor efficiency test report on an identical motor.
Voltage Drop:
a.
Verify that voltage drop at motor is less than 3% at the motor.
Test Report Forms:
1.
Routine Tests: IEEE 112, Form A-1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
In accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B.
Align motor carefully and properly with driven equipment.
C.
Secure equipment to mounting surface with anchor bolts. Provide anchor bolts
meeting manufacturer's recommendations and of sufficient size and number for
the specified seismic conditions.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.03
Refer to Section 16950, ELECTRICAL TESTING.
MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
A.
Furnish manufacturer's representative at site in accordance with Section 01650,
START-UP AND DEMONSTRATION, for installation assistance, inspection,
equipment testing, and startup assistance for motors larger than 75 horsepower.
B.
Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation.
3.04
WARRANTY
A.
Provide (3) three year warranty beginning at final completion on materials and
workmanship.
3.05
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
Table supplements, following "END OF SECTION," are a part of this
Specification.
END OF SECTION
16405-9
hp
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
Nom. Speed
rpm
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
TABLE 1
MOTOR PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
% Guar. Min. Full Load Efficiency
%Guar. Min. Full Load Power Factor
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Drip-proof
Drip-proof
Drip-proof
Drip-proof
ODP
TEFC
ODP
TEFC
ODP
TEFC
ODP
TEFC
80.0
81.5
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
78.5
79.3
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
79.3
81.5
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
79.3
82.0
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
82.5
84.0
82.0
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
82.0
84.0
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
81.5
83.7
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
85.5
85.5
83.7
83.7
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
82.9
82.5
82.9
81.7
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
82.0
84.0
82.0
82.0
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
84.8
86.5
84.8
84.8
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
87.5
88.1
87.5
86.6
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
84.1
82.9
84.1
82.9
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
84.8
86.5
84.8
84.8
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
86.5
86.5
84.8
84.8
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
87.5
88.1
87.5
86.6
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
87.5
86.5
87.5
86.6
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
86.5
88.1
84.8
86.6
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
89.3
89.5
89.3
88.4
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
88.5
88.5
88.4
87.5
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
87.5
86.5
87.5
86.6
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
16405-10
hp
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
Nom. Speed
rpm
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
TABLE 1
MOTOR PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
% Guar. Min. Full Load Efficiency
%Guar. Min. Full Load Power Factor
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Drip-proof
Drip-proof
Drip-proof
Drip-proof
ODP
TEFC
ODP
TEFC
ODP
TEFC
ODP
TEFC
89.3
89.5
89.3
88.4
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
89.3
89.5
89.3
88.4
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
89.5
89.5
89.3
88.4
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
89.3
88.5
89.3
88.4
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
88.5
89.8
88.4
88.4
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
91.0
91.0
90.9
90.2
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
90.2
90.2
90.2
89.3
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
89.3
88.5
89.3
88.4
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
91.0
90.6
90.9
89.3
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
91.7
91.7
91.7
90.9
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
91.0
90.6
90.2
89.3
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
90.2
89.5
89.3
88.4
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
91.7
91.0
91.7
90.2
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
92.4
92.4
92.4
91.7
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
91.7
91.0
90.9
89.3
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
90.2
89.5
89.3
88.4
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
91.7
91.4
89.5
88.4
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
92.4
92.4
92.4
91.7
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
91.7
91.0
91.7
90.2
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
91.7
91.7
90.9
90.9
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
Mfr.'s Std.
91.7
91.7
90.2
89.3
86.6
86.1
87.0
89.0
93.6
93.0
92.8
91.7
78.2
78.2
83.0
84.5
92.4
92.4
91.7
90.9
81.5
81.5
81.5
81.5
91.7
91.0
90.9
90.2
70.0
70.5
70.0
70.5
92.0
92.0
90.2
89.3
85.1
86.7
89.0
89.0
16405-11
hp
60
70
100
125
150
200
Nom. Speed
rpm
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
1200
900
3600
1800
TABLE 1
MOTOR PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
% Guar. Min. Full Load Efficiency
%Guar. Min. Full Load Power Factor
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Drip-proof
Drip-proof
Drip-proof
Drip-proof
ODP
TEFC
ODP
TEFC
ODP
TEFC
ODP
TEFC
93.6
93.0
92.8
91.7
79.5
79.4
82.5
82.5
92.4
92.4
91.7
90.9
81.5
81.5
81.5
81.5
91.7
91.7
90.9
90.9
78.5
72.9
78.5
80.0
92.7
93.0
91.7
90.9
85.8
88.3
87.5
89.0
93.6
94.1
93.5
92.8
80.5
79.9
80.5
80.5
93.0
93.0
92.8
91.7
81.5
81.5
81.5
81.5
92.4
91.7
91.7
90.9
79.5
73.2
79.5
79.5
93.6
93.6
91.7
91.7
87.1
88.5
88.5
88.5
94.5
94.5
93.5
93.5
81.0
81.5
81.0
81.5
93.6
93.5
93.5
92.8
82.0
82.0
82.0
82.0
92.8
92.4
92.8
91.7
80.5
74.5
80.5
81.0
93.6
93.3
91.7
90.7
87.0
88.2
87.0
88.5
95.1
94.5
94.0
93.5
81.0
81.0
81.0
81.0
93.6
93.6
92.8
92.8
82.1
81.7
85.5
85.5
93.5
92.4
92.8
91.7
77.0
77.3
77.0
80.0
93.6
93.7
91.7
91.7
86.4
89.1
87.0
90.5
94.5
94.7
93.5
92.8
85.4
85.5
87.5
86.0
93.6
94.1
93.5
92.8
82.7
82.3
85.5
85.5
93.5
93.0
92.8
92.4
78.5
78.5
78.5
78.5
93.6
93.7
92.4
91.7
86.5
90.0
86.5
90.5
95.0
95.2
94.5
94.0
82.5
85.0
84.5
85.0
94.5
94.5
93.5
94.0
81.5
81.5
81.5
81.5
93.5
93.0
92.8
92.4
78.0
78.5
78.0
78.5
94.3
94.3
92.4
93.0
87.8
89.4
91.0
91.0
95.0
95.2
94.0
94.0
85.2
86.5
87.0
87.0
16405-12
hp
250
300
350
400
450
500
Nom. Speed
rpm
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
1200
3600
1800
3600
1800
3600
3600
TABLE 1
MOTOR PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
% Guar. Min. Full Load Efficiency
%Guar. Min. Full Load Power Factor
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Drip-proof
Drip-proof
Drip-proof
Drip-proof
ODP
TEFC
ODP
TEFC
ODP
TEFC
ODP
TEFC
94.5
94.5
93.5
93.5
79.0
82.5
79.0
82.5
94.3
94.7
91.7
92.4
85.0
86.5
85.0
96.5
85.4
95.4
94.5
94.5
79.0
79.0
79.0
79.0
95.0
94.5
94.5
93.5
82.0
82.0
82.0
82.0
93.7
94.3
89.8
89.9
95.4
95.2
94.5
94.0
80.0
80.0
800
80.0
93.7
93.7
84.5
90.1
94.3
94.7
89.4
85.9
94.7
94.7
85.9
85.9
94.3
88.4
9437
86.8
94.7
89.1
94.7
88.3
16405-13
SECTION 16410
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the
items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include:
1.
Product data for each type of product specified.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with requirements of Sections
01730 and 13410, operation and maintenance manuals for items included under this Section,
including circuits and motor disconnects.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
1.
Electrical Component Standards: Provide components which are listed and labeled by
UL. Comply with UL Standard 98 and NEMA Standard KS 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which
may be incorporated in Work include:
1.
2.
Square D Company
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.
2.02 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Provide NEMA 1, 4X, 7, 9, or 12, 316 stainless steel enclosure to match the rating of the
area in which switch is installed. For motor and motor starter disconnects through 100
horsepower, provide units with horsepower ratings suitable to loads. For motor and motor
starter disconnects, clearly label switch, "DO NOT OPEN UNDER LOAD."
B. Circuit Breaker Switches: Where individual circuit breakers are required, provide factoryassembled, molded-case circuit breakers with permanent instantaneous magnetic and thermal
trips in each pole, and with fault-current limiting protection, ampere ratings as indicated.
16410-1
Construct with overcenter, trip-free, toggle type operating mechanisms with quick-make,
quick-break action and positive handle indication. Provide push-to-trip feature for testing
and exercising circuit breaker trip mechanism. Construct breakers for mounting and
operating in any physical position and in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. Provide
with AL/CU-rated mechanical screw type removable connector lugs.
C. Non-fusible Disconnects: (Heavy-duty) switches of classes and current ratings as indicated.
D. Double-Throw Switches: (Heavy-duty) switches of classes and current ratings as indicated.
E. Switches for Classified (Hazardous) Locations: Heavy-duty switches with UL labels and
listings for hazardous location classifications in which installed.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Special Enclosure Material: Provide special enclosure material as follows for switches
indicated:
1.
316 Stainless Steel for all rated switches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
16410-2
SECTION 16421
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering the
items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include:
1.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data on NEMA Class 2, Type B
motor control centers (MCCs).
2.
Submit layout Drawings of MCCs showing accurately scaled basic equipment sections
including, but not limited to, motor starters, controllers, device panels, and circuit
breakers. Show spatial relationships of MCC components to proximate electrical
equipment. Clearly differentiate on wiring diagrams those conductors which are factory
installed and those which are field installed.
3.
Fuse and Overload Sizes: Submit a compiled list of motors, fuse sizes, overload sizes,
and types for motors actually installed.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section
01730, operation and maintenance manuals for items included under this Section. Include
data and parts list for each MCC and troubleshooting maintenance guide.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
1.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Standards Pub/No. ICS-2, pertaining to
construction, testing, and installation of MCCs, and with applicable NEMA standards
for circuit breakers and fuses.
2.
UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standard 486A, "Wire
Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors," and UL Standard
845, "Electric Motor Control Centers." Provide MCCs and ancillary equipment which
are UL listed and labeled.
3.
IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Standard 241
pertaining to construction and installation of MCCs.
4.
ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI as applicable to
MCCs.
16421-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products which
may be incorporated in Work include:
1.
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.
2.
Square D Company.
2.02 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS AND COMPONENTS
A. Provide intelligent motor control center and ancillary components of sizes, ratings, classes,
types, and characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design,
materials, components, and construction in accordance with published product information
and as required for complete installation and as specified herein.
B. MCCs: For operation on power source rating indicated, consisting of one or more vertical
sections, each with groupings of control units containing motor starters, thermal overload
units, disconnects, and including such other electrical equipment as controls, control
transformers, metering panels, current transformers, and auxiliary devices as indicated.
Provide MCC with NEMA Class 2, Type B wiring, wire units using 90°C SIS or MTW
stranded copper wire; No. 14 AWG minimum. Tag all wires at each termination.
C. MCC Supporting Structures: Factory assembled, dead-front, MCC standard supporting
structures with enclosed vertical sections, fastened together to form rigid freestanding
assembly. Construct each section 90 inches high with 9-inch horizontal wireways at top and
bottom, 20 inches wide, and with 20-inch section depth for front-of-board unit arrangement.
Provide NEMA Type 1A enclosure for any MCC in exterior or corrosive areas. Provide
gasketing on all enclosing sheet steel, wireways, and unit doors. Construct units with
4-5/8-inch wide, 8-inch deep, 90-inch high vertical wireway in each vertical structure on
right side of unit, accessible through hinged doors, and with supports at proper intervals
within for fastening wires/cables. Form supporting members of not less than 13 gauge hotrolled steel. Construct structure doors with removable pin hinges and secure with quarterturn indicating type fasteners. Provide front-accessible main lug compartment for connection
of incoming cables in top or bottom as indicated. Provide removable lifting angle full length
of MCC. Design lifting angle to support entire weight of MCC section. Design bottom
channels to be removable; provide holes for bolting MCC units to floor.
1.
Provide shipping splits in MCC lineup to allow for shipment of maximum 60-inch-long
units. Design MCCs so matching vertical sections of same current rating and
manufacturer can be added later at either end of lineup without use of transition
sections. Provide removable end and top plates to close off openings.
16421-2
D. Bus System: Tin-plated copper, braced to withstand faults of 65,000 rms symmetrical
amperes minimum unless indicated otherwise. Provide main horizontal bus with rating
shown and vertical bus rating of 300 amperes minimum; and construct vertical bus bars with
protective barriers to prevent accidental contact of personnel with bus. Vertical bus shall be
full length.
1.
Provide 0.25-inch by 1-inch minimum copper ground bus running full width of MCC at
bottom of lineup. Drill ground bus and furnish 1 lug per starter unit, minimum.
E. Starter Units: Draw-out type, magnetic motor starters with fusible switch or motor circuit
protector type disconnects, auxiliary control devices, and NEMA size as indicated. Construct
each starter unit with doors, unit support pans, saddles, and disconnect operators; enclose
and isolate each unit from adjacent units. Design units so that faults will be contained within
compartments. Equip with thermal and magnetic overload protection device for each motor
circuit, unit-mounted pilot devices, timers, selector switches, indicating lights, and control
relays. Provide 1 spare normally open auxiliary contact. Provide draw-out units with deenergized position where unit is still supported by structure, but no electrical connection is
made. Provide method of locking unit in de-energized position. Design plug-in units of same
NEMA size and branch feeder units of same trip rating, to be interchangeable with each
other.
1.
F.
Three-phase starter may be following types:
a.
Full Voltage Nonreversing (FVNR): One 3-pole magnetic contactor with a set of
3 overload devices.
b.
Full Voltage Reversing (FVR): Two 3-pole magnetic contactors with a common set
of 3 overload devices.
c.
Reduced Voltage (for wye connected part winding motors): Two 3-pole magnetic
contactors, each with its own set of 3 overload devices and a timer for closing of
the running contactor. Running contactor shall be sized for motor full load current
and starting (half winding) contactor shall be sized for at least 75 percent of full
load current and shall be capable of interrupting at least 10 times full load current.
d.
Reduced Voltage (closed transition autotransformer type): Three magnetic
contactors, two 2-pole and one 3-pole with a common set of 3 overloads, a timing
relay, and an auto-transformer with taps at 50, 65, 80, and 100 percent and an
integral temperature switch or timing relay to protect transformer windings.
Unit Plug-On: Provide plug-on connections for each electrical power phase. Design contact
fingers to be floating and self-aligning; silver plate contacts for obtaining low-resistance
connections.
16421-3
G. Disconnect Operators: Provide external operator handles for switches and circuit breakers.
Design handle with up-down motion and with down position indicating OFF. Construct
handles which permit locking handle in OFF position with 3 padlocks.
H. Unit Doors: Securely mounted with rugged concealed-type hinges which allow doors to
swing open minimum of 115 degrees for ease of unit maintenance and withdrawal. Fasten
doors to structure so that they remain in place when unit is withdrawn.
1.
I.
J.
Closed door must cover unit space when unit has been temporarily removed. Provide
interlock for each unit door with associated disconnect mechanism to prevent door from
opening when unit is energized.
Control and Pilot Devices: Provide an individually fused control power transformer in each
starter unit. Provide 2 fuses in transformer primary circuit and 1 in transformer secondary
circuit. Size transformers such that they can supply 100VA in excess of unit requirements or
provide 150VA rated transformer, whichever is greater.
1.
Provide synchronous type timers unless otherwise noted.
2.
Provide 300 volt-rated, oil-tight type pilot lights, push buttons, and selector switches.
Equip Start push button with extended guard and black color insert. Equip Stop push
buttons with half guard and red color insert.
3.
Provide 120 volt LED type push button to test pilot lights with lens color indicated.
4.
Provide machine tool type relays, each with 1 spare N.O. contact.
5.
Provide 6-digit elapsed time indicators with 1/10 hour increments.
Fusible Switch: Quick-make quick-break, gang-operated switches with positive pressure
fuse clips suitable for use with class of fuses required. Provide switches with continuous
current rating indicated and with a 100,000 ampere interrupting capability at rated voltage.
K. Motor Circuit Protector: Adjustable trip magnetic-only instantaneous molded-case circuit
breakers for use in starter units. Provide a continuous current rating of at least 125 percent of
the motor full load current and an interrupting capacity of 65,000 amps symmetrical. Provide
a field adjustable instantaneous trip unit capable of being adjusted from 7 to 13 times motor
full load current.
L. Circuit Breakers: Factory assembled, molded-case circuit breakers with permanent
instantaneous magnetic and thermal trips in each pole and with fault-current limiting
protection; ampere ratings as indicated. Construct with overcenter, trip-free, toggle type
operating mechanisms with quick-make quick-break action and positive handle indication.
Provide push-to-trip feature for testing and exercising circuit breaker trip mechanism.
Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position and in an ambient
16421-4
temperature of 40 degrees. Provide with AL/CU rated mechanical screw type removable
connector lugs.
M. Power Monitor: Microprocessor-based device capable of measuring each phase current, lineto-line voltage, line-to-neutral voltage, watts, VARS, power factor, demand watts, and
frequency. Unit shall contain kilowatt hour totalizer. 3-CT's and 3 (fused)-PT's shall be
provided and factory installed as required. Unit shall have two Form C, 2-amp rated output
contacts, one to alarm upon abnormal voltage level and one to alarm on power failure.
Microprocessor shall communicate via MODBUS Ethernet protocol.
N. Finishes: Thoroughly clean interior and exterior prior to coating of MCC, including bolted
joints, with rust-inhibiting prime coat. Provide 2 finish coats of manufacturer's standard
color baked-on enamel finish.
O. Testing: All parts of MCC shall be tested in accordance with Section 16950.
P. Spare Units: In each motor control center, provide a spare Size 2 full voltage, nonreversing
combination starter. Provide a Hand-Off Auto switch and red "running" pilot light in this
unit.
1.
In each motor control center, provide a spare 60 amp fusible switch.
2.
In each motor control center, provide spaces for addition of a Size 2 motor starter and a
60 amp fused feeder switch.
3.
24 replacement lamps for pilot lights.
4.
6 each color replacement lens caps for pilot lights.
5.
2 starter coils for each size furnished.
6.
2 replacement overload heaters.
7.
2 overload relays.
8.
2 motor circuit protectors for each size.
9.
2 circuit breakers for each size.
10. 10 spare fuses for each type and amperage
11. 2 cans of touch up paint matching factory color.
16421-5
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 WARRANTY
A. Warranty per specification section 01740.
END OF SECTION
16421-6
SECTION 16435
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES
A.
Related Work Described Elsewhere
1.
B.
Generator Set Equipment: Section 16239.
The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
a.
3.
C37.04, Standard Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit
Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis.
C37.06, Switchgear─AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on
a Symmetrical Current Basis.
C37.09, Standard Test Procedure for AC High-Voltage Circuit
Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis.
C37.2, Standard Electric Power Systems Device Function
Numbers.
C37.20.2, Metal-Clad and Station Type Cubicle Switchgear.
C37.90.1, Standard Surge Withstand Capacity (SWC) Tests for
Protective Relays and Relay Systems.
C39.1, Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments, Requirements
for.
C39.5, Electrical and Electronic Measuring and Controlling
Instrumentation, Safety Requirements.
C57.13, Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers.
C62.11, Standard for Metal-Oxide Surge Arrestors for AC Power
Circuits.
Z55.1, Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment.
460, Standard for Electrical Measuring Transducer for Converting
AC Electrical Quantities into DC Electrical Quantities.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
b.
LA 1, Surge Arrestors.
SG 4, Alternating-Current High-Voltage Circuit Breakers.
16435-1
c.
1.02
Electrical
Equipment
(1,000 Volts
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
5.
Uniform Building
Requirements.
Code
(UBC):
Section 2312,
Earthquake
SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.03
for
4.
A.
B.
250, Enclosures
Maximum).
Shop Drawings:
Descriptive product information.
Dimensional drawings.
Itemized bill of material.
Protective device time-current characteristics on transparencies.
Operational description.
Installation instructions.
Bus data.
One-line, three-line, and control schematic drawings.
Connection and interconnection drawings.
Conduit entrance locations.
Quality Control Submittals: Operation and maintenance manual.
UL COMPLIANCE
A.
Products manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall
conform to UL Standards and have an applied UL listing mark.
B.
UL listing mark for Category ”A” enclosure requirements of ANSI C37.20.2,
Appendix A.
1.04
A.
1.05
A.
PACKING AND SHIPPING
Shipping Splits: As shown to facilitate ingress of equipment to final
installation location within the building.
SPARE PARTS
Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts,
special tools, and materials:
1.
2.
3.
5 Each-Spare fuse, both power and control, of every size and type used.
15 Each-Switchgear indicating lamps.
2 Each-Indicating lamp pullers.
16435-2
4.
5.
6.
7.
12 Each-Color caps of each color for indicating lamps.
Crank for racking breakers and crank lifting device.
Remote racking device and closing mechanism to allow operator to be
outside of Arcflash boundry.
All software needed – licensed to the owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
C.
2.02
Russ Electric
ASCO
No “or-equal” or substitute products will be considered.
GENERAL
A.
Furnish switchgear that is the product of a single manufacturer. Assembled
units with component parts of several manufacturers will not be acceptable
with the exception that such minor items as terminal blocks, test switches,
fuses, wiring, etc., may be manufactured by others.
B.
Design, test, and assemble in accordance with ANSI C37.04, C37.06, and
C37.20.2, and NEMA SG4.
C.
Suitable for 4800 volts (4.8kV), three-phase, three-wire electrical service
having an available short-circuit current shall be the same as existing
sections.
D.
All indicator lights shall be LED type.
E.
Provide equipment rating such as voltage (max, nominal, etc.) and amps.
2.03
SWITCHGEAR FUSING
A.
Current limiting fuses shall be Square D din style type or equal for 5.5 Kv
voltage class (note: fuse size on one-line diagram). Fuses shall have a 65,000
amperes symmetrical interrupting capability at 5 kV.
B.
The switchgear shall be equipped with an optional FUSELOGIC system to
provide the following features:
1.
Provide a system to prevent potential single phase conditions by
blocking the closing of a manually o rmotor operated load interrupter
switch when a fuse is blown or not installed.
16435-3
2.04
LOAD INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR
A.
The metal-enclosed switchgear assembly shall be compartmentalized into the
following distinct compartments:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Main bus compartment
Switch Compartment
Cable connection / fuse compartment
Mechanism compartment
B.
The metal-enclosed switchgear with load interrupter switches shall consist of
a multiple section line-up be of indoor construction. The sections shall
contain the load interrupter switches and the necessary accessory
components. The equipment shall be factory-assembled (except for
necessary shipping splits) and operationally checked. The assembly shall be
a self-supporting, floor mounted bay.
C.
Material: 11-gauge minimum cold-rolled steel, formed with reinforced steel
members.
D.
The equipment shall be designed for front accessibility and rear access.
E.
Cable entry shall be bottom.
F.
The complete assembly shall be constructed in accordance with applicable
provisions of ANSI / IEEE C37.20.3-1987 and the minimum construction
standards of the manufacturers of the major components such as power fuses
or potential transformers. Provide adequate space for fuse handling when
applicable. {Insert when automatic fuse opening is specified}For automatic
fuse opening the switch-fuse combination shall meet the applicable sections
of IEC 420 to ensure proper coordination of the proposed switch-fuse
combination. To comply with these requirements, a time delay relay may be
used for fuse ratings that do not coordinate with the switch to ensure that any
fault currents have decayed to values that the load interrupter switch can
safely interrupt.
G.
Switchgear rated 600 amps continuous shall not require ventilation openings
to aid in cooling of the associated components.
H.
The integrated fused switchgear assembly shall withstand the effects of
closing, carrying and interrupting currents up to the assigned maximum short
circuit rating.
I.
The switchgear shall be low maintenance designed to reduce the requirement
for annual/ periodic maintenance of the equipment. Equipment with
scheduled maintenance intervals of 5 or more years is preferred.
16435-4
J.
Two viewing ports shall be installed in the switch enclosure to enable visible
verification of the switch blade position.
K.
An animated mimic bus attached to the end of the operating shaft shall be
provided to give visual indication of the position of the switch on each bay.
L.
System Voltage: 5 kV, three phase, resistor grounded three phase 3 wire.
M.
Operating Frequency: 60 Hz.
N.
Maximum Short Circuit Current: 25 kA RMS Symmetrical.
O.
Maximum Design Voltage: 5kV.
P.
Basic Impulse LEVEL (BIL): 60kV.
Q.
Main Bus Ampacity: 1200 amperes, continuous.
R.
Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 25 kA, RMS symmetrical.
S.
Short-Time Current (two second): Interrupter switch 25 kA,
Grounding switch 25 kA
T.
Finish: Baked enamel applied over a rust-inhibiting, phosphated base
coating.
1.
U.
Indoor Enclosure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.05
Color: Match existing color.
NEMA 250, Type 1, with formed edges on hinged and nonhinged
panels.
Rear, full height, bolt-on panels for each enclosure section.
Cable Termination Access: Padlock provision.
All lights shall be LED type.
BUS BARS AND INTERCONNECTIONS
A.
Continuous Current Rating: 600 amperes with sufficient cross-section to
limit temperature rise at rated current to 55 degrees C.
B.
Main Bus: Totally enclosed by metal plates.
C.
Ground Bus: Material: Same as main bus.
16435-5
2.06
COMPONENTS
A. Motor Operator
1.
The motor operator shall be located in the mechanism compartment and
shall not alter the dimensions of the equipment. The motor operator
shall have a control voltage disconnect switch accessible on front of
mechanism cover with a provision for padlocking in the on and off
positions. Electrical operation of the device requires a 24 VDC
{consistent with close and trip coil, if so equipped}. The operating
mechanism shall be isolated from high voltage by a steel barrier and
coupled through a direct drive shaft. Access to mechanism parts shall
not require de-energizing of the equipment.
B. The switch shall have three positions, open, closed and grounded.
C. The switch shall have a four-time fault close capability.
D. The switch shall be capable of 100 operations at 600 Amperes.
E.
The switch shall be capable of 1000 mechanical no load operations.
F.
The switch blades shall be contained in a single sealed for life enclosure. The
interrupting medium pressure within the enclosure shall not exceed 6
PSI (0.4 Bars) at 5 KV class equipment. Refilling of the switch shall not
be required. Maintenance of the interrupter module shall not be required
over its life.
G. The switch operating handle shall be removable. The handle must be suitable
to operate the load interrupter mechanism as well as the ground switch
mechanism.
H. Voltage and Short Circuit Ratings: Match ratings specified for integrated
assembly.
I.
Momentary Rating: 40kA RMS Asymmetrical.
J.
Fault Closing: 40 kA, RMS Asymmetrical{at 25.8 or 38 kV}.
K. Load side live line indicators shall be provided as standard on the mechanism
compartment. The live line indicator assembly shall be mounted in the
mechanism compartment and shall be an easily removable module
containing three neon indicators powered from voltage dividers within
the 3 standoff insulators.
16435-6
2.06
ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide a grounding switch on the load side of the fuses to discharge any
capacitive voltage in the feeder cable prior to gaining access to the fuse
compartment. Switch shall be mechanically interlocked with the main
grounding switch of the load interrupter switch.
B.
Surge Arresters: Distribution class, rated 5 kV, MCOV; one per phase.
C.
Incoming Cable Termination: An anti-rotational mounting pad shall have
provision for 1 single hole cable lugs.
D.
Provide mechanical lugs for terminating cables onto the switchgear terminal
pads.
E.
Provide a {optional}low voltage compartment to accommodate control circuit
terminal blocks and PowerLogic metering. The low voltage/instrument
compartment door shall be hinged.
F.
Provide two 2" infrared inspection windows per vertical section. One window
shall be for the lower compartment and the other for the upper compartment.
H.
Pad lock provisions for mechanism covers on the load interrupter switch and
grounding switch mechanisms shall be supplied as standard to prevent
unauthorized access to the operating mechanism.
I.
Mechanical Interlocks:
1. An interlock shall be provided on the grounding switch mechanism to prevent
insertion of the operating handle and operation of the grounding switch when
the load interrupter switch is in the closed position. {Include when ground
switch is specified}
2. An interlock shall be provided on the load interrupter switch mechanism to
prevent insertion of the operating handle and operation of the load interrupter
switch when the grounding switch is in the closed position.
3. An interlock shall be provided to prevent the removal of the high voltage
access panel with the load interrupter switch closed. To access the high
voltage compartment, the load interrupter switch must be opened and the
grounding switch must be in the closed position. The interlock must be
directly attached to the operating mechanism and should not rely on long
cables and linkages.
4. To facilitate cable testing in the high voltage compartment, the grounding
switch can be returned to the open position. In this position interlocks are to
be provided to prevent replacement of the high voltage access panel and
16435-7
prevent closure of the load interrupter switch.
J.
Key Interlocks
K.
Voltage Transformer Options:
A voltage transformer bay shall contain a load interrupter with grounding
switch. The voltage transformer shall be 120 VAC.
The width of the unit shall be 20" or 29.5".
L.
Control Power Transformer Options:
A control power transformer bay shall contain a load interrupter with
grounding switch.
Control Power Transformer, single phase, with primary disconnect fuse,
240/120 VAC secondary, 10 kVA.
The width of the unit shall be 29.5".
M.
Current Transformer Options:
N.
Each bay containing a load interrupter shall include the following
Bus mounted 3 Donut Type Current Transformers: 5A.
Metering Options:
Each bay containing a load interrupter switch shall include the following as
shown on the drawings.
O.
Automatic Load Transfer Control:
1. An automatic load transfer system shall be provided for a Main-Main
(Common-Bus Primary-Selective System) arrangement. The system shall
automatically control motor operated load interrupter switches to provide
transfer of the medium-voltage circuit to an alternate circuit upon loss of
voltage of the normal source(s). Potential transformers feeding phase balance
and undervoltage relays are provided to continuously monitor all three phases
on both sources.
2. The system shall consist of a MODICON programmable logic controller or a
relay system, potential transformers, control power transfer contactor, control
selector switches, two three-phase, phase-balance/undervoltage (47N/27)
relays, and status indicating lights.
3. The potential transformers shall also provide 120 VAC control power for the
motor operators and the logic control. Other accessories for the system
include:
a.
1- Auto/Manual selector switch with indicating lights.
16435-8
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
1- Hold Return/Auto Return selector switch with indicating lights.
1- Closed Transition/Open Transition selector switch with indicating
lights.
1- Preferred Source selector switch with indicating lights (main-main
system).
2- Undervoltage test push buttons.
2- Close push buttons with indicating lights.
2- Open bush buttons with indicating lights.
4. Sequence of operation:
1.
Main - Main System:
a. The normal conditions shall be with one source (designated as
preferred) closed and with the other source (designate as the alternate)
open but available to provide power. A transfer is initiated after a six
(6) second time delay upon detection of a phase unbalance and/or
undervoltage condition on the preferred source. The normal source
switch will open within three (5) cycles after the time delay. The
alternate source switch will close within 5 cycles after the time delay.
The re-transfer will occur after the voltage on the normal source
returns and stabilizes for five (5) minutes. The time registers are
adjustable by the use of a hand held programmer.
b. The automatic transfer switches shall be equipped with a motor
operator, close coil and opening coil.
c. The two switches shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked to
prevent inadvertent paralleling of the preferred and alternate sources.
2.07
TERMINAL BLOCKS
A.
Rating: 600 volts, 30-ampere minimum.
B.
Type:
1.
2.
3.
2.08
One-piece barrier with strap screws.
Shorting type for current transformer leads.
Pull-apart control wiring terminal boards on drawout units.
CONTROL WIRING
A.
NFPA 70, Type SIS, single-conductor, Class B, stranded copper, rated
600 volts for control, instrumentation, and power circuits.
16435-9
B.
Individual seven-strand, copper conductors, twisted and covered with a
100 percent aluminum, polyester shield with tinned copper drain wire and
overall outer jacket, rated 600 volts, 90 degrees C minimum for transducer
output and analog circuits.
C.
Conductor Lugs: Pre-insulated, self-locking, spade type with reinforced
sleeves.
D.
Wire Markers: Each wire individually identified with permanent markers at
each end.
E.
Internal circuit wiring crossing shipping splits to have plug connectors.
F.
Splices: Not permitted.
2.09
METERS AND INSTRUMENTS
A.
As shown on drawings and match existing sections.
B.
Instruments and relays semiflush mounted with glass covers and dusttight
gaskets. Alternating current instruments and relays suitable for operation of
5-amphere current transformer secondary circuits, 120 volt potentials
transformers and at frequency of 60 Hertz.
C.
Instruments, relays and meters accurately calibrated and adjusted before
shipment. Instrument, relays and meters not injuriously affected by shortcircuit currents as specified elsewhere in this specification. Accuracy of 1
percent in accordance with ANSI Standard Requirements for Electrical
Indicating Instruments C39.1.
D.
In general, indicating instruments are 4-1/2 inch rectangular type, 250 degree
scales and white with black markings. Provide moving elements with
accessible zero adjustments external use.
E.
Inspect instruments, relays, and meters for satisfactory operation and, if
necessary, adjust after installation.
F.
Control switches: Rotary type with positive means for maintaining contact.
Silver-to-silver contacts provided with easily removable protective covers.
G.
Protective Relays: Rectangular semiflush drawout type with built-in testing
facilities. Relays and relay systems shall conform to IEEE C37.90.
H.
Test blocks for both current and potential, small wiring, and terminal blocks.
16435-10
2.10
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Master Nameplate:
1.
2.
Deep etched aluminum with manufacturer's name and model number.
Riveted to main vertical section.
B.
Section Identification: Match existing section.
C.
Nameplate: Match existing section.
D.
Warning Signs: Provide warning signs such as danger, high voltage, keep
out, etc.
2.11
FACTORY TESTING
A.
Switchgear assembly production tested in accordance with ANSI C37.20.2.
B.
Circuit breakers production tested in accordance with ANSI C37.09.
2.12
SWITCHGEAR ENCLOSURE
A. Construction: [Indoor.] [Outdoor, non-walk-in.] Each equipment bay shall be
a separately constructed cubicle assembled to form a rigid free standing unit.
Minimum sheet metal thickness shall be 11 gauge steel on all exterior
surfaces. Adjacent bays shall be securely bolted together to form an
integrated rigid structure. Each individual unit shall be braced to prevent
distortion.
B. All bus joints shall use Belleville washers. Torque bolts that are used for bus
joints or for insulators and direct support of any current carrying parts shall
be marked with a bead of highly visible bright orange "torque seal", that will
readily show when a bolt has loosened.
C.
The high voltage non-disconnect type fuses (when required), shall be
accessible only through a separate panel mechanically interlocked with the
switch. Where grounding switches are supplied, access panels shall not be
removable unless the grounding switch is in the closed position. If
grounding switches are defeated, access panels shall not be removable unless
the load interrupter switch is in the fully open position. Screened or
penetrable barriers which may allow intentional or inadvertent contact with
energized parts shall not be permitted.
D.
The duplex switch configuration shall be equipped with a mechanical
interlock between the two switches preventing paralleling of the two
16435-11
incoming lines. A single access panel shall be provided to the load side of
the duplex configuration requiring that both switches shall be opened and
grounded prior to accessing the fuses and load cable terminations.
E.
Main bus shall be tin-plated copper, non-insulated rated 1200 amps, and
shall be supported directly by the switch.
F.
For multiple bay lineups, include continuous ground bus through the
switchgear assembly, securely connected to the steel frame of each cubicle.
G.
Main bus and ground bus connections shall be designed for easy for future
extensions. Cutout areas with removable bolted on covers shall allow for
future extension of the main bus. A knock-out shall be removable for the
extension of the ground bus.
H.
The metal-enclosed switchgear shall be fully assembled, inspected and tested
at the factory prior to shipment. Large line-ups shall be split to permit
normal shipping and handling as well as for ease of rejoining at the job site.
2.13
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
B.
All non-painted steel parts shall be zinc plated.
All painted steel parts shall be cleaned and a zinc- phosphate (outdoor
equipment) or iron phosphate (indoor equipment) pre-treatment applied prior to
paint application
C. Paint Color shall be ANSI-61 (light gray) TGIC polyester powder, applied
electrostatically through air. Following paint application, parts shall be baked
to produce a hard durable finish. The average thickness of the paint film shall
be 2.0 mils. Paint film shall be uniform in color and free from blisters, sags,
flaking and peeling.
D. Adequacy of paint finish to inhibit the buildup of rust on ferrous metal
materials shall be tested and evaluated per paragraphs 5.2.8.1-7 of ANSI
C37.20.3-1987. Salt spray withstand tests in accordance with paragraph
5.2.8.4 shall be performed on a periodic basis to provide conformance to this
corrosion resistance standard of at least 2500 hours minimum (outdoor
equipment) or 600 hours minimum (indoor equipment).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
i.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
16435-12
3.02
ii.
Secure equipment to floor with anchor bolts of sufficient
size and number adequate for specified seismic conditions.
iii.
Install equipment plumb and in longitudinal alignment with
wall.
iv.
Tighten current-carrying bolted bus connections and
enclosure framing and panel bolts to manufacturer's
recommendations.
v.
Coordinate terminal connections with installation of
secondary feeders.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.03
In accordance with Section 16950, ELECTRICAL TESTING.
MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
A.
Manufacturer's Representative: Present at site for minimum person-days
listed below, travel time excluded:
1.
2.
2
8 hour days for installation assistance
2
8 hour days for site training with O&M
manuals.
3.
1
person-days for facility startup.
vi.
Testing: In accordance with Section 16950 and the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Testing shall be performed by an independent testing
agency
Make insulation resistance tests of switchgear buses,
components, and connecting supply, feeder, and control
circuits.
Make continuity test of circuits.
Perform test procedures required by the
manufacturer's installation and testing instructions.
Perform mechanical and electrical operator tests.
Check main and auxiliary contact alignment.
Check arc interrupter operation on load interrupter
switches.
Verify key interlock operation.
Test insulation resistance on each phase to ground and
from each phase to each other phase.
Test AC over-potential in accordance with applicable
ANSI/IEEE standards.
16435-13
10.
Test contact resistance across each main contact set.
Report contact resistance in excess of manufacturer's
tolerances.
11. Test protective relays to determine pickup parameters.
Verify accuracy of timing setting for 3 points on time
dial curve.
12. Trip each circuit breaker by operating each associated
protective relay.
13. Measure minimum pickup voltage of each trip and
close coil.
14. Test arc chutes for losses in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
15. Verify operation of auxiliary and emergency
equipment.
vii.
Retesting: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and
completely retest switchgear. Verify by the system test that the
total system meets the specified requirements.
viii.
3.04
Provide owner with certified copy of test results.
WARRANTY
A.
3.05
Provide a full warranty for a minimum of 5 years beginning at final
acceptance for all components specified in 16435.
GENERATOR CONTROLS
A.
When utility provided power shuts off, the utility breaker shall open. After
the utility breaker is open the generator will turn on, and its breaker will
close providing power. When utility power is restored the generator breaker
will open, then the utility breaker will close to restore power.
END OF SECTION
16435-14
SECTION 16436
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE PAD-MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
Description
This section describes materials, installation, and testing of medium-voltage pad-mounted
switchgear.
B.
C.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 01730.
2.
General Electrical Requirements: 16050.
Submittals
1.
Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions, Section 01340,
and the following.
2.
Submit a complete list of equipment and materials and any details required to
demonstrate that the equipment will function properly as a unit. This material shall
include:
a.
Manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature.
b.
System configuration with single-line diagrams. Identify devices by location,
frame size, trip rating, and manufacturer type number.
c.
Detailed descriptions of equipment, including weights, dimensions,
foundation requirements, and installation and anchoring requirements.
d.
Complete dimensional plan views indicating sizes and clearances required for
all equipment.
e.
Interconnection and schematic diagrams for power and control wiring
showing all conduit runs and wiring with terminal numbers for each wire.
Clearly identify contacts, terminal blocks, and wire numbers for remote
devices. Show field devices and wiring on diagrams.
f.
Time current characteristic curves for overcurrent protection devices.
g.
Nameplate designations.
16436 - 1
D.
E.
3.
Submit factory and site acceptance test procedures for review 30 days prior to tests.
Include a detailed description of all tests to be performed.
4.
Submit copies of certified factory test reports for review.
5.
Submit the results of the site tests for review.
Certification of Ratings
1.
The manufacturer of the switchgear shall be completely and solely responsible for
the performance of the load-interrupter switch and fault interrupter or fuse
components as well as the complete integrated assembly as rated.
2.
The manufacturer shall furnish certification of ratings of the load-interrupter switch,
fault interrupter, fuse components, and the integrated switchgear assembly
consisting of switches, fault interrupters, and fuse components in combination with
the gas-tight tank and enclosure.
Compliance with Standards and Codes
The switchgear shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the following
standards and codes:
F.
1.
The applicable portions of ANSI C57.12.28, covering enclosure integrity for padmounted equipment.
2.
The applicable portions of ANSI C37.71, ANSI C37.72, ANSI C37.73, IEC 56, and
IEC 265-1 (Class A), which specify test procedures and sequences for the loadinterrupter switches, fault interrupters, fuse components, and the complete
switchgear assembly.
3.
The applicable portions of IEC 298, Appendix AA covering arc resistance, through
12.5 kA for 15 cycles.
4.
Article 490.21(e) in the National Electrical Code, which specifies that the
interrupter switches in combination with power fuses shall safely withstand the
effects of closing, carrying, and interrupting all possible currents up to the assigned
maximum short-circuit rating.
5.
All portions of ANSI, IEEE, and NEMA standards applicable to the basic switch
and fuse components.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 019310. The
manual shall describe the equipment in full and shall include the following major items:
16436 - 2
G.
1.
Operating instructions and start-up procedures including receiving and installation
requirements.
2.
Maintenance instructions listing preventive and corrective maintenance procedures.
Corrective maintenance procedures shall identify the most probable failures and the
appropriate repairs. Reference test measurement levels to specific test points on the
installed equipment.
3.
Provide spare parts data for each item of material and equipment specified. The data
shall include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and
source of supply. Provide a list and itemized price breakdown of spare parts
recommended for stocking. The parts selected shall be those that, in the
manufacturer's judgment, will be involved in the majority of maintenance problems.
4.
Control schematics, ladder diagrams, and interconnection drawings.
5.
Catalog cuts and technical manuals for components of the system.
6.
Copy of guarantees and warranties issued for the various items of equipment,
showing all dates of expiration.
7.
Copies of test results.
8.
Final copies of shop drawings, incorporating manufacturing and field changes.
Manufacturer's Services
Provide equipment manufacturer's services at the jobsite for the minimum labor days
listed below, travel time excluded:
1.
Two labor days to check the installation and calibration and advise during start-up.
2.
One labor day to instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of
the equipment.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
A.
General
1.
Major components shall be of the same manufacture as the pad-mounted switchgear.
2.
Design the switchgear for operation on a 5-kV, 3-phase, solidly grounded, 60-hertz
system.
3.
Switchgear shall be capable of operating under the following environmental
conditions:
a.
Ambient temperature from -30°C to 40°C.
16436 - 3
b.
4.
B.
At elevations up to 3300 feet.
Switchgear shall comply with Section 16050.
Pad-Mounted Switchgear
1.
Construction:
a.
The pad-mounted gear (191-JS-1 and 191-JS-2) shall be in accordance with
the one-line diagram, and shall conform to the following specification.
b.
The pad-mounted gear shall consist of a single self-supporting enclosure,
containing interrupter switches and power fuses with the necessary accessory
components, all completely factory-assembled and operationally checked. The
interrupter switches and fuses shall be enclosed within an inner grounded steel
compartment for electrical isolation and for protection from contamination.
Switch terminals shall be equipped with bushings rated 600 amperes
continuous, and fuse terminals and bus terminals shall be equipped with
bushing wells rated 200 amperes continuous to provide for elbow connection.
Bushings and bushing wells shall be mounted on the walls of the inner
compartment and shall extend into termination compartments. Termination
compartments shall be provided as follows: one for each three-phase switch,
one for each three-phase set of fuses, and one for each three-phase set of bus
terminals.
c.
Ratings
The ratings for the integrated pad-mounted gear shall be as designated below.
Kv. Nominal
5
Kv, BIL
60
Main Bus Continuous, Amperes
Three-Pole Interrupter Switches
Continuous, Amperes
Load Dropping, Amperes
Two-Time Duty-Cycle FaultClosing Rms Asymmetrical
Fuses Maximum, Amperes
Short-Circuit Ratings
Amperes Rms Symmetrical
16436 - 4
600
600
400
25,000
200E
12,500
The momentary and two-time duty-cycle fault-closing ratings of switches,
momentary rating of bus, and interrupting ratings of fuses shall equal or
exceed the short-circuit ratings of the pad-mounted gear.
d.
Manufacturers
The pad mounted gear shall be manufactured by Square ‘D’, S&C Electric
Company, PME Series, or equal.
e.
Insulators
The interrupter-switch and fuse-mounting insulators shall be of a
cycloaliphatic epoxy resin system with characteristics and restrictions as
follows:
(1) Operating experience of at least 15 years under similar conditions.
(2) Adequate leakage distance established by test per IEC Publication 507,
First Edition, 1975.
(3) Adequate strength for short-circuit stress established by test.
(4) Conformance with applicable ANSI standards.
(5) Homogeneity of the cycloaliphatic epoxy resin throughout each insulator to
provide maximum resistance to power arcs. Ablation due to high
temperatures from power arcs shall continuously expose more material
of the same composition and properties so that no change in mechanical
or electrical characteristics takes place because of arc-induced ablation.
Furthermore, any surface damage to insulators during installation or
maintenance of the pad-mounted gear shall expose material of the same
composition and properties so that insulators with minor surface damage
need not be replaced.
f.
High-Voltage Bus
(1) Bus and interconnections shall consist of aluminum bar of 56% IACS
conductivity.
(2) Bus and interconnections shall withstand the stresses associated with shortcircuit currents up through the maximum rating of the pad-mounted
gear.
(3) Bolted aluminum-to-aluminum connections shall be made with a suitable
number of galvanized steel bolts and with tow Belleville spring washers
per bolt, one under the bolt head and one under the nut. Bolts shall be
tightened to 50 foot-pounds torque.
16436 - 5
(4) Before installation of the bus, all electrical contact surfaces shall first be
prepared by machine abrading to remove any aluminum-oxide film.
Immediately after this operation, the electrical contact surfaces shall be
coated with a uniform coating of an oxide inhibitor and sealant.
(5) Tie bus, where furnished, shall consist of continuous, one-piece sections of
aluminum bar with no intermediate splices. Flexible braid or cable shall
not be used.
g.
Provisions for Grounding
(1) A ground-connection pad shall be provided in each termination
compartment of the pad-mounted gear.
(2) The ground-connection pad shall be constructed of 1/4” thick steel, which
shall be nickel plated and welded to the enclosure, and shall have a
short-circuit rating equal to that of the pad-mounted gear.
(3) Ground-connection pads shall be coated with a uniform coating of an oxide
inhibitor and sealant prior to shipment.
(4) A 3/8” diameter copper rod connected to the ground-connection pad shall
be provided in each termination compartment for switches and each
termination compartment for bus. The rod shall extend across the full
width of each compartment to allow convenient grounding of cable
concentric neutrals and accessories, and shall have a short-circuit rating
equal to that of the pad-mounted gear.
(5) Continuous copper ground bus shall be provided across the full width of
each termination compartment for fuses. For each fuse mounting, there
shall be a ground ring made of 3/8” diameter copper rod bolted to the
ground bus and placed to allow convenient grounding of cable
concentric neutrals and accessories. Ground rings and bus shall have a
short-circuit rating equal to that of the pad-mounted gear.
h.
Bushings and Bushing Wells
(1) Bushings and bushing wells shall conform to ANSI/IEEE Standard 386
(ANSI Standard C119.2).
(2) Bushings and bushing wells shall be a cycloaliphatic epoxy resin system
with characteristics and restrictions as follows:
(a)
Operating experience of at least 10 years under similar
conditions.
(b)
Adequate leakage distance for in-air application established
by test per IEC Publication 507, First Edition, 1975.
16436 - 6
(c)
Adequate strength for short-circuit stress established by test.
(d)
Conformance with applicable ANSI standards.
(e)
Homogeneity of the cycloaliphatic epoxy resin throughout
each bushing or bushing well to provide maximum
resistance to power arcs. Ablation due to high temperatures
from power arcs shall continuously expose more material of
the same composition and properties so that no change in
mechanical or electrical characteristics takes place because
of arc-induced ablation.
(3) Bushings and bushing wells shall be mounted in such a way that the
semiconductive coating is solidly grounded to the enclosure.
(4) Bushings rated 600 amperes continuous shall have a removable threaded
stud so that the bushings are compatible with all 600-ampere elbow
systems – those requiring a threaded stud as well as those that do not.
i.
Termination Compartments
(1) Termination compartments for switches shall have bushings, and
termination compartments for fuses shall have bushing wells to permit
connection of elbows. The bushings and bushing wells shall be mounted
on the interior walls at a minimum height of 33 inches above the
enclosure base.
(2) Termination compartments for bus shall have bushing wells to permit
connection of elbows. The bushing wells shall be mounted on the
interior walls at a minimum height of 25 inches above the enclosure
base.
(3) Termination compartments for bushings rated 600 amperes continuous
shall be of an adequate depth to accommodate two 600-ampere elbows
mounted piggyback, encapsulated surge arresters or grounding elbows
mounted on 600-ampere elbows having 200-ampere interfaces, or other
similar accessory combinations without the need for an enclosure
extension.
(4) Termination compartments for bushing wells rated 200 amperes continuous
shall be of an adequate depth to accommodate 200-ampere elbows
mounted on portable feedthroughs or standoff insulators, or other similar
accessory combinations without the need for an enclosure extension.
(5) Termination compartments shall be provided with one parking stand for
each bushing or bushing well. The parking stand shall be located
immediately adjacent to the associated bushing or bushing well and shall
16436 - 7
accommodate standard feedthroughs and standoff insulators, and other
similar accessories.
(6) Each termination compartment for a switch shall be equipped with a
viewing window to allow visual inspection of interrupter switch blades
to allow positive verification of switch position.
(7) Each termination compartment for a set of fuses shall be equipped with a
set of viewing windows to allow visual inspection of blown-fuse
indicators.
j.
Low-Voltage Components
(1) All low-voltage components, including stored-energy operators and sourcetransfer control, shall be located in a grounded, steel-enclosed
compartment separate from high voltage to provide isolation and shall
be arranged to allow complete accessibility for test and/or maintenance
without exposure to high voltage.
(2) Low-voltage wiring, except for short lengths such as at terminal blocks and
the secondaries of sensing devices, shall be in grounded conduit or
raceways where necessary for isolation from high voltage.
2.
Construction-Enclosure Including Outdoor Finish
a.
Enclosure Design
(1) To ensure a completely coordinated design, the pad-mounted gear shall be
constructed in accordance with the minimum construction
specifications of the fuse and/or switch manufacturer to provide
adequate electrical clearances.
(2) In establishing the requirements for the enclosure design, consideration
shall be given to all relevant factors such as controlled access, tamper
resistance, corrosion resistance, and resistance to entry of foliage,
animals, and airborne contaminants.
(3) The pad-mounted gear enclosure shall be of unitized monocoque (not
structural-frame-and-bolt-sheet) construction to maximize strength,
minimize weight, and inhibit corrosion.
(4) The basic material shall be 11-gauge hot-rolled, pickled and oiled steel
sheet.
(5) A separate grounded, steel-enclosed low-voltage control compartment shall
be provided for the source-transfer control and stored-energy operators
in switchgear 191-JS-1.
16436 - 8
(6) All structural joints and butt joints shall be welded, and the external seams
shall be ground flush and smooth. The gas-metal-arc welding process
shall be employed to eliminate alkaline residues and to minimize
distortion and spatter.
(7) To guard against unauthorized or inadvertent entry, enclosure construction
shall not utilize any externally accessible hardware.
(8) The base shall consist of continuous 90-degree flanges, turned inward and
welded at the corners, for bolting to the concrete pad.
(9) The door openings shall have 90-degree flanges, facing outward, that shall
provide strength and rigidity as well as deep overlapping between
doors and door openings to guard against water entry. Flanges at door
openings of the low-voltage control compartment shall be provided
with resilient compression gasketing around the entire door opening,
and shall provide strength and rigidity for effective compression of the
gasketing to prevent water entry.
(10)
Gasketing between the roof and the enclosure shall guard against entry
of water and airborne contaminants and shall discourage tampering or
insertion of foreign objects.
(11)
A heavy coat of insulating “no-drip” compound shall be applied to the
inside surface of the roof to minimize condensation of moisture
thereon.
(12)
An internal steel-enclosed compartment shall encase the interrupter
switches and fuses for electrical isolation and protection from
contamination. The compartment shall have a galvanized steel sheet
floor to exclude foliage and animals. The floor shall have screened
drain vents to allow drainage if the enclosure is flooded. The top of
this compartment shall be gasketed to provide sealing with the
enclosure roof.
(13)
Insulating barriers of NEMA GPO3-grade fiberglass-reinforced
polyester shall be provided for each interrupter switch where required
to achieve BIL ratings.
(14)
Full-length steel barriers shall separate adjoining termination
compartments.
(15)
Lifting tabs shall be removable. Sockets for the lifting-tab bolts shall
be blind-tapped. A resilient material shall be placed between the
lifting tabs and the enclosure to help prevent corrosion by protecting
the finish against scratching by the tabs. To further preclude corrosion,
this material shall be closed-cell to prevent moisture from being
16436 - 9
absorbed and held between the tabs and the enclosure in the event that
lifting tabs are not removed.
(16)
b.
The enclosure shall be provided with an instruction manual holder.
Doors
(1) Doors shall be constructed of 11-gauge hot-rolled, pickled and oiled steel
sheet.
(2) Door-edge flanges shall overlap with door-opening flanges to discourage
tampering or insertion of foreign objects.
(3) Doors shall have a minimum of two extruded-aluminum hinges with
stainless-steel hinge pins, and interlocking extruded-aluminum hinge
supports for the full length of the door to provide strength, security,
and corrosion resistance. Mounting hardware shall be stainless steel or
zinc-nickel-plated steel, and shall not be externally accessible to guard
against tampering.
(4) Doors shall be hinged at the sides to swing open with minimum effort.
Doors hinged at the top requiring significant effort to lift open shall
not be allowed.
(5) In consideration of controlled access and tamper resistance, each door (or
set of double doors) shall be equipped with an automatic three-point
latching mechanism.
(a)
The latching mechanism shall be spring loaded, and shall
latch automatically when the door is closed. All latch points
shall latch at the same time to preclude partial latching.
(b)
A pentahead socket wrench or tool shall be required to
actuate the mechanism to unlatch the door and, in the same
motion, recharge the spring for the next closing operation.
(c)
The latching mechanism shall have provisions for
padlocking that incorporate a means to protect the padlock
shackle from tampering and that shall be coordinated with
the latches such that:
(i)
It shall not be possible to unlatch the mechanism
until the padlock is removed.
(ii)
It shall not be possible to insert the padlock until
the mechanism is completely latched closed.
16436 - 10
(6) Doors providing access to solid-material power fuses shall have provisions
to store spare fuse units or refill units.
(7) Each door shall be provided with a zinc-nickel-plated steel door holder
located above the door opening. The holder shall be hidden from view
when the door is closed, and it shall not be possible for the holder to
swing inside the enclosure.
c.
Finish
(1) Full coverage at joints and blind areas shall be achieved by processing
enclosures independently of components such as doors and roofs
before assembly into the unitized structures.
(2) All exterior seams shall be filled and sanded smooth for neat appearance.
(3) To remove oils and dirt, to form a chemically and anodically neutral
conversion coating to improve the finish-to-metal bond, and to retard
underfilm propagation of corrosion, all surfaces shall undergo a
thorough pretreatment process comprised of a fully automated system
of cleaning, rinsing, phosphatizing, sealing, drying, and cooling before
any protective coatings are applied. By utilizing an automated
pretreatment process, the enclosure shall receive a highly consistent
thorough treatment, eliminating fluctuations in reaction time, reaction
temperature, and chemical concentrations.
(4) After pretreatment, protective coatings shall be applied that shall help resist
corrosion and protect the steel enclosure. To establish the capability to
resist corrosion and protect the enclosure, representative test
specimens coated by the enclosure manufacturer’s finishing system
shall satisfactorily pass the following tests:
(a)
4,000 hours of exposure to salt-spray testing per ASTM B
117 with
(i)
Underfilm corrosion not to extend more than 1/32”
from the scribe as evaluated per ASTM D 1645.
Procedure A. Method 2 (scraping); and
(ii)
Loss of adhesion from bare metal not to extend
more than 1/8” from the scribe.
(b)
1,000 hours of humidity testing per ASTM D 4585 using the
Cleveland Condensing Type Humidity Cabinet with no
blistering as evaluated per ASTM D 714.
(c)
500 hours of accelerated weathering testing per ASTM G 53
using lamp UVB-313 with no chalking as evaluated per
16436 - 11
ASTM D 523, and no more than 10% reduction of gloss as
evaluated per ASTM D 523.
(d)
Crosshatch adhesion testing per ASTM D 3359 Method B
with no loss of finish.
(e)
160-inch-pound impact adhesion testing per ASTM D 2794
with no chipping or cracking.
(f)
Oil resistance testing consisting of 72-hour immersion bath
in mineral oil with no shift in color, no streaking, no
blistering, and no loss of hardness.
(g)
3,000 cycles of abrasion testing per ASTM 4060 with no
penetration to the substrate.
(5) Furnish certified test abstracts substantiating the above capabilities.
(6) After the finishing system has been properly applied and cured, welds
along the enclosure bottom flange shall be coated with a wax-based
anticorrosion moisture barrier to give these areas added corrosion
resistance.
(7) A resilient closed-cell material, such as PVC gasket, shall be applied to the
entire underside of the enclosure bottom flange to protect the finish on
this surface from scratching during handling and installation. This
material shall isolate the bottom flange from the alkalinity of a
concrete foundation to help protect against corrosive attack.
(8) After the enclosure is completely assembled and the components (switches,
fuses, bus, etc.) are installed, the finish shall be inspected for scuffs
and scratches. Blemishes shall be touched up by hand to restore the
protective integrity of the finish.
(9) The finish shall be olive green, Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5.
d.
3.
To guard against corrosion, all hardware (including door fittings, fasteners,
etc.), all operating-mechanism parts, and other parts subject to abrasive action
from mechanical motion shall be of either nonferrous materials, or galvanized
or zinc-nickel-plated ferrous materials. Cadmium-plated ferrous parts shall not
be used.
Basic Components
16436 - 12
a.
Interrupter Switches
(1) Interrupter switches shall be enclosed in an inner steel compartment and
shall be provided with bushings rated 600 amperes continuous to
permit connection of elbows external to the switch compartment.
(2) Interrupter switches shall have a two-time duty-cycle fault-closing rating
equal to or exceeding the short-circuit rating of the pad-mounted gear.
These ratings define the ability to close the interrupter switch twice
against a three-phase fault with asymmetrical current in at least one
phase equal to the rated value, with the switch remaining operable and
able to carry and interrupt rated current. Tests substantiating these
ratings shall be performed at maximum voltage with current applied
for at least 10 cycles. Furnish certified test abstracts establishing such
ratings.
(3) Interrupter switches shall be operated by means of an externally accessible
3/4” hex switch-operating hub. The switch-operating hub shall be
located within a recessed stainless-steel pocket mounted on the side of
the pad-mounted gear enclosure and shall accommodate a 3/4” deepsocket wrench or a 3/4” shallow-socket wrench with extension. The
switch-operating-hub pocket shall include a padlockable stainless-steel
access cover that shall incorporate a hood to protect the padlock
shackle from tampering. Stops shall be provided on the switchoperating hub to prevent overtravel and thereby guard against damage
to the interrupter switch quick-make quick-break mechanism. Labels
to indicate switch position shall be provided in the switch-operatinghub pocket.
(4) Each interrupter switch shall be provided with a folding switch-operating
handle. The switch-operating handle shall be secured to the inside of
the switch-operating-hub pocket by a brass chain. The folded handle
shall be stored behind the closed switch-operating-hub access cover.
(5) Interrupter switches shall utilize a quick-make quick-break mechanism
installed by the switch manufacturer. The quick-make quick-break
mechanism shall be integrally mounted on the switch frame, and shall
swiftly and positively open and close the interrupter switch
independent of the switch-operating-hub speed.
(6) Each interrupter switch shall be completely assembled and adjusted by the
switch manufacturer on a single rigid mounting frame. The frame shall
be of welded steel construction such that the frame intercepts the
leakage path which parallels the open gap of the interrupter switch to
positively isolate the load circuit when the interrupter switch is in the
open position.
16436 - 13
(7) Interrupter switch contacts shall be backed up by stainless-steel springs to
provide constant high contact pressure.
(8) Interrupter switches shall be provided with a single blade per phase for
circuit closing including fault closing, continuous current carrying,
and circuit interrupting. Spring-loaded auxiliary blades shall not be
permitted. Interrupter switch blade supports shall be permanently
molded in place in a unified insulated shaft constructed of the same
cycloaliphatic epoxy resin as the insulators.
(9) Circuit interruption shall be accomplished by use of an interrupter which is
positively and inherently sequenced with the blade position. It shall
not be possible for the blade and interrupter to get out of sequence.
Circuit interruption shall take place completely within the interrupter,
with no external arc or flame. Any exhaust shall be vented in a
controlled manner through a deionizing vent.
b.
(10)
Key interlocks shall be provided to guard against opening the door of
the fuse-termination compartment unless all switches are locked open.
(11)
Mounting provisions shall be provided to accommodate one threephase fault indicator with three single-phase sensors in each switchtermination compartment.
(12)
Base-mounted distribution-class surge arresters, metal-oxide type
rated 18kV, shall be provided at all source switch terminals.
Fuses
(1) Solid-Material Power Fuses
(a)
Fuses shall be solid-material power fuses, and shall utilize
refill-unit-and-holder
or
fuse-unit-and-end-fitting
construction. The refill unit or fuse unit shall be readily
replaceable and low in cost.
(b)
Fusible elements shall be nonaging and nondamageable so
that is unnecessary to replace unblown companion fuses on
suspicion of damage following a fuse operation.
(c)
Fusible elements for refill units or fuse units rated 10
amperes or larger shall be helically coiled to avoid
mechanical damage due to stresses from current surges.
(d)
Fusible elements, that carry continuous current, shall be
supported in air to help prevent damage from current surges.
16436 - 14
(e)
Each refill unit or fuse unit shall have a single fusible
element to eliminate the possibility of unequal current
sharing in parallel current paths.
(f)
Solid-material power fuses shall have melting time-current
characteristics that are permanently accurate to within a
maximum total tolerance of 10% in terms of current. Timecurrent characteristics shall be available which permit
coordination with protective relays, automatic circuit
reclosers, and other fuses.
(g)
Solid-material power fuses shall be capable of detecting and
interrupting all faults whether large, medium, or small
(down to minimum melting current), under all realistic
conditions of circuitry, with line-to-line or line-to-ground
voltage across the fuse, and shall be capable of handling the
full range of transient recovery voltage severity associated
with these faults.
(h)
All arcing accompanying operation of solid-material power
fuses shall be contained within the fuse, and all arc products
and gases evolved shall be effectively contained within the
exhaust control device during fuse operation.
(i)
Solid-material power fuses shall be equipped with a blownfuse indicator that shall provide visible evidence of fuse
operation while installed in the fuse mounting.
(2) Fuse mountings shall be enclosed in an inner steel compartment and shall
be provided with bushing wells rated 200 amperes continuous for
elbow connection.
(a)
Each fuse mounting shall be an integral part of a fuse
handling mechanism that does not allow access to the fuse
until the elbow for that fuse has been disconnected. To gain
access to a fuse it shall be necessary to:
(i)
Disconnect the elbow for that fuse and move it to
the appropriate parking stand.
(ii)
Actuate a mechanical interlock to unlock the
fuse-access panel. It must not be possible to
disengage this interlock before the elbow is
moved.
(iii)
Unlatch and then pivot the fuse-access panel to
electrically isolate the fuse so that it can be
16436 - 15
removed from the fuse mounting with a shotgun
stick.
(b)
The opening into the component compartment shall be
covered by the fuse-access panel in both the open and
closed positions to help prevent inadvertent access to high
voltage.
(c)
To protect the fuse-handling mechanism from corrosion, all
mechanism parts shall be painted or made of corrosionresistant materials, or otherwise be protected from
corrosion. All latches and pivots shall be stainless steel or
zinc-nickel-plated steel with nylon or plastic bushings.
(d)
Cable guides shall be provided in each termination
compartment for a set of fuses, to prevent cables from
interfering with rotation of the fuse-access panel.
(3) A fuse-storage feature shall be provided in the interrupter-switch
compartment. Each fuse-storage feature shall provide space for storing
three spare fuse holders or fuse units with end fittings for solidmaterial power fuses.
c.
Stored-Energy Operators (191-JS-1 only)
(1) Stored-energy operators shall be provided to operate the high-voltage
source interrupter switches. They shall be motor charged with solenoid
trip-open and solenoid trip-closed operation.
(2) Stored-energy operators shall be equipped with an integral quick-make
quick-break mechanism installed by the switch manufacturer, which
shall store sufficient mechanical energy to open or close the associated
interrupter switch. The quick-make quick-break mechanism shall
swiftly and positively open and close the source interrupter switch
independent of the speed of the charging motor or manual handle.
(3) Stored-energy operators shall be equipped with tripping solenoids to
release the stored energy to open or close the associated source
interrupter switch in response to a control signal.
(4) Stored-energy operators shall be equipped with a charging motor that shall
charge the quick-make quick-break mechanism after each trip
operation when voltage is present on the associated source.
(5) Pushbuttons shall be provided to permit local electrical trip-open and tripclosed operation. Local electrical operation shall be prevented when
the source-transfer control is in the automatic mode.
16436 - 16
(6) Stored-energy operators shall be provided with an operation selector that
shall have the following three positions:
(a)
An operating position – when in this position, permits
mechanical or electrical opening or closing of the source
interrupter switch.
(b)
A lock position – when padlocked in this position, prevents
all mechanical and electrical operation.
(c)
A charging position – when in this position, permits manual
charging of the quick-make quick-break mechanism while
prohibiting mechanical and electrical operation.
(7) Stored-energy operators shall be provided with a charging shaft and a
removable manual charging handle to allow manual charging of the
quick-make quick-break mechanism in the event control power is lost.
The manual charging shaft shall be accessible only when the operation
selector is in the “charging” position.
(8) Stored-energy operator shall be equipped with provisions for local
mechanical trip-open and trip-closed operation in the event control
power is lost.
(9) Stored-energy operators shall be located in a grounded, steel-enclosed lowvoltage control compartment. The control compartment shall provide
complete isolation from high voltage to help protect operating
personnel.
(10)
Stored-energy operators shall be equipped with indicators to show
whether the quick-make quick-break mechanism is charged or
discharged; whether the associated source interrupter switch is in the
open or closed position; and whether the stored-energy operator is in
the switch-open or switch-closed position.
(11)
Each stored-energy operator shall be equipped with an operation
counter.
16436 - 17
d.
(12)
Stored-energy operators shall be provided with a decoupling feature to
permit decoupling of the stored-energy operator from the associated
source interrupter switch for testing and exercising of the storedenergy operator and source-transfer control without opening or closing
the interrupter switch and without exposure to high voltage. A tool
shall not be required for decoupling or coupling the switch and switch
operator. An indicator shall be provided to show whether the operator
is coupled or decoupled. When the stored-energy operator is
decoupled, the associated source interrupter switch shall be locked in
the position it was in at the time of decoupling. It shall not be possible
to recouple the stored-energy operator to the source interrupter switch
unless the stored-energy operator is in the same position (open or
closed) as the source interrupter switch.
(13)
Mechanical cable interlocks shall be provided between each storedenergy operator and the associated switch-compartment door to
prevent operation of the source interrupter switch when the associated
compartment door is open.
Source-Transfer Control (191-JS-1 only)
(1) Operating Description
(a)
Transfer on Loss and Return of Source Voltage
(i)
The source-transfer control shall utilize the
common-bus primary-selective system. The
normal condition shall be with one source
interrupter switch for the preferred source, as
field programmed, closed to energize the highvoltage bus, and with the other source interrupter
switch for the alternate source open with its
associated circuit available as a standby. The
control shall monitor the conditions of both
power sources and shall initiate automatic
switching when the preferred-source voltage has
been lost or reduced to a predetermined level for
a period of time sufficient to confirm that the
loss is not transient. Automatic switching shall
open the preferred-source interrupter switch and
then close the alternate-source interrupter switch
to restore power to the high-voltage bus.
(ii)
When normal voltage returns to the preferred
source for a preset time, the control shall initiate
retransfer to the preferred source if in the
automatic return mode, or await manual
16436 - 18
retransfer if in the hold return mode. In the hold
return mode, if the alternate source fails and the
preferred source has been restored, the control
shall initiate automatic retransfer to the preferred
source.
(iii)
(b)
In the automatic return mode, the control shall
provide open transition (non-paralleling) on
retransfer.
Transfer on Unbalance Condition
(i)
A field programmable unbalance detection
feature shall initiate automatic switching on
detection of source-side open-phase conditions at
the same system voltage level as the padmounted gear, whether caused by utility-line
burndown, broken conductors, single-phase
switching, equipment malfunctions, or singlephasing resulting from blown source-side fuses.
The control shall continuously develop and
monitor the negative-sequence voltage to detect
any unbalance present as a result of an openphase condition. Automatic switching shall occur
when the system unbalance exceeds a
predetermined unbalance-detect voltage for a
period of time sufficient to confirm that the
condition is not transient.
(ii)
When normal phase voltages return to the
preferred source, the control shall initiate
retransfer to the preferred source as described
above.
(2) Control Features
(a)
The operating characteristics of the source-transfer control
and its voltage-, current-, and time-related operating
parameters shall be field programmable and entered into the
control by means of a keypad. To simplify entry of this
information, a menu arrangement shall be utilized including
keys dedicated to the operating characteristics and to each of
the operating parameters. Entry of an access code shall be
necessary before any operating characteristic or operating
parameter can be changed.
16436 - 19
(b)
All operating characteristics and operating parameters shall
be available for review on a liquid-crystal display with
backlighting.
(c)
Light-emitting diode lamps shall be furnished for indicating
the presence of acceptable voltage on each high-voltage
source.
(d)
A light-emitting diode lamp shall be furnished for indicating
that both stored-energy operators are coupled to their
respective interrupter switches and in the correct positions,
the control is in the automatic mode, the operation selector
for each stored-energy operator is in the operating position,
and all control circuitry is properly connected for automatic
transfer. The display specified in (b) above, when not being
used to show menu information, shall show messages
explaining why this lamp is not lighted.
(e)
A selector switch shall be furnished for choosing manual or
automatic operating mode. In the manual mode, local
electrical trip-open and trip-closed operation by means of
pushbuttons shall be enabled while automatic switching
shall be inhibited.
(f)
Test keys shall be furnished for simulating loss of voltage
on each of the two sources, as well as for checking the
functioning of the lamps, display, and keypad.
(g)
The control shall include built-in diagnostics for analyzing
system events. The device shall automatically record system
status and source-transfer control status every time a control
operation occurs. All such operations shall be indicated by
the illumination of a light-emitting diode lamp and shall be
available for display by means of a dedicated event key.
(h)
The present source voltage and current inputs, and the
present status of discrete inputs to and outputs from the
control shall be available for display by means of a
dedicated examine key.
(i)
The control shall have the capability to automatically
calibrate to a known voltage on each source. This capability
shall be keypad selectable.
(3) Construction Features
(a)
The source-transfer control shall use an advanced
microprocessor and other solid-state electronic components
16436 - 20
for use in power equipment. All components shall be
soldered on printed circuit boards to minimize the number
of interconnections for increased reliability.
(b)
All interconnecting-cable connector pins and receptacle
contacts shall be gold-over-nickel plated to minimize
contact pressure.
(c)
The surge withstand capability of the control shall be
verified by subjecting the device to both the ANSI Surge
Withstand Capability Test (ANSI Standard C37.90.1) and to
a 5-kV, 3.75-joule capacitive-discharge test. For the
capacitive-discharge test, a suitable capacitor shall be
charged to 5 kV, and shall then be used to discharge 3.75
joules into each input circuit and each output circuit of the
device.
(d)
To identify and eliminate components that might be prone to
early failure, the control shall be subjected to a dielectric
test, a functional check, and a 72-hour screening test
followed by a second functional check. For the screening
test, the device shall be energized at rated control voltage
while subjected to a maximum-design operating temperature
of +70°C for 24 hours, followed by 48 hours during which
the temperature is cycled repeatedly between -40°C and
+70°C.
(e)
The control shall be located in the grounded, steel-enclosed
low-voltage compartment with the stored-energy operators.
The control compartment shall provide isolation from high
voltage.
(4) Voltage Sensing and Control Power
(a)
Voltage sensing and control power shall be provided by
three capacitively coupled voltage sensors on the line side of
each source interrupter switch.
(b)
To maximize usable cable-training space within the padmounted gear, the voltage sensors shall directly replace the
lower apparatus insulators of the source interrupter
switches. The voltage sensors shall be constant-currentoutput devices that do not require primary fuses.
(c)
The output of the voltage sensors shall be directly
proportional to line-to-ground voltage and shall have relay
accuracy over an ambient temperature range of -40°F to
+160°F.
16436 - 21
(d)
Each voltage sensor shall be equipped with a secondary-side
protective device to prevent damage to the voltage sensor in
the event that the secondary circuit is inadvertently opened
or the burden is removed.
(5) An overcurrent-lockout feature shall be provided to prevent an automatic
transfer operation that would close a source interrupter switch into a
fault. The feature shall include a light-emitting diode lamp for
indicating when a lockout condition has occurred, a reset key for
manually resetting the lockout condition, and three current sensors for
each source. Provisions shall be furnished for manually resetting the
overcurrent-lockout feature from a remote location. Test keys shall be
provided for simulating an overcurrent condition on each source.
(6) Remote-indication provisions shall be provided to permit remote
monitoring of the presence or absence of preferred- and alternatesource voltage; the operating mode of the source-transfer control (i.e.,
automatic or manual); and the status of the indicating lamp furnished
in (2)(d) above, the indicating lamp furnished in (2)(g) above, and
overcurrent lockout.
(7) A test panel shall be provided to permit the use of an external, adjustable
three-phase source to verify, through independent measurement, the
response of the control to loss-of-source, phase-unbalance, and
overcurrent-lockout conditions.
(8) Supervisory control provisions shall be provided to permit switch operation
from a remote location.
4.
Labeling
a.
Hazard-Alerting Signs
(1) All external doors shall be provided with “Warning—Keep Out–Hazardous
Voltage Inside—Can Shock, Burn, or Cause Death” signs.
(2) The inside of each door shall be provided with a “Danger—Hazardous
Voltage—Failure to Follow These Instructions Will Likely Cause
Shock, Burns, or Death” signs. The text shall further indicate that
operating personnel must know and obey the employer’s work rules,
know the hazards involved, and use proper protective equipment and
tools to work on this equipment.
(3) Termination compartments shall be provided with “Danger—Keep
Away—Hazardous Voltage—Will Shock, Burn, or Cause Death”
signs.
16436 - 22
b.
Nameplates, Ratings Labels, and Connection Diagrams
(1) The outside of each door (or set of double doors) shall be provided with a
nameplate indicating the manufacturer’s name, catalog number, model
number, date of manufacture, and serial number.
(2) The inside of each door (or set of double doors) shall be provided with a
ratings label indicating the following: voltage ratings; main bus
continuous rating; short-circuit ratings (amperes rms symmetrical and
Mva three-phase symmetrical at rated nominal voltage); the type of
fuse and its maximum ampere rating; and interrupter switch ratings
including duty-cycle fault-closing and short-time (momentary,
amperes rms symmetrical and one-second, amperes rums
symmetrical).
(3) A three-line connection diagram showing interrupter switches, fuses, and
bus along with the manufacturer’s model number shall be provided on
the inside of each door (or set of double doors), and on the inside of
each switch-operating-hub access cover.
5.
Accessories
End fittings or holders, and fuse units, refill units, or interrupting modules and
control modules for original installation, as well as one spare fuse unit, refill unit, or
interrupting module for each fuse mounting shall be furnished.
C.
Factory Tests
Test and inspect equipment in conformance with NEMA SG-6 and ANSI C37.20.2. The
tests shall verify the physical configuration of assembly and workmanship, the mechanical
adjustments of parts and components, and the sequencing and functional operations of
control systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
Installation
Secure switchgear rigidly to floors on mounting pads with anchor bolts or Phillips Drill
Company concrete anchors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Doors shall
open and close freely. Repair any damage to the enclosure, components, or finish.
16436 - 23
B.
Site Tests
Test the operation of the switchgear and demonstrate that all switches, protective, and
control devices function properly. Perform required adjustments as required for correct
operation.
C.
Training
Provide instruction on (2) 8-hour working shifts to accommodate the Owner’s personnel
schedule.
END OF SECTION
16436 - 24
SECTION 16440
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following:
1.
Power distribution panelboards.
2.
Lighting panelboards.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering
the items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include:
1.
Manufacturer's product data on panelboards and enclosures.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
1.
UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 67, "Electric
Panelboards," and UL's 50, 869, 486A, 486B, and 1053 pertaining to panelboards,
accessories, and enclosures. Provide panelboard units which are UL listed and
labeled.
2.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Standards Pub/No. 250, "Enclosures
for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum)," Pub/No. PB 1, "Panelboards,"
and Pub/No. PB 1.1, "Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less."
3.
Federal Specification Compliance: Comply with FS W-P-115, "Power
Distribution Panel," pertaining to panelboards and accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering products
which may be incorporated in Work include:
16440-1
1.
Square-D.
2.
Eaton/Cutler Hammer.
2.02 PANELBOARDS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures, and ancillary
components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's
standard materials; with design and construction in accordance with published product
information. Equip with proper number of unit panelboard devices as required for
complete installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply with
NEC, UL, and established industry standards for those applications indicated.
B. Power Distribution Panelboards: Provide dead-front safety type power distribution
panelboards as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in
quantities, ratings, and types shown; with anti-turn solderless pressure type main lug
connectors approved for use with copper conductors. Select unit with feeders
connecting at top of panel. Equip with tin-plated aluminum, or silver- or tin-plated
copper bus bars braced for 50,000 rms symmetrical amperes fault current, and with
full-sized neutral bus; provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders
requiring neutral connections. Provide as indicated, either molded-case bolt-on main
and branch circuit breakers for each circuit with toggle handles that indicate when
tripped, or bolt-on fusible switches for main and branch circuits. Where multiple pole
breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all
poles simultaneously. Provide panelboards with bare uninsulated grounding bars
suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer
as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards.
C. Lighting Panelboards: Provide dead-front safety type lighting and appliance
panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings,
and types shown; with anti-turn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for
use with copper conductors. Construct unit for connecting feeders at top of panel;
equip with copper bus bars, full-sized neutral bar with bolt-in type heavy-duty, quickmake quick-break, single pole circuit breakers, and toggle handles that indicate when
tripped. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required and
provide bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select
enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate and match
properly with panelboards. Panelboards and circuit breakers shall be braced for 22,000
rms symmetrical amperes fault current unless otherwise indicated.
D. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide 316 stainless steel cabinet type enclosures, in sizes
and NEMA types as needed and specified, code gauge, minimum 16-gauge thickness.
Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with adjustable
trim clamps and doors with flush locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed
alike, with concealed piano door hinges and door swings as indicated. Equip with
16440-2
interior circuit directory frame and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray
enamel finish over a rust-inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for recessed or surface
mounting as indicated. Provide enclosures which are fabricated by same manufacturer
as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards to be enclosed.
1.
Interior Conditioned Space: NEMA 1 – 316 stainless steel.
2.
Interior Process Areas: NEMA 4X -316 stainless steel
3.
Exterior: NEMA 4X -316 stainless steel.
4.
Corrosive Areas: NEMA 4X – 316 stainless steel.
E. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory assembled, molded-case circuit
breakers of frame sizes, characteristics, and ratings, including rms symmetrical
interrupting ratings indicated. Select breakers with permanent thermal and
instantaneous magnetic trip, and with fault-current limiting protection, ampere ratings
as indicated. Construct with overcenter, trip-free, toggle type operating mechanisms
with quick-make quick-break action and positive handle trip indication. Construct
breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position, and operating in an
ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type
removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated.
F.
Ground Fault Protected Breakers: Provide UL Class A protected GFI breakers with 6
mA for personnel protection, and for general-purpose receptacles. For breakers
dedicated to equipment (sump pumps, heat trace, etc.), provide breaker with 30 mA
equipment protection.
G. Accessories: Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily
limited to, ground-fault protection units or circuit breaker locking hardware as
indicated.
H. Spares: In each panelboard provide eight (8) installed, single pole, 20A spare circuit
breakers unless otherwise indicated. Provide one spare circuit breaker of each type and
size uninstalled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS
A. Type out panelboard's circuit directory card upon completion of installation Work.
END OF SECTION
16440-3
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES
A.
The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:
1.
2.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
1.
1.03
American National Standards Institute (ANSI): C2, National Electrical
Safety Code (NESC).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code
(NEC).
Product Data:
a.
Exothermic weld connectors.
b.
Mechanical connectors.
c.
Compression connectors.
UL COMPLIANCE
A.
Materials manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall conform
to UL Standards and have an applied UL listing mark.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
GROUND ROD
A.
Material: Copper clad.
B.
Diameter: Minimum 3/4 inch.
C.
Length: 20 feet.
GROUND CONDUCTORS
A.
As specified in Section 16120, CONDUCTORS.
16450-1
2.03
CONNECTORS
A.
Exothermic Weld Type:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Mechanical Type: Split-bolt, saddle, or cone screw type; copper alloy material.
1.
2.04
Outdoor Weld: Suitable for exposure to elements or direct burial.
Indoor Weld: Utilize low-smoke, low-emission process.
Manufacturers:
a.
Erico Products, Inc.; Cadweld amd Cadweld Exolon.
b.
Thermoweld.
c.
Or equal.
Manufacturers:
a.
Burndy Corp.
b.
Thomas and Betts Co.
c.
Or equal.
GROUNDING WELLS
A.
Ground rod box complete with cast iron riser ring and traffic cover marked
GROUND ROD.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Christy Co.; No. G5.
Lightning and Grounding Systems, Inc.; I-R Series.
Or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Grounding shall be in compliance with NFPA 70 and ANSI C2.
B.
Ground electrical service neutral at service entrance equipment to supplementary
grounding electrodes.
C.
Ground each separately derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded
building structural steel member or separate grounding electrode.
D.
Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceways, ground
16450-2
conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connections, and metal
piping systems.
E.
Shielded Power Cables: Ground shields at each splice or termination in
accordance with recommendations of splice or termination manufacturer.
F.
Shielded Control Cables:
1.
2.
3.
G.
3.02
3.03
Ground shield to ground bus at power supply for analog signal.
Expose shield minimum I inch at termination to field instrument and apply
heat shrink tube.
Do not ground control cable shield at more than one point.
Mechanical type connections will be allowed in applications where exothermic
type connections are not practical.
WIRE CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground Conductors: Install in conduit containing power conductors and control
circuits above 50 volts.
B.
Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install an equipment grounding
conductor connected at both ends to non current-carrying grounding bus.
C.
Connect ground conductors to raceway grounding bushings.
D.
Extend and connect ground conductors to ground bus in all equipment containing
a ground bus.
E.
Connect enclosure of equipment containing ground bus to that bus.
F.
Bolt connections to equipment ground bus.
G.
Bond grounding conductors to metallic enclosures at each end, and to
intermediate metallic enclosures.
H.
Junction Boxes: Furnish materials and connect to equipment grounding system
with grounding clips mounted directly on box, or with 3/8-inch machine screws.
MOTOR GROUNDING
A.
Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install an equipment grounding
conductor connected at both ends to non current-carrying grounding bus.
16450-3
3.04
3.05
3.06
GROUND RODS
A.
Install full length with conductor connection at upper end.
B.
Install with connection point below finished grade, unless otherwise shown.
GROUNDING WELLS
A.
Install inside buildings, asphalt, and paved areas.
B.
Install riser ring and cover flush with surface.
C.
Place 9 inches crushed rock in bottom of each well.
CONNECTIONS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Exothermic Weld Type:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Above grade Connections: Use either exothermic weld or mechanical-type
connectors; or brazing.
Below grade Connections: Install exothermic weld connectors unless
otherwise noted.
Remove paint, dirt, or other surface coverings at connection points to
allow good metal-to-metal contact.
Notify ENGINEER prior to backfilling ground connections.
Wire brush or file contact point to bare metal surface.
Use welding cartridges and molds in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
Avoid using badly worn molds.
Mold to be completely filled with metal when making welds.
After completed welds have cooled, brush slag from weld area and
thoroughly clean joint.
Mechanical Type:
1.
2.
3.
Apply homogeneous blend of colloidal copper and rust and corrosion
inhibitor before making connection.
Install in accordance with connector manufacturer's recommendations.
Do not conceal mechanical connections.
16450-4
3.07
3.08
3.09
3.10
METAL STRUCTURE GROUNDING
A.
Ground metal sheathing and exposed metal vertical structural elements to
grounding system.
B.
Bond electrical equipment supported by metal platforms to the platforms.
C.
Provide electrical contact between metal frames and railings supporting
pushbutton stations, receptacles, and instrument cabinets, and raceways carrying
circuits to these devices.
MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE GROUNDING
A.
Install one ground rod inside each.
B.
Ground Rod Floor Protrusion: 4 to 6 inches above floor.
C.
Make connections of grounding conductors fully visible and accessible.
D.
Connect all non current-carrying metal parts, and any metallic raceway grounding
bushings to ground rod with No. 6 AWG copper conductor.
TRANSFORMER GROUNDING
A.
Bond neutrals of transformers within buildings to system ground network, and to
any additional indicated grounding electrodes.
B.
Bond neutrals of substation transformers to substation grounding grid and system
grounding network via neutral grounding resistor.
C.
Bond neutrals of pad-mounted transformers to four locally driven ground rods and
buried ground wire encircling transformer and system ground network.
SURGE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A.
3.11
Connect surge arrestor ground terminals to equipment ground bus.
INSTRUMENT GROUND - SURGE SUPPRESSION
A.
Connect all instrument surge protection with #6 insulated copper groundwire (in
conduit where above grade) to closest plant ground system
16450-5
3.12
BONDING
A.
Bond to Main Conductor System:
1.
2.
3.
3.13
B.
Bond steel columns or major framing members to grounding system per National
Electrical Code.
C.
Bond each main down conductor to grounding system.
GROUNDING SYSTEM
A.
Grounding Conductor (Counterpoise):
1.
2.
3.
Completely encircle building structure.
Bury minimum 30” below finished grade.
Minimum 2 feet distance from foundation walls.
B.
Interconnect ground rods by direct-buried copper cables.
C.
Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.14
All roof mounted ventilators, fans, air handlers, masts, flues, cooling
towers, handrails, and other sizeable metal objects.
Roof flashing, gravel stops, insulation vents, ridge vents, roof drains, soil
pipe vents, and other small metal objects if located within 6 feet of main
conductors or another grounded object.
Provide air terminals as required.
Install ground cables continuous between connections.
Exothermic welded connections to ground rods, cable trays, structural
steel, handrails, and buried and nonaccessible connections.
Provide bolted clamp type mechanical connectors for all exposed
secondary connections.
Use bolded offset parapet bases or through-roof concealed base assemblies
for air terminal connections.
Provide interconnections with electrical and telephone systems.
Provide electric service arrestor ground wire to building water main.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
As specified in Section 16950, ELECTRICAL TESTING.
B.
Ground test shall be witnessed by the RPR and shall be measured 5 ohms or less.
END OF SECTION
16450-6
SECTION 16461
PADMOUNTED TRANSFORMERS (2500 kVA and below)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SCOPE
A.
This specification shall cover mineral oil immersed three phase pad-mounted
transformers of low silhouette design, 1500 kVA, with ratings noted below or as
shown on the drawings.
B.
The equipment to be furnished shall be designed, built and tested in accordance
with the latest revision of all applicable standards of IEEE, NEMA, and ANSI.
Transformer shall be designed for outdoor application at altitudes not to exceed
3,300 feet, in an ambient not exceeding 50 degrees C and average ambient for any
24—hour period not exceeding 40 degrees C.
RATINGS
A.
The ratings of the transformer(s) shall be as follows or as shown on the drawings:
kVA:
1500
Frequency :
60
hertz
Impedance:
ANSI %
(+7.5% tolerance)
Primary Voltage:
As shown on drawings
∆
connected
Primary Taps:
+2~2 @ 2.5%
Primary BIL:
95 kV
Secondary Voltage: 480 volts Y connected
Secondary BIL:
30 kV
B.
The transformer shall carry its continuous rating with average winding or
temperature rise by resistance that shall not exceed 65 degrees C.
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
A.
The transformer tank and terminal compartment shall be bolted together to form
an integral unit of the outdoor weather—resistant type. The terminal compartment
shall be completely enclosed with one high voltage and one low voltage
compartment door. There shall be no bolts, screws, or other fastening devices
which are externally removable, with the exception of hexhead bolts for security,
that provide access to the energized parts within the enclosure. The enclosure
shall be tamper—resistant design meeting the requirements of ANSI C57.12.28 —
1988 “Pad-mounted Equipment — Enclosure Integrity for Switchgear and
Transformers”
16461-1
B.
Full height, air—filled incoming and outgoing terminal compartments with hinged
doors shall be located side by side, separated by an isolating barrier. The doors
shall be attached with stainless steel hinges and hinge pins and incorporate a three
point latching mechanism operated by the low voltage door handle, with door
stops on both doors to secure doors during servicing. To facilitate making
connections and permit cable pulling, the doors and compartment hood shall be
removable. A removable door sill shall be provided to permit rolling or skidding
the unit into place over conduit stubs in foundation.
C.
The high voltage compartment shall be on the left, and shall be accessible only
after the door to the low voltage compartment has been opened. The high voltage
compartment shall enclose the high voltage bushings or bushing wells and provide
for incoming cable from below. The high voltage equipment shall be arranged for
the type of feed as shown on the drawings.
D.
The pad-mounted transformer shall be manufactured by ABB, Cutler-Hammer, or
Square-D.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01.
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
A.
The unit shall be equipped with the following standard accessories.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
A weather cover over the cabinet is to be provided with additional hold
down hardware to secure it more firmly to the cabinet.
Four lifting hooks.
Bolted—on terminal compartment 18 inches deep with removable front
sill.
Hinged, lift—off cabinet doors.
Interlocked hex—head bolt/padlock handle to operate a cam assembly
which is to be part of the three point door latching mechanism.
Tank ground pads (1 in HV - 1 in LV).
Steel high/low voltage compartment barrier.
Two 1/2 inch hex-head bolts which must be removed from the steel
high/low barrier before the HV door can be opened.
Nameplate — A durable metal nameplate made of corrosion—resistant
material and conforming to ANSI/IEEE C57.12.00 — 1980 affixed to each
transformer.
Oil level/fill plug and oil drain plug.
Self—actuating pressure relief device to relieve slow pressure build—up
shall be provided that will automatically vent when pressure reaches
l0(±2) PSI and recloses when pressure falls to 6 PSI.
16461-2
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
2.02.
Removable neutral ground strap.
Five—legged core/coil assembly suitable for grounded WYE—grounded
WYE connections, DELTA-ground WYE connections or DELTA—
DELTA connections as required.
Handhole cover bolted onto tank top (protected by weather cover).
Tap changer handle for de—energized operation only.
Drain valve with sampling device.
Liquid level gauge.
Dial type thermometer.
Provision for pressure vacuum gauge.
Lightning arrester mounting pads (live front only).
HIGH VOLTAGE TERMINATIONS
A.
B.
DEAD FRONT construction, with externally clamped high voltage epoxy bushing
wells with load-break 200 ampere inserts. Contractor to provide load-break
elbows for the size and type cable shown on the drawings. High voltage
terminations to be by qualified personnel only. CONTRACTOR shall submit
qualifications for review by OWNER and ENGINEER.
All high voltage terminations shall be inspected by an independent testing agency
and shall provide a certified report to the owner.
200A, 15 kV Class
Loadbreak Elbow
Connector
16461-3
2.03
HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHING
A.
Oil immersed switching
1.
2.
3.
2.04.
Designed for pad-mounted transformers enabling an operating person to
quickly isolate a line fault in a loop feed system, while maintaining full
service continuity.
Available in 200 300 400 and 600 amp, hook stick operable. Available at
the following ratings, as defined by ANSI Standard C37.72, 1987,
American National Standard Requirements for Manually—operated, Dead
Front Pad-mounted Switchgear with Load Interrupting Switches and
Separable Connectors for Alternating—Current Systems.
The electrical characteristics of each rating:
Ratings
200A – 300A
400A
600A
Maximum Voltage:
10(Line —Ground)
Impulse Withstand Voltage
Continuous and
Interrupting Current
21.9 kV
125-150 kV
200-300 A
15.5 kV
150 kV
400 A
8.3 kV
95 kV
600 A
Momentary & Making Current:
(Sym)
(RMS)(Asym)
l0 kA
16 kA
l6 kA
25.6 kA
10 kA
10 kA
60 Hz Withstand Voltage:
Design
Production
Corona Extinction Voltage (RMS)
Mechanical Operations
70 kV
50 kV
26 kV
500 +
60 kV
40 kV
19 kV
500 +
35 kV
34 kV
11 kV
500 +
HIGH VOLTAGE FUSING
A.
The high voltage shall include the following:
1.
Partial range current limiting fuses consisting of internal, oil immersed,
block mounted fuses mounted inside the tank. Either the protective
expulsion fuse link (1) or the bayonet expulsion fuse link (2) must be
connected in series with the partial range current limiting fusing for
complete system protection.
16461-4
B.
2.05.
2.06.
Fuses to have continuous current ratings sized per the manufacturer’s
recommendation for the indicated kVA, impedance and primary voltages.
HIGH VOLTAGE SURGE ARRESTERS
A.
Dead front — The transformer shall be designed as loop—feed, but utilized as
radial—feed with second set of wells used for dead front arresters. Provide dead
front metal oxide varistor elbow arresters.
B.
Dead front — Underoil surge arresters shall be of the metal oxide type of the
Distribution Class, installed in the tank and block mounted underoil.
C.
Live Front — Surge arresters shall be of the metal oxide type of the Distribution
Class, installed in the high voltage compartment and appropriately grounded.
LOW VOLTAGE TERMINATIONS
A.
The low voltage compartment shall be arranged for cabling from below. Three
line bushings and one insulated neutral bushing with an externally removable
ground strap shall be supplied. The bushings shall be supplied with spade type
terminations and standard NEMA spacing and drilling.
B.
Externally clamped low voltage epoxy or polyester bushings with threaded copper
studs and NEMA four hole rotatable spades (45 to 500 kVA), NEMA eight hole
rotatable spades (750 to 2500 kVA).
2.07. ENCLOSURE & FINISH INTEGRITY
A.
The enclosure shall be designed to meet the requirements of ANSI C57.12.28 —
1988 “Pad-mounted Equipment — Enclosure Integrity for Switchgear and
Transformers”. To comply, all tank, cabinet, and fin steel shall be shot—blasted
prior to application of the protective finish to comply. The finish process should
include an epoxy primer and a final urethane coat. The total, film thickness
applied shall be 3.0 MIL thickness as determined by testing per U.P.A.
Technology MINIDERM S-100A standard.
B.
The paint finish shall be capable of passing a 1500 hours Salt Spray test per
ASTM B117 and Federal Specification TT—P—141 with NO blistering and
passing method 6061 with less than 1/16 inch underfilm corrosion.
C.
The paint finish shall be capable of passing a 1000 hours Humidity test with 98%
relative humidity at 45 C, ±1 C with no blistering.
16461-5
D.
The paint finish shall be capable of passing a direct impact test per ASTM D—
2794 for values greater than 160 in—lbs. and also capable of passing a
crosshatch—tape adhesion test.
E..
The paint finish shall be capable of passing oil resistance tests of three days
immersion at room temperature and three days immersion at 1000C with no
apparent effect. The paint color shall be GREEN 7GY/3.29/1.5MUNSELL.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
TESTING PROGRAM
A.
The following tests shall be made on all transformers performed by an
independent testing agency. The numbers shown do not necessarily indicate the
sequence in which the tests shall be made. All tests shall be made in accordance
with the latest revision of ANSI Standard Test Code C57.12.90, where applicable.
B.
Transformers shall pass the following routine electrical tests:
12.2.1
12.2.2
12.2.3
12.2.4
12.2.5
12.2.6
12.2.7
12.2.8
Ratio Test
Demagnetization Test
Applied Voltage Test of High Voltage
Applied Voltage Test of Low Voltage
400 Hertz Induced Voltage Test
Iron loss and Exciting Current Test
Impedance and Load loss Test
Full Wave Impulse Test.
C.
Transformers shall pass a Mechanical Leak and Pressure Test on tank and coolers
D.
The following ANSI basic design tests are to be made on a sufficient number of
transformers and ratings to demonstrate compliance with these standards. Design
tests are not required to be repeated unless the design of the transformer is
changed so as to modify the reliability of predicated results.
12.4.1
12.4.2
12.4.3
12.4.4
E.
Short circuit
Audible sound level
Temperature rise
Power factor
Manufacturer shall provide certified copies of test results to owner.
16461-6
3.02
3.03
QUALITY
A.
Transformers addressed by this specification are subject to a quality program
which establishes requirements to assure that the transformers provided by the
vendor will comply with Industry Standards or this specification.
B.
This specification covers three phase pad-mounted transformers,
2500 kVA, or below with ratings noted on page 1 or as shown on the drawings.
C.
Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified Manufacturers technical
representative who shall adequately supervise the installation, testing and startup
of equipment furnished under this specification. Manufacturer shall provide
Certificate of Installation.
D.
Warrantee: Manufacturer shall provide 5 year warrantee on equipment supplied
under this specification.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Transformers shall be installed per the manufactures installation
recommendations.
Provide permanent ID labels and warning signs on exterior of Transformers
stating “WARNING MEDIUM VOLTAGE”. ID labels shall indicated voltage,
and source of power.
.
END OF SECTION
16461-7
SECTION 16485
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required, and install, place
in operation and field test variable frequency drive(s) (VFD’s).
B.
The variable frequency drive shall be a space vector Pulse-Width Modulated
(PWM) design. Modulation methods which incorporate "gear-changing"
techniques are not acceptable. The final responsibility of distributor or packager
modifications to a third-party standard product will reside with the VFD
manufacturer. The VFD manufacturer shall have overall responsibility for the
drives. All drives shall be supplied by one manufacturer. The VFD shall be
manufactured within the United States of America to alleviate concerns of future
serviceability and parts availability.
C.
VFD’s shall be eighteen pulse units. Refer to 2.02A.8 for the power unit rating
requirements of the VFD.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.
Pumps, General
B.
Section 16050 - Motors
C.
Division 13 - Instrumentation
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The entire VFD system as described in section 2.01B shall be factory assembled
and system tested by the VFD manufacturer to assure a properly coordinated
system.
B.
Codes: Provide equipment in full accordance with the latest applicable rules,
regulations, and standards of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Local Laws and Ordinances.
State and Federal Laws.
National Electric Code (NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
16485-1
C.
The complete drive system shall be UL listed.
D.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals shall conform in all respects to Section 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS,
WORKING DRAWINGS, AND SAMPLES.
B.
Submittals shall be custom prepared by the VFD manufacturer for this specific
application.
C.
Submittal information shall include, but not be limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.05
Allen-Bradley.
Cutler-Hammer.
Square D.
Equipment dimensions, including stub-up locations, shipping splits and
shipping weights.
Catalog cuts of major components.
Spare parts list, per Paragraph 3.03.
Certifications, including:
a.
Warranty, per section 1.04.
b.
Efficiencies, per section 2.02.A.1.
Harmonic Distortion Analysis, per section 2.01D.
WARRANTY
A.
All equipment furnished under this section shall be warranted for on site parts and
labor by the contractor and the equipment manufacturers for a period of five (5)
years after substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
Material and Equipment
A.
Any modifications to a standard product required to meet this specification shall
be performed by the VFD manufacturer only. Distributor or system integrator
changes to the VFD manufacturer's product are specifically disallowed.
B.
The VFD system shall consist of a power factor correction / harmonic filter unit,
input rectifier-grade phase-shifting transformer, 18 pulse converter section, output
inverter and control logic section, harmonic filtering unit and Solid State Soft
Start (SSSS) bypass. All components listed including power factor correction /
harmonic filter shall be integral to the VFD lineup, factory wired and tested as a
16485-2
complete system. The entire VFD system shall meet the requirements of NEC
article 409 and IEEE 508A for fault current withstand ratings as indicated on the
project electrical drawings.
2.02
C.
Input circuit breaker, interlocked with the enclosure door, with through-the-door
handle to provide positive disconnect of incoming AC power and shall be capable
of being locked in the open position.
D.
VFD system shall maintain a 0.95 minimum true power factor throughout the
entire speed range.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
A.
Ratings
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
The drive system shall be 96% efficient at full load and full speed and
95.5% efficient at 51% load and 80% speed. Losses to be utilized in drive
system efficiency calculation shall include input transformer, harmonic filter
and power factor correction if applicable, VFD converter and output filter if
applicable. Auxiliary controls, such as internal VFD control boards, cooling
fans or pumps, shall be included in all loss calculations.
Rated Input Power: 460 Volts 60 Hz, +10%, -5% at rated load, 3-phase.
a.
Voltage Dip Ride-Through: VFD shall be capable of sustaining
continued operation with a 40% dip in nominal line voltage. Output
speed may decline only if current limit rating of VFD is exceeded.
b.
Power Loss Ride-through: VFD shall be capable of a minimum 3
cycle power loss ride-through without fault activation.
Output Power: As required by motors supplied.
Ambient Temperature Range: 0 to 40°C.
Elevation: Up to 3300 feet (1000 meters) above MSL without de-rating.
Atmosphere: Non-condensing relative humidity to 95%.
AC Line Frequency Variation: +/- 3 Hertz.
Power Unit Rating Basis: 115% rated current continuous, 150% rated
current for one minute, at rated temperature. If the power unit rating of the
VFD does not meet the above requirements, provide VFD with one standard
size larger than the nameplate motor horsepower.
VFD shall be sized to serve 115% of motor load.
Construction
1.
2.
3.
The controller shall produce an adjustable AC voltage/frequency output. It
shall have an output voltage regulator to maintain correct output V/Hz ratio
despite incoming voltage variations.
The controller shall have a continuous output current rating of 100% of
motor nameplate current.
The converter section shall be 18 pulse utilizing diodes.
16485-3
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
The inverter output shall be generated by IGBTs. Pulse Width Modulation
strategy will be of the space vector type implemented to generate a sinecoded output voltage. The VFD shall not induce excessive power losses in
the motor. The worst case RMS motor line current measured at rated speed,
torque and voltage shall not exceed 1.05 times the rated RMS motor current
for pure sine wave operation. The inverters shall be able to sustain 1600
volt surges.
The controller(s) shall be suitable for use with any standard NEMA-B
squirrel-cage induction motor(s) having a 1.15 Service Factor or with
existing standard NEMA-B squirrel-cage induction motor(s) with nameplate
data as shown on the plans. Provide drives with dV/dT output filters. At any
time in the future, it shall be possible to substitute any standard motor
(equivalent horsepower, voltage and RPM) in the field.
The control logic section shall be fully digital and not require analog
adjustment pots or fixed selector resistors. A power failure will not
necessitate a reload of any drive parameter or configuration.
Minimum Starting Speed: When called to operate, the VFD shall amp to a
minimum speed. The minimum speed shall be adjustable but initially set at
60% of maximum speed. The 4-20 mA speed signal from the PLC and
potentiometer on the front of the drive shall modulate the signal between the
minimum speed set point and the maximum output speed of the drive; i.e., at
the 4 mA signal, the VFD shall run at the minimum speed. At the 20 mA
signal, the VFD shall run at full speed. The potentiometer shall also adjust
speed between the minimum speed set point and the maximum running
speed. Below the minimum speed set point, the potentiometer shall have no
effect.
Basic Features
1.
2.
The door of each power unit shall include: a keypad with a manual speed
device, "HAND / OFF / REMOTE/BYPASS" mode selector switch,
"POWER ON" light, “VFD FAIL” light, VFD "RUNNING" light, fault reset
pushbutton, “MOTOR OVER TEMPERATURE” light, “MOTOR
HEATER ON” light, “ENCLOSURE OVER TEMPERATURE” light,
“DRIVE LOCKOUT” light, CONTROL POWER ON light, START and
STOP pushbuttons and a TEST / NORMAL selector switch. All lights shall
be LED type.
The VFD shall include a customer selectable automatic restart feature. When
enabled, the VFD shall automatically attempt to restart after a trip condition
resulting from instantaneous overcurrent, overvoltage, out of saturation or
overload. For safety, the drive shall shut down and require manual reset and
restart if the automatic reset/restart function (programmable for up to 3
attempts) is not successful within a customer programmable time period.
Auto-Restart shall be programmable to allow for individual fault selection.
16485-4
3.
A door-mounted membrane keypad with integral 2-line minimum, 24character LCD display shall be furnished, capable of controlling the VFD
and setting drive parameters. The keypad shall include the following
features:
a.
The digital display must present all diagnostic message and
parameter values in English engineering units when accessed,
without the use of codes.
b.
The digital keypad shall allow the operator to enter exact numerical
settings in English engineering units. A user menu written in plain
English (rather than codes) shall be provided in software in
nonvolatile memory as a guide to parameter setting and resettable in
the field through the keypad. Multiple levels of password security
shall be available to protect drive parameters from unauthorized
personnel. The drive set up parameters must be able to be
transferred to new boards to reprogram spare boards.
c.
The following digital door-mounted keypad indications may be
selectively displayed:
1)
Speed demand in percent.
2)
Output current in amperes.
3)
Output Frequency in hertz.
4)
Input voltage.
5)
Output voltage.
6)
Total 3-phase KW.
7)
Kilowatt hour meter
8)
Elapsed time running meter.
9)
RPM.
10)
DC bus voltage.
d.
4.
D.
VFD shall have the capability of communicating via an RJ-45
Ethernet port with a Modicon PLC using MODBUS Ethernet
protocol.
e.
VFD parameters, fault log and diagnostic log shall be downloadable
via a RJ-45 Ethernet port.
Refer to the VFD wiring diagram in the drawings for remote signals and
alarms.
Enclosure
1.
All VFD components shall be factory mounted and wired on a dead front,
grounded, NEMA-1 enclosure. If a free-standing enclosure is provided, it
shall be suitable for mounting on a concrete housekeeping pad. Maximum
enclosure dimensions for various VFD sizes shall be as follows:
a.
1 HP to 5 HP: 18”W x 12”D x 64” H.
16485-5
E.
Protective Features and Circuits: The controller shall include the following alarms
and protective features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
F.
Instantaneous overcurrent and overvoltage trip.
Undervoltage and power loss protection.
Power unit overtemperature alarm and protection. Upon sensing an
overtemperature condition, the VFD is to automatically trip.
Electronic motor inverse time overload protection.
Responsive action to motor winding temperature detectors or thermostatic
switches. A dry contact (NC) input to the VFD is required.
When power is restored after a complete power outage, the VFD shall be
capable of catching the motor while it is still spinning and restoring it to
proper operating speed without the use of an encoder.
The VFD shall be protected from damage due to the following, without
requiring an output contactor:
a.
Three-phase short circuit on VFD output terminals.
b.
Loss of input power due to opening of VFD input disconnecting
device or utility power failure during VFD operation.
c.
Loss of one (1) phase of input power.
The VFD shall continue to operate at a reduced capacity under a singlephase fault condition.
The VFD shall be able to withstand the following fault conditions without
damage to the power circuit components:
a.
Failure to connect a motor to the VFD output.
b.
VFD output open circuit that may occur during operation.
c.
VFD output short circuit that may occur during operation.
Three phase lightning and surge protection across the line input at each
VFD.
Provide 120V motor heater power that is active when the motor is off and is
off when the motor is active.
Parameter Settings
1.
The following system configuring settings shall be provided and field
adjustable, without exception, through the keypad/display unit. Except for
Motor Nameplate Data, all parameters must be adjustable while the
processor is on-line and the drive is running.
a.
Motor Nameplate Data.
1)
Motor frequency.
2)
Number of poles.
3)
Full load speed.
4)
Motor volts.
5)
Motor full load amps.
6)
Motor HP.
7)
Current limit, max.
b.
VFD Configuration Parameters.
16485-6
2.
G.
1)
Independent accelerate/decelerate rates.
2)
Max/Min speed (frequency)
3)
Catch-a spinning load selection.
4)
No load boost.
5)
Full load boost.
6)
Volts/Hertz ratio.
7)
Overspeed trip.
8)
Overload trip curve selection.
9)
Overload trip time selection
10)
Adjustable Ramp Stop.
c.
Automatic VFD Control.
1)
PID utilizing an internal or external setpoint.
2)
Three selectable critical speed avoidance bands with
programmable bandwidths.
3)
Auto start functions: On/Off, Delay On/Off. Operable from
a 4-20mA signal or from the PID output, command, or
feedback signal.
4)
Speed Profile: Programmable entry and exit points.
5)
Programmable loss of signal control: Stop, maintain last
speed, or default to preselected setpoint.
All drive setting adjustments and operation parameters shall be stored in a
parameter log which lists allowable maximum and minimum points as well
as the present set values. This parameter log shall be accessible via a RJ-45
Ethernet port capable of communicating with a Modicon PLC using
MODBUS Ethernet protocol as well as on the keypad display.
Input/Output Features
1.
2.
H.
Two programmable analog inputs: VFD speed in, spare.
Three programmable analog outputs: VFD speed output, Drive (output)
current in Amps, spare.
3.
Two programmable digital inputs: Run, spare.
4.
Ten programmable digital outputs: VFD fault, VFD running, VFD in
remote, 6 spare.
5.
One Pot input (three wire control, +10 V, wiper and common).
6.
System Program providing built-in drive control or application specific
configuration capability.
Diagnostic Features and Fault Handling
1.
2.
The VFD shall include a comprehensive microprocessor based digital
diagnostic system that monitors its own control functions and displays faults
and operating conditions.
A “Fault Log” shall be accessible via a RJ-45 Ethernet link capable of
communicating with a Modicon PLC using MODBUS Ethernet protocol as
well as line-by-line on the keypad display. The "FAULT LOG" shall record,
16485-7
3.
store, display and output to a serial port upon demand, the following for the
64 most recent events:
a.
Date and time of day.
b.
Type of fault.
c.
All faults and events shall be stored and displayed in English, not
fault codes.
A "HISTORIC LOG" shall record, store, and output via a RJ-45 Ethernet
link port capable of communicating with a Quantum PLC via MODBUS
Ethernet protocol upon demand, the following selectable control variables at
1 msec. intervals for the 58 intervals immediately preceding and the 20
intervals immediately following a fault trip:
a.
Torque demand.
b.
Torque command.
c.
Torque feedback.
d.
Torque error.
e.
Torque maximum.
f.
Current demand.
g.
Peak current.
h.
Motor current.
i.
DC bus voltage.
j.
Line voltage.
k.
Velocity demand.
l.
Velocity reference.
m.
PI min/max limit.
n.
Boost.
o.
VFD mode (Auto/Manual).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
FACTORY TESTING
A.
The VFD manufacturer shall provide as a minimum, the following quality
assurance steps within his factory:
1.
2.
3.
3.02
Incoming inspection of components and raw materials based on strategic
supplier base and experience. Sampling plans based on MIL STD 105E.
MIL STD 45662 calibration system.
All products subject to 100% testing and final inspection; no sampling plans
permitted.
PRE-DELIVERY TESTING COORDINATION
A.
One VFD unit of each specified type and application shall be shipped to the pump
manufacturer’s test facility for complete operational testing.
The VFD
Manufacturer shall provide a qualified representative at the pump Manufacturer’s
16485-8
test facility during testing. All costs incurred by the VFD Manufacturer to meet
this requirement shall be included in the bid.
B.
3.03
3.04
Certified test reports shall be submitted to the ENGINEER before the equipment
is shipped to the project site.
STARTUP AND TRAINING
A.
VFD manufacturer shall provide the services of a factory technician for startup
assistance and training. Verification of VFD input harmonic voltage and current
distortion limits specified must be verified as part of final startup and acceptance.
If harmonic distortion requirements are not met, it is the responsibility of the VFD
supplier to meet the specification at the supplier’s expense. A recording type
Fluke 41 or equivalent harmonic analyzer displaying individual and total
harmonic currents and voltages must be utilized.
B.
A 10% payment retainage will be released upon field test verification of harmonic
specification requirements and final acceptance.
C.
Provide 2 8-hour days training for up to 8 personnel (each day).
SPARE PARTS
A.
The following spare parts shall be furnished:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.05
Three of each type of fuse rated 460V or less.
Two of each type of converter power semiconductor.
Two of each type of inverter power semiconductor.
One of each type of type control printed circuit board and gate firing boards.
(5) Five keypad assembly(s).
(1) Spare VFD for each size provided on project.
(1) Copy of software required with (1) copy of any program software with
initial set points configured per initial plant setup.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Functional Test:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Conduct on each VFD.
Inspect controller for electrical supply termination connections,
interconnections, proper installation, and quiet operation.
Vibration Test: Complete assembly, consisting of motor, load, and flexible
shafting, connected and in normal operation, shall not develop amplitudes of
vibration exceeding limits recommended by current edition of Hydraulic
Institute Standards. Where pumps and motors are separated by intermediate
flexible shafting, measure vibration both at top motor bearing and at two
points on top pump bearing, 90 degrees apart.
Record test data for report.
16485-9
B.
Performance Test:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Conduct on each VFD.
Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions.
Test for continuous 7-day period without malfunction.
Demonstrate performance by operating the continuous period while varying
the application load, as the input conditions allow, in order to verify system
performance.
Record test data for report.
END OF SECTION
16485-10
SECTION 16490
SOLID STATE REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
1.02
Provide the solid state reduced voltage starter (SSRVS) as shown on the drawings
and/or as specified herein. The SSRVS shall be microprocessor controlled suitable
for use with three phase induction motors rated 600 VAC or less. It shall provide a
closed loop current ramp for smooth and stepless motor acceleration and
deceleration.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND QUALIFICATIONS
A.
The SSRVS shall be the product of a manufacturer who has produced SSRVS for
a minimum of 10 years (consecutive).
B.
The SSRVS shall be manufactured by
1.
2.
Square D
or Engineer approved equal
C.
The SSRVS shall be U.L. labeled where U.L. has such a listing.
D.
The SSRVS shall be designed, manufactured and tested to conform, where
applicable, with the following industry standards and specifications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E.
ANSI
CSA
IEEE
UL
NEC
EEMAC
NEMA
OSHA
SSRVS performance requirements
1.
2.
3.
Nominal operating ambient temperatures: 0 - 40 deg C (32 deg F to 104
deg F) with relative humidity of up to 95% (noncondensing).
Power: Operate with three phase AC power at nominal voltages 200
through 600 VAC.
Frequency: operates on 25 through 70 Hz.
16490-1
4.
F.
Meet Uniform Building Code on Non-building structures, section 2338 for
zone 1, 2, 3, and 4 requirements.
Design Criteria:
DESCRIPTION
Horsepower
Power Ratings
PIV
Starting Torque
Ramp Time
Decel Time
Nominal ratings
Standard Insulation Test
Overall Efficiency
SCR Firing Technique
Transient Voltage Protection
Diagnostics and LEDs
Control Input
1.03
SPECIFICATION
HP: as shown on plans
500% for 30 sec. and 125% cont.
2.5 x line voltage or 1200 PIV min.
0 to 100%
0 to 120 seconds
0 to 60 seconds
200 through 600 VAC.
25 through 70 Hz. With frequency
tracking within this range
2500 VAC minimum
Average 99.7%
Hard Drive with "picket fence''
DV/DT=s or SIOV=s
Power On
Gate Power
Micro Computer Fault
SCR Condition
LCD display (16 char. X two lines.)
120 VAC or dry contact, 2/3 wire.
SUBMITTALS
A.
The following drawings/information shall he supplied by the SSRVS
manufacturer in the shop drawings and with the shipment of each starter:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Elementary wiring diagrams.
Wiring and interconnect diagrams.
Enclosure frontal elevation and dimension drawings.
Internal component layout diagrams
Available conduit entry and exit locations.
Instruction manuals required for proper operation of the SSRVS.
16490-2
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.05
Manufacturer Qualification: The manufacturer of the SSRVS shall be a firm
experienced in manufacturing the equipment as specified herein for this project
and who has a record of successful in-service performance.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Handling and shipment of the equipment shall be in such a manner to prevent
internal component damage, breakage, and denting and scoring of the enclosure
finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
2.03
GENERAL.
A.
Provide SSRVS where and as shown on the plans and as described by frontal
elevation drawings, one-line diagrams, and/or equipment schedules.
B.
The SSRVS assembly shall include the necessary interface relays, timers, and
those additional items necessary for interface to the pumps controls as identified
on the plans.
C.
The complete SSRVS shall be rated for an available fault current of 100,000
asymmetrical.
ENCLOSURE CONSTRUCTION
A.
The SSRVS enclosure shall be constructed as NEMA 12.
B.
The dimensions of the over-all enclosure shall be maximum as shown on the plans
and include a door mounted operator interface panel.
C.
The enclosure shall include a lockable circuit breaker disconnect handle
mechanism used to remove power from the SSRVS. Enclosure door shall be
interlocked with the disconnect handle mechanism such that entry to the enclosure
is prevented until power to the SSRVS is removed.
DISCONNECTS
A.
The SSRVS package shall be supplied complete with a circuit breaker used as a
means of removing line power from the starter as well as for short circuit
protection.
16490-3
2.04
2.05
B.
The circuit breaker shall be supplied as shown on the drawings and as indicated
within this section. Where no circuit breaker ratings are specified on the drawings
or within this section, the circuit breaker shall be supplied to meet the normal
standards of the manufacturer of the SSRVS. As a minimum, the circuit breaker
shall conform to the requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC).
C.
The disconnect shall be interlocked via the disconnect handle mechanism such
that entry to any part of the enclosure is prevented until power to the SSRVS is
removed.
BYPASS CONTACTORS
A.
A bypass contactor shall be supplied. This bypass contactor shall bypass the
SCRs of the SSRVS once the motor is up to speed. The effect of the bypass
contactor during run shall eliminate the heat buildup resulting from the voltage
drop across the SCRs of the SSRVS.
B.
For SSRVS to be installed at wells, it is not the intent to use the bypass contactor
also as a means of starting the motor.
SSRVS LOGIC CONTROL CONFIGURATION
A.
Description
1.
The SSRVS shall be supplied standard with programming buttons and
local start/stop buttons on one main keypad with LCD display.
2.
Standard starter control logic shall be located on a microprocessor-based
PC card, which provides the sequential logic for the starter and gate
signals to the power card, which is used to drive the SCRs.
3.
Design control logic to perform timing required for operation of the
SSRVS and bypass contactor while continuously monitoring motor and
starter for faults. If a fault is detected, the control logic of the SSRVS shall
provide fault indication via an LCD display. In the event of a fault
condition, the control logic shall safely shut down the starter to disable the
motor.
4.
The PC cards of the SSRVS shall be interchangeable with other control
logic cards on starters of a similar design.
16490-4
B.
Electrical
1.
The logic control of the SSRVS shall incorporate a micro computer which
consists of all circuitry required to drive the power semiconductors and
provide motor and starter monitoring functions.
2.
The SSRVS logic shall provide the following standard features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
3.
Standard features shall operate concurrently.
4.
The following optional features shall be included with each SSRVS:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Adjustable Ramp Time (0-120 seconds)
Adjustable Ramp Stop (0-120 seconds)
Adjustable Initial Current (50-400% of motor FLA)
Adjustable Max Current (200-600% of motor FLA)
Adjustable Decel Profile for Pumps
Line Phase Loss Detection
Adjustable Line Current Imbalance Detection (10-40%)
Adjustable Over/Under Line Voltage Protection (10-30%)
Up To Speed Indication
Line Phase Sequence Sensitivity or Insensitivity
Selectable Solid State Overload Class (10, 20, 30, None)
Selectable Motor Service Factor (1.0, 1.15, or 1.25)
Adjustable Motor Full Load Amperes
Adjustable Current Transformer Ratio
Battery "Backup" of Set Starter Parameters
Selectable Passcode Protection of Set Starter Parameters
Line Voltage Independent Operation
Line Frequency Tracking (25Hz Through 70Hz)
Instantaneous Overcurrent Detection
Shorted SCR Detection
Software Selectable (Via LCD) Relay Outputs
""Revolving" Event Recorder (99 most recent events)
LCD Status Display
Selectable Automatic Energy Savings Feature
Over/Under Current Fault Protection used in pumping applications
for indicating pump jam
Starts Per Hour Limiter
Elapsed Time Meter (Via LCD Display)
Time Between Starts Limiter
Software Selectable Relay Outputs
16490-5
1.
Two selectable relay outputs shall be provided with each SSRVS.
2.
Relay outputs shall be selectable via LCD display.
3.
Selectable relay outputs shall be from the following menu:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
4.
The selectable relay outputs shall be in addition to one fixed general fault
relay output. This general fault relay shall indicate any of the following
faults:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
5.
D.
Run
Up To Speed
Shorted SCR Trip
Motor Thermal Overload Trip
Motor Thermal Overload Warning
Motor Thermal Overload Lockout
SHT Fault Relay
Line Phase Loss
Line Phase Imbalance
Low Three Phase Line
Line Phase Sequence Change
Motor Thermal Overload Trip
Battery Backup Failure (Computer PC Card)
Instantaneous Overcurrent
Shorted SCR Fault
Three Phase Line Frequency Deviation
Control Power Failure
Computer Error
Up To Speed Fault (Stall Time Has Expired)
Contact ratings for output relays shall be rated 5 Amps inductive and 10
Amps resistive.
LCD Status Display
1.
Each SSRVS shall have a keyboard/LCD display assembly designed to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Set or examine operating parameters.
Provide starter status information.
Provide real-time information about line current, voltage and
frequency.
Provide a means to start and stop the SSRVS.
16490-6
2.
E.
The LCD display for the SSRVS shall be mounted on the door of the
starter enclosure for viewing from the outside of the enclosure.
LED Indicators
1.
The following LED indicators shall be provided for advisory status and
fault annunciation:
a.
b.
c.
d.
F.
Power On
Micro Computer Fault
SCR Gate Drive Power
SCR Condition
Provide a Modbus network card and interface modules to allow serial
communications on a Modbus network.
1.
Interface connection cable shall utilize a RJ-45 connector.
2.
Network to allow a selection of standard and custom register values to
communicate drive parameters, including:
3.
a.
Drive fault
b.
Overload
c.
Trip
d.
Loss of control power
e.
Speed
f.
Power (kW)
g.
Amps (Phase A, B, and C)
h.
Voltage (Phase A-B, B-C, C-A)
Provide all components and drive programming to allow network interface
with control system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
SHIPPING AND HANDLING
A.
All equipment parts shall be properly protected in accordance with Manufacturer
requirements so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged
delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and
equipment are ready for operation.
B.
Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment
unless permission is received in writing from the Engineer.
16490-7
3.02
C.
Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent
rust and corrosion.
D.
Each box or package shall be properly marked to show its net weight in addition
to its contents.
E.
All scratched or otherwise marred painted surfaces shall be touched-up after
installation to match original finishes.
INSTALLATION AND STARTUP
A.
The Manufacturer, through the Contractor, shall examine all areas and conditions
under which the variable frequency drives, motors, and isolation transformers are
to be installed. The Manufacturer shall notify the Contractor, in writing of
conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. No work shall
proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Contractor.
B.
If there are any difficulties in installation or operation of the equipment due to the
Manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional services shall be provided at no
cost or expense to the Owner.
C.
The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing a Manufacturer's engineer to
assist in installation, to inspect and adjust the equipment before initial service, and
during startup. Testing, checkout, and start-up of the variable frequency drive
system shall be performed under the technical direction of the manufacturer's
service engineer. Under no circumstances, are any portions of the drive system to
be energized without authorization from the manufacturer's representative.
D.
Install SSRVS's and motors in accordance with the equipment Manufacturer's
written instructions and with recognized industry practices; complying with
applicable requirements of NEC, U.L. and NEMA standards, to insure that
products fulfill requirements.
E.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment Manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors. Where Manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated,
tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in
U.L. Standards 486A and B, and the National Electrical Code. The SSRVS
enclosure shall not be used as a raceway for wiring unless a dedicated wiring
space is provided. Wiring shall not run through or between components not
served.
F.
Prior to energization of SSRVS equipment, check with ground resistance tester,
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure
16490-8
requirements are fulfilled. Check circuitry for electrical continuity, and for shortcircuits, and ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirements.
3.03
G.
Provide equipment grounding connections for SSRVS equipment as indicated.
Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in U.L. Standard
486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.
H.
Upon completion of installation of SSRVS equipment and electrical circuitry,
energize SSRVS circuitry and demonstrate functioning of equipment in
accordance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at
site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with
new units, and retest to demonstrate compliance.
SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A.
The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified Manufacturer's technical
representative who shall adequately supervise the installation and testing of and
start up of all equipment furnished under this Contract and instruct the
Contractor's personnel and the Owner's operating personnel in its maintenance and
operation as outlined in the General Conditions.
The services of the
Manufacturer's representative shall be provided for the periods stated in the
following schedule:
INSTALLATION
TRIP
(DAYS)
For each Type of SSRVS
2
OPERATION GUARANTEE
TRIP*
PERIOD
(DAYS)
TRIP (DAYS)
2
2
* During the operation trip, the Manufacturer shall instruct Owner's personnel for
four hours per day.
A total of six (6) service days (48 hours) shall be provided by the Manufacturer's
representative.
B.
The Manufacturer's representative shall direct all final adjustments necessary for
the drive system to meet all operational and performance requirements outlined
herein.
C.
Any additional time required to achieve successful installation and operation shall
be at the expense of the Contractor. The Manufacturer's representative shall sign
in and out at the office of the resident representative on each day of arrival at the
project.
16490-9
3.04
WARRANTY
A.
Equipment furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed for two (2) years from
the date of final completion.
B.
site.
Work shall include labor, materials, and travel time for necessary repairs at the job
END OF SECTION
16490-10
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES
A.
The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250, Enclosures
for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
2.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code
(NEC).
3.
Uniform Building Code (UBC): Section 2329, Earthquake Requirements.
4.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a.
b.
c.
1.02
595, Standard for Safety Marine-Type Electric Lighting Fixtures.
844, Standard for Safety Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in
Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
924, Standard for Safety Emergency Lighting and Power
Equipment.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Interior Luminaires:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Catalog data sheets and pictures.
Luminaire finish and metal gauge.
Lens material, pattern, and thickness.
Candle power distribution curves in two or more planes.
Candle power chart 0 to 90 degrees.
Lumen output chart.
Average maximum brightness data in foot lamberts.
Coefficients of utilization for zonal cavity calculations.
Mounting or suspension details.
Heat exchange and air handling data.
16500-1
2.
Exterior Luminaires:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Lamps:
a.
c.
4.
Voltage, and power consumption.
Capacity.
Contacts and time delay.
Operating levels.
Enclosure type and dimensions.
Temperature range.
UL COMPLIANCE
A.
1.04
Wiring diagram.
Contact ratings.
Photocells:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
1.03
Colors.
Package.
Photo-Time Control:
a.
b.
5.
Catalog data sheets and pictures.
Luminaire finish and metal gauge.
Lens material, pattern, and thickness.
IES lighting classification and isolux diagram.
Fastening details to wall or pole.
Driver, location, and method of fastening.
For light poles, submit wind loading, complete dimensions, and
finish.
Materials manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall conform
to UL Standards and have an applied UL listing mark.
RELATED SECTION
A.
Section 16503: Poles & Standards
B.
Section 16510: Lighting Control
16500-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
LUMINAIRES
A.
Specific requirements relative to execution of Work of this section is located in
the Luminaire Schedule on Drawings.
B.
Feed-through type, or separate junction box.
C.
Wire Leads: Minimum 18 AWG.
D.
Component Access: Accessible and replaceable without removing luminaire from
ceiling.
E.
Soffit Installations:
1.
2.
F.
Exterior Installations:
1.
2.
G.
UL Labeled: SUITABLE FOR WET LOCATIONS.
When factory-installed photocells are provided, entire assembly shall have
UL label.
Emergency Lighting:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.02
UL Labeled: SUITABLE FOR DAMP LOCATIONS.
Ballast: Removable, prewired.
Power Pack: Self-contained, 120-volt transformer, inverter/charger, sealed
nickel cadmium battery, and indicator switch in accordance with UL 924.
Lighted, push-to-test indicator.
Capable of providing full illumination for 1-1/2 hours in emergency mode.
Capable of full recharge in 24 hours, automatically upon resumption of
normal line voltage.
Capable of protecting against excess charging and discharging.
LAMPS
A.
LED:
1.
As indicated on fixture schedule.
16500-3
2.03
LIGHTING CONTROL
A.
Photocell for lighting contactor:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Automatic ON/OFF switching photo control.
Housing: Self-contained, die-cast aluminum, unaffected by moisture,
vibration, or temperature changes.
Setting: ON at dusk and OFF at dawn.
Time delay feature to prevent false switching.
Field adjustable to control operating levels.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
2.04
2.05
Tork.
Paragon.
Or equal.
POLES
A.
Rating (with Luminaire): All pole installation shall be suitable for 140 mph wind
with appropriate gust factor per applicable zone of installation as defined in the
Florida Building Code. The contractor shall include with the shop drawing
submittal, a pole wind loading calculation signed and sealed by a structural
engineer registered in Florida showing that the proposed installations will meet
the given wind loading requirement.
B.
Material: Extruded aluminum or concrete.
EMERGENCY BALLAST
A.
In accordance with UL 924.
B.
Nickel cadmium battery, charger, and electronic circuitry in metal case plus ac
ballast.
C.
Solid state charging indicator monitoring light and double-pole test switch.
D.
Capable of operating one fluorescent lamps for a period of 90 minutes with output
of 1,100 to 1,200 lumens.
E.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
MagneTec Jefferson.
Bodine.
Radiant.
16500-4
2.06
SPARE PARTS
A.
2.07
Provide 5 spare lamps for each size and type used for non LED fixtures. For LED
fixtures provide two repair modules for each size and type used.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide warranty per specification section 01740.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
LUMINAIRES
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Pendant Mounted:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Provide swivel type hangers and canopies to match luminaires, unless
otherwise noted.
Space single-stem hangers on continuous-row fluorescent luminaires
nominally 48 inches apart.
Provide twin-stem hangers on single luminaires.
Pole Mounted:
1.
2.
D.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Provide proper hangers, pendants, and canopies as necessary for complete
installation.
Provide additional ceiling bracing, hanger supports, and other structural
reinforcements to building and to concrete pole bases required to safely
mount.
Install plumb and level.
Mounting heights shown for wall mounted or pendant mounted luminaires
are measured from bottom of luminaire to finished floor or finished grade,
whichever is applicable.
Install each luminaire outlet box with galvanized stud.
Provide precast concrete base.
Provide branch circuit in-line fuses in pole base handhole.
Swinging Type:
16500-5
1.
E.
Finished Areas:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
F.
Install symmetrically with tile pattern.
Locate with centerlines either on centerline of tile or on joint between
adjacent tile runs.
Install recessed luminaires tight to finished surface such that no spill light
will show between ceilings and sealing rings.
Combustible Low Density Cellulose Fiberboard: Provide spacers and
mount luminaires 1-1/2 inches from ceiling surface, or use fixtures
suitable for mounting on low density ceilings.
Junction Boxes:
a.
Flush and Recessed Luminaires: Locate minimum 1 foot from
luminaire.
b.
In concealed locations, install junction boxes to be accessible by
removing luminaire.
Wiring and Conduit:
a.
Provide wiring of temperature rating required by luminaire.
b.
Provide flexible steel conduit.
Provide plaster frames when required by ceiling construction.
Independent Supports:
a.
Provide each recessed fluorescent luminaire with two safety chains
or two No. 12 soft-annealed galvanized steel wires of length
needed to secure luminaire to building structure independent of
ceiling structure.
b.
Tensile strength of chain or wire, and method of fastening to
structure shall be adequate to support weight of luminaire.
c.
Fasten chain or wire to each end of luminaire.
Unfinished Areas: Locate luminaires to avoid either conflict with other building
systems or blockage of luminaire light output.
1.
2.
3.02
Provide, at each support, safety cable capable of supporting four times the
vertical load from the structure to the luminaire.
Fixture Suspension: Provide 1/4-inch threaded steel hanger rods. Scissor
type hangers not permitted.
Attachment to Steel Beams: Provide flanged beam clips and straight or
angled hangers.
LAMPS
A.
Provide in each fixture, the number and type for which the fixture is designed,
unless otherwise noted.
16500-6
3.03
3.04
BALLASTS
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Utilize all ballast mounting holes to fasten securely within luminaire.
C.
Replace noisy or defective ballasts.
LIGHTING CONTROL
A.
3.05
3.06
Outdoor Luminaires: PLC time clock switch lights ON and OFF.
EMERGENCY BALLAST
A.
Install battery, charger, and electronic circuitry metal case inside fluorescent
fixture housing adjacent to ac ballast.
B.
Install monitoring light and double-pole switch adjacent to light fixture.
C.
Wire in accordance with manufacturer's wiring diagrams.
CLEANING FOLLOWING CONSTRUCTION
A.
Remove all labels and other markings, except UL listing mark.
B.
Wipe luminaires inside and out to remove construction dust.
C.
Clean luminaire plastic lenses with antistatic cleaners only.
D.
Touch up all painted surfaces of luminaires and poles with matching paint ordered
from manufacturer.
E.
Replace all defective lamps at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
16500-7
SECTION 16503
POLES AND STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Exterior lighting fixtures (luminaires) and brackets, which are required in connection
with electrical poles and standards, are specified in Section 16500.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings covering
items included under this Section. Shop Drawing submittals shall include:
1.
Shop Drawings of electrical poles and standards, including mast arms and
wire/cable connections which are custom work.
2.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on electrical poles, standards, and
hardware. Include certified dimension Drawings for fabricated poles, standards,
and mast arms, if any.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment,
of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1.
UL Compliance: Comply with UL Standards, including UL 486A and B
pertaining to electrical poles and standards. Provide lighting components and
fittings which are UL listed and labeled.
2.
AASHTO Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of American
Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials Standard LTS-1,
"Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires
and Traffic Signals."
3.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Standards Pub/No's. LE 2 and TT 1
pertaining to electrical pole and standard units, materials, and installation.
4.
IES Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IES RP-8, "Roadway
Lighting," and RP-20, "Parking Facilities Lighting."
16503-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, manufacturers offering electrical
poles and standards which may be incorporated in Work include:
1.
Standards:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Appleton Electric Co.
General Electric Co.
Kirlin Company.
Koppers Company.
Lexington Standard Corp.
Lighting Division, Harvey Hubbell, Inc.
Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co.
Sternberg Lanterns, Inc.
Union Metal Mfg. Co.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.
2.02 ELECTRICAL POLES AND STANDARDS
A. Design standards to sustain wind velocities up to 120 miles per hour with a gust factor
of 1.3 and to accommodate luminaire and lightning protection weight.
B. Fiberglass Lighting Standards: Provide fiberglass, raceway-type, lighting poles and
standards, of sizes and types indicated, comprised of shafts and tenon joints. Equip
with grounding connections readily accessible from handhole or transformer base
access doors; and construct of the following materials and additional construction
features:
1.
Material:
a.
2.
Configuration:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Fiberglass.
Embedded type base and reinforcing sleeve with hand and cable entrance
holes where indicated.
Anchor base type with handhole and cover where indicated.
Transformer base type with access door and cover.
Fiberglass Lighting Standard Accessories: Provide accessories for fiberglass
lighting standards, including anchor bolts, as recommended by lighting standard
manufacturer, of sizes and materials needed to meet erection and loading
application requirements.
16503-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
16503-3
SECTION 16510
LIGHTING CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES
A.
The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.03
Federal Specifications (FS):
a.
W-C-596, Connector, Receptacle, Electrical.
b.
W-S-896E, Switches, Toggle, Flush Mounted.
National Electrical Contractor's Association, Inc. (NECA): 5055,
Standard of Installation.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
WD I, General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National
Electrical Code (NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a.
UL listed under UL 916 Energy Management Equipment
Shop Drawings:
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
UL Compliance: Materials manufactured within scope of Underwriters
Laboratories shall conform to UL Standards and have an applied UL
listing mark.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
LIGHTING CONTACTOR
A.
NEMA ICS 2, UL 508.
B.
Electrically operated.
C.
Main Contacts:
1.
Double-break, continuous-duty, rated 30 amperes, 600 volts,
withstand rating of 22,000 amps rms symmetrical at 250 volts.
16510-1
2.
Marked for electric discharge lamps, tungsten, and general-purpose
loads.
E.
Auxiliary contact relay for three-wire control.
F.
One normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contacts rated 10
amperes at 480-volt.
G.
Clamp type, self-rising terminal plates for solderless connections.
H.
Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12, Dust-Tight, Drip-Tight, Industrial Use,
unless otherwise shown.
I.
Manufacturers:
1.
Cutler Hammer.
2.
Square D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Install equipment in accordance with NECA 5055.
END OF SECTION
16510-2
SECTION 16670
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES
A.
The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1.
2.
3.
1.02
Lightning Protection Institute (LPI): 175, Installation Standard.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 780, Lightning Protection
Code.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a.
96, Standard for Safety Lightning Protection Components.
b.
96A, Standard for Safety Installation Requirements for Lightning
Protection Systems.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide lightning protection system design for all of the following facilities:
1. New Treatment Building
2. Potable Storage Tank
3. New well house at well No.1, No.2, No.3, No.4, No.5 and No.6.
1.03
B.
The work includes, but is not limited to, furnishing and installing air terminals,
grounding conductors, connectors, fasteners, ground rods, and other materials
necessary for a complete protective system.
C.
Lightning protection system design to comply with all applicable provisions of
LPI 175 and 176, UL 96 and 96A, and NFPA 780.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CADD Drawings:
a.
Lightning protection system layout.
b.
Component locations.
Detailed plans.
Down conductor.
Connecting conductor.
Bond strap.
16670-1
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Quality Control Submittals:
1.
Field test report.
C.
Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit to OWNER:
1.
2.
3.
1.04
Air terminals.
Fittings.
Connectors.
Ground rods.
Ground Witness Certification-Form LPI-175A.
Post-Installation System Certification
UL 96 Master Label "C" Certification.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Designer: Lightning protection system design shall be prepared by an LPIcertified designer or recognized lightning protection manufacturer.
B.
Manufacturer: All system components shall be the product of a single
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of lightning protection
components in accordance with LPI 176 and UL 96.
C.
Installer: Lightning protection system shall be installed under the direct
supervision of an LPI 175 Certified Master Installer.
D.
Inspector: Final installation and grounding connection inspection of the System
shall be performed by the owner representative or agent in accordance with LPI
177.
E.
UL Compliance: Materials manufactured within scope of Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to UL Standards and have an applied UL listing
mark.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Thompson Lightning.
B.
IPC Protection.
C.
Erico Eritech Lightning Protection Systems.
16670-2
D.
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
GENERAL
A.
Complete system shall bear UL 96 Master Label C.
B.
System Material: Copper or high copper content, heavy-duty bronze castings,
unless otherwise specified.
C.
All material shall comply in weight, size, and composition for the class of
structure to be protected as established by UL 96 and 96A.
AIR TERMINAL
A.
Material: Solid copper rods, with tapered points.
B.
Length: Sufficient to extend minimum 10 inches above object being protected.
C.
UL 96 Label B applied to each terminal.
CONDUCTORS
A.
Copper Cable: Bare medium hard-drawn stranded copper or stranded aluminum as
required for the application, having 97.5 percent minimum conductivity.
B.
Main Down Conductor: Per UL and NFPA criteria and based on building height.
C.
Connecting Conductor: Secondary size per UL and NFPA criteria
D.
Bonding Conductor: Flexible strap, minimum 3/4-inch wide by 1/8-inch thick.
E.
All main down and connecting conductors shall bear the UL 96 Label A, applied
every 10 feet.
CABLE FASTENER AND ACCESSORIES
A.
2.06
Lightning & Grounding Systems, Inc.
Capable of withstanding minimum pull of 100 pounds.
FITTINGS
A.
Heavy-duty Class II bolt pressure type.
B.
Bolts, Screws, and Related Hardware: Stainless steel.
16670-3
2.07
GROUND RODS
A.
2.08
2.09
2.10
Material: Copper clad steel – 3/4” x 30’ long UL 469 listed..
GROUNDING CONNECTIONS
A.
Welds: Exothermic process.
B.
Fasteners: Bolted clamp type, corrosion-resistant copper alloy.
C.
Hardware: Stainless Steel.
CABLE CONNECTIONS AND SPLICERS
A.
Welds: Exothermic process (underground).
B.
Fasteners: Bolted clamp type, corrosion-resistant copper alloy (above grade).
C.
Through-Roof Connectors: Straight or right angle with lead flashing washer and
other appurtenances to match existing roofing system.
CONDUIT
A.
Schedule 40 PVC, as specified in Section 16110, RACEWAYS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
GENERAL
A.
Workmanship to comply with all applicable provisions of LPI 175, UL 96 and
96A, and NFPA 780.
B.
Installation of bare copper materials on aluminum surfaces will not be permitted.
C.
Provide waterproof seal of all roof penetrations.
D.
Install system in inconspicuous manner so that components blend with building
aesthetics.
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify conditions prior to installation. Actual conditions may require adjustments
in air terminal and ground rod locations.
16670-4
3.03
AIR TERMINALS
A.
Supports: Brackets or braces.
B.
Parapet Bracket Attachment: Lag or expansion bolts.
C.
Secure base to roof surface with adhesive or pitch compatible with roofing bond.
D.
Provide terminal flashing at roof penetrations.
E.
Perimeter Terminals:
1.
2.
3.04
F.
Roof Ridge Terminals: Maximum spacing 20 feet.
G.
Mid-Roof Terminals: Maximum spacing 50 feet.
CONDUCTORS
A.
Conceal whenever practical.
B.
Provide 1-inch PVC conduit in building walls or columns for main downleads and
roof risers.
C.
Support: Maximum spacing for exposed conductors.
1.
3.05
Maximum Spacing: 20 feet.
Maximum Distance From Outside Edge of Building: 2 feet.
Vertical and Horizontal: 3 feet.
D.
Maintain horizontal and vertical conductor courses free from dips or pockets.
E.
Bends: Maximum 90 degrees, with minimum 8-inch radius.
F.
Install air terminal conductors on the structural roof surface before roofing
composition is applied.
BONDING
A.
Bond to Main Conductor System:
1.
All roof mounted ventilators, fans, air handlers, masts, flues, cooling
towers, handrails, and other sizeable metal objects.
16670-5
2.
3.
3.06
B.
Bond steel columns or major framing members to grounding system per National
Electrical Code.
C.
Bond each main down conductor to grounding system.
GROUNDING SYSTEM
A.
Grounding Conductor:
1.
2.
3.
Completely encircle building structure.
Bury minimum 30” below finished grade.
Minimum 2 feet distance from foundation walls.
B.
Interconnect ground rods by direct-buried copper cables.
C.
Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.07
Roof flashing, gravel stops, insulation vents, ridge vents, roof drains, soil
pipe vents, and other small metal objects if located within 6 feet of main
conductors or another grounded object.
Provide air terminals as required.
Install ground cables continuous between connections.
Exothermic welded connections to ground rods, cable trays, structural
steel, handrails, and buried and nonaccessible connections.
Provide bolted clamp type mechanical connectors for all exposed
secondary connections.
Use bolded offset parapet bases or through-roof concealed base assemblies
for air terminal connections.
Provide interconnections with electrical and telephone systems and all
underground water and metal pipes.
Provide electric service arrestor ground wire to building water main.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Isolate lightning protection system from other ground conditions while performing
tests.
B.
Resistance: Test ground resistance of grounding system by the fall-of-potential
method.
1.
2.
Test Resistance to Ground: Maximum 5 ohms per National Electric Code.
Install additional ground rods as required to obtain maximum allowable
resistance. Demonstrate to the County that 5 ohms are obtained. County
shall witness the test.
16670-6
C.
Test Report:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Description of equipment tested.
Description of test.
Test results.
Conclusions and recommendations.
Appendix, including appropriate test forms.
Identification of test equipment used.
Signature of responsible test organization authority.
County witnessed 5-ohm test results.
END OF SECTION
16670-7
SECTION 16722
ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install, and place in satisfactory operation a complete,
addressable, microprocessor based fire detection and alarm system consisting of manual and
automatic initiating devices, notification appliances, control panel, surge suppression, line
isolators and all spare parts, accessories and appurtenances as herein specified and as shown
on the Drawings. System shall electrically supervise all wires and both the alarm initiating
devices and the audible and visual alarm devices. Contractor shall document the fire alarm
monitoring & installation and transfer the documents to the Owner after testing.
B. System is local only but central station monitoring will be required as stated on plans.
C. Fire alarm system is designed around manufacturer Notifier, Silent Knight, BCI, ADT,
Fike, or approved equal. If the CONTRACTOR chooses to use another manufacturer for
the designed system, the manufacturer shall secure the services of a Florida Registered
Professional Engineer to become Engineer-Of-Record and shall notify current Engineer-OfRecord in accordance with Chapter 61G15-27 of the Florida Administrative Code (FAC) of
assumption of the work. For the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), the
CONTRACTOR/Manufacturer/New Engineer-of-Record shall meet all permit
requirements, make all submittals necessary, resolve all issues, incorporate all comments,
perform all tests and inspections and pay all fees necessary for a complete, working
installation that is accepted by the AHJ.
D. Fire alarm system shall meet the following criteria:
1. System shall be power limited.
2. Secondary power shall be supplied by 24V DC batteries with capacity for 72 hours of
continuous standby operation followed by 15 minutes of operation in alarm condition.
3. Maximum voltage drop on 24V DC Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) circuits
shall not exceed the lowest rated voltage of all connected devices on that circuit.
4. Maximum voltage drop on 24V DC Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) circuits shall not
exceed the lowest rated voltage of all connected devices on that circuit.
5. Device locations and mounting heights shall be in accordance with ADA requirements.
6. All flashing strobe or horn/strobe notification appliances located within the same area
that can be seen in a 135° field of view and are within 55 feet of the next strobe or horn
strobe shall be synchronized.
16722-1
E.
Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be
encoded on NFPA Style 6 (Class A) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).
F.
Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style D) as part of an
addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit.
G. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style Z) as part of an
addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit.
H. On Style 7 (Class A) configurations a single ground fault or open circuit on the system
Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or the
ability to report an alarm.
I.
Alarm signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure (or
outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.
J.
The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under the
appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and the
installation shall be in compliance with the UL listing.
K. The CONTRACTOR shall employ NICET (minimum Level II Fire Alarm Technology)
technicians for installation on site and to guide the final checkout and to ensure the systems
integrity.
L.
The FACP shall communicate to the owners monitoring system via twisted pair cable tying
into the telephone system.
M. Contractor also shall provide 2-year pre-paid service contract with Central Monitoring
Services as part of this project for fire alarm system.
N. All necessary raceway/conduits and junction boxes shall be supplied by the Electrical
Contractor. Fire Alarm System shall be installed fire alarm system under the supervision of
the Electrical Contractor so that no additional low voltage permit is needed. Coordinate
with Electrical Contractor to meet all requirements to fall under the Electrical Contractor’s
low voltage permit before bidding. If Fire Alarm System Supplier does not meet the
requirements to fall under the Electrical Contractor’s low voltage permit, he/she shall
supply additional permit as needed with no additional cost to the Owner.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements
B. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
1.03
REFERENCES
16722-2
A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are part of this section
as specified and modified. In situations of conflict between the requirements of his section
and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
1. Florida Handicap Accessibility Code – Latest Edition.
2. UL – Underwriters Laboratories
3. NFPA 70 - 2011 National Electrical Code (NEC).
4. NFPA 72 - 2010 National Fire Alarm Code.
5. NFPA 101 – 2012 Life Safety Code.
6. UL 268 - Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
7. UL 268A – Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications.
8. UL 521 - Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
9. UL 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
10. UL 1971 – Visual Notification Appliances.
11. UL 464 - Audible Signaling Appliances.
12. UL 38 - Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes
13. UL 1481 - Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
14. Florida Building Code – 5th Edition
15. All Local Fire Codes.
16. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
1.04
WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all materials, equipment, labor, supervision and all related items necessary to
complete this phase of the work as indicated on the drawings and specifications, including
fire alarm control panel, manual stations, detectors, signal appliances and all other devices
as required. Supply and install all conduits and wiring as required. The fire alarm system
shall be complete and operable as required by the local Fire Marshall and state inspector.
1.05
DEFINITIONS
A. Alarm-Initiating Device: A manual station, smoke detector, heat detector, flame detector,
or sprinkler water-flow switch.
16722-3
B, Alarm Signal: Signifies a state of emergency requiring immediate action. Pertains to
signals such as the operation of an alarm-initiating device.
C. Class A Wiring: Circuits arranged and electrically supervised so a single break or single
ground fault condition will be indicated by a trouble signal at the fire alarm control panel
(FACP) and the circuit will continue to be capable of operation for its intended service in
the faulted condition no matter where the break or ground fault condition occurs.
D. Multiplex System: One using signaling method characterized by the simultaneous or
sequential transmission, or both, and the reception of multiple signals in a communication
channel, including means for positively identifying each signal.
E.
Notification Appliance: Audio and/or visual indicating device such as a strobe or
horn/strobe.
F.
Supervisory Signal: Indicates abnormal status or need for action regarding fire suppression
or other protective system.
G. Trouble Signal: Indicates that a fault, such as an open circuit or ground, has occurred in the
system.
H. SPD: Surge Protection Device
1.06
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Signal Transmission: Multiplex signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only.
B. Functional Description:
features:
The following are required system functions and operating
1. Priority of Signals: Accomplish automatic response functions by the first device
initiated. Alarm functions resulting from initiation by the first device are not altered by
subsequent alarms. The highest priority is an alarm signal. Supervisory and trouble
signals have second- and third-level priority. Signals of a higher-level priority take
precedence over signals of lower priority even though the lower-priority condition
occurred first. Annunciate all alarm signals regardless of priority or order received.
2. Non-interfering: Design, power, wire, and supervise the system so a signal one device
does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. All alarms are manually
resettable from the FACP after the initiating device or devices are restored to normal.
Systems that require the use of batteries or battery backup for the programming function
are not acceptable.
3. Signal Initiation: The manual or automatic operation of an alarm-initiating or
supervisory-operating device causes the FACP to activate all audible and visual alarm
devices. The signals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
16722-4
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Pull Station.
Smoke detector alarm.
Heat detector alarm.
System trouble.
Fire flow detection.
4. Silencing at FACP: Keypad provides capability for acknowledgment of alarms;
supervisory, trouble, and other specified signals at the FACP; and capability to silence
the local audible signal. Subsequent alarms cause the audible signal to sound again
until silenced in turn by keypad operation.
5. A single ground or open on any system signaling line circuit, initiating device circuit or
notification appliance circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating
power or the ability to report an alarm.
6. Loss of primary power at the FACP sounds trouble signal at the FACP. An emergency
power light is illuminated at both locations when the system is operating on an alternate
power supply.
7. Annunciation: Manual and automatic operation of alarm- and supervisory-initiating
devices is annunciated on the FACP indicating the location and type device.
8. Alarm: A system alarm includes:
a. Indicating the alarm condition at the FACP.
b. Identifying the device that is the source of the alarm at the FACP.
c. Initiating audible and visible alarm signals throughout the building.
d. Recording the event on the system printer.
9. Manual station alarm operation initiates an alarm.
10. Smoke detection initiates an alarm.
11. Duct smoke detectors or heat detectors (complete coverage) initiate alarm and air
handler or fan shutdown.
12. Alarm signals arriving at the main FACP shall not be lost following a power failure (or
outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.
13. Remote Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Manipulation of controls at the FACP causes
the selection of specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display of their
current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. The
same controls can be used to program repetitive, scheduled, automated changes in
sensitivity of specific detectors.
16722-5
14. Digitized electronic signals shall employ check digits or multiple polling.
15. Any device in the system may be enabled or disabled through the system keypad. Any
system output may be turned on or off from the system keypad.
16. Addressable devices shall provide an address-setting means using rotary decimal
switches.
17. Isolator modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short circuits on
a loop. The isolator module shall limit the number of modules or detectors that may be
rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the loop. If a wire-to-wire short occurs,
the isolator module shall automatically disconnect the loop. When the short circuit
condition is corrected, the isolator module shall automatically reconnect the isolated
section. The isolator module shall not require any address setting, and its operations
shall be totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator module
after normal operation.
C. Recording of Events: Record all alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Records are by
device, and function. When the FACP receives a signal, the alarm, supervisory, and trouble
conditions are stored. The record shall include the type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or
trouble) the device address, date, and the time of the occurrence. The record differentiates
alarm signals from all other printed, indications. When the system is reset, this event is also
recorded, including the same information concerning device, location, date, and time. A
command initiates the listing of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the
system.
1. Permissible Signal Time Elapse: The maximum permissible elapsed time between the
actuation of any fire alarm or fire-detection system alarm-initiating device and its
indication at the FACP is ten seconds.
2. Independent System Monitoring: Supervise each independent smoke detection system
and duct detector system for both normal operation and trouble.
3. Circuit Supervision: Indicate circuit faults by means of both a zone and a trouble signal
at the FACP. Provide a distinctive indicating audible tone and (LED) indicating light.
The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble condition and its
indication at the FACP is 200 seconds
1.07
SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
1. Eight copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review.
Shop drawings shall mirror design drawings for design and technical data, but not
necessarily in appearance.
16722-6
2. All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information herein
is intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality.
3. Equivalent compatible UL-listed equipment from other manufacturers may be
substituted for the specified equipment as long as the minimum standards are met.
4. For equipment other than that specified, the contractor shall supply proof that such
substitute equipment equals or exceeds the features, functions, performance, and quality
of the specified equipment.
5. Product data for system components. Include dimensioned plans and elevations showing
minimum clearances and installed features and devices. Include list of materials and
NRTL-listing data.
6. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer differentiating between factory- and field-installed
wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and
interconnections identified. Indicate components for both field and factory wiring.
7. System operation description covering this specific Project including method of
operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for all
manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard
descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
8. Operating instructions for mounting at the FACP.
9. Operation and maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual
specified in Division 1. Include data for each type product, including all features and
operating sequences, both automatic and manual. Include recommendations for spare
parts to be stocked at the site. Provide the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
service organizations that carry stock of repair parts for the system to be furnished.
10. Product certification signed by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system components
certifying that their products comply with indicated requirements.
11. Fire alarm shop drawings shall be approved by the AHJ prior to submittal for review
and approval of the Engineer. Shop drawings shall include, but shall not be limited to,
all of the following in compliance with the Florida Building Code:
(a) A floor plan that indicates the use of all rooms
(b) Locations of alarm-initiating devices
(c) Locations of alarm notification appliances, including candela ratings for visible alarm
notification appliances.
(d) Location of fire alarm control unit, transponders and notification power supplies.
16722-7
(e) Annunciators.
(f) Power connections.
(g) Battery calculations.
(h) Conductor types and sizes.
(i) Voltage drop calculations.
(j) Manufacturers’ data sheets indicating model numbers and listing information for
equipment, devices and materials.
(k) Details of ceiling height and construction.
(l) The interface of fire safety control functions.
(m) Classification of the supervising station.
12. Record of field tests of system.
1.08
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The fire alarm system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the NFPA Standard 72
“National Fire Alarm Code” and meet all the requirements of NEC 760. All equipment and
devices shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories or approved by the Factory Mutual
Laboratories.
B. Installation shall meet Class A requirements. Fire alarm system shall require supervision of
installation by authorized factory representative or agency.
C. After installation, the fire alarm system shall be balanced, checked, tested, operated and
certified in writing as operational by factory representative or agency. Test each smoke and
heat detector individually for operation.
D. Testing shall be performed in the presence of the plant chief operator and Fire Marshall, or
his designated assistant.
E.
Contractor shall obtain a written approval of the installed fire alarm system from the Fire
Chief and send one (1) copy to the Owner and one (1) copy to the Engineer.
F.
Installer Qualifications: A certified or qualified Installer is to perform the Work of this
Section.
G. Compliance With Local Requirements: Comply with the applicable building code, local
ordinances, and regulations, and the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.
H. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."
16722-8
I.
NFPA Compliance: Provide fire alarm and detection systems conforming to the
requirements of the following publications:
1. NFPA 72, "Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Protective Signaling Systems."
2. NFPA 72 Appendix B, "Automatic Fire Detectors."
J.
NRTL Listing: Provide systems and equipment that are listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article
100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
K. UL Compliance: Provide fire alarm systems and components that are UL-listed.
L.
Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain fire alarm components from a single source that
assumes responsibility for compatibility for system components.
M. Certifications:
1. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major
equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of the installation and
the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the
major equipment manufacturer. Include names and addresses in the certification.
1.09
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish extra materials, matching products installed (as described below), and
packaging with protective covering for storage, and identifying with labels clearly
describing contents.
B. Glass Rods for Manual Stations: Furnish quantity equal to 15 percent of the number of
manual stations installed: minimum of 6 rods.
C. Lamps for Strobe Units: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units
installed, but not less than one.
D. Smoke Detectors: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of the number of units of each type
installed but not less than one of each type.
E.
Detector Bases: Furnish quantity equal to 2 percent of the number of units of each type
installed but not less than one of each type.
16722-9
1.10
GUARANTY
A. All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be
free from defects and shall remain so for a period of one (1) year from the date of final
completion. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct any defect
during this one year period shall be included in the submittal bid.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. All equipment in the system shall be the product of a single manufacturer and shall be
marketed as a complete and functioning system. The addition of any components, systems
and/or panels required, but not a product of the manufacturer, shall require certification of
compatibility by the manufacturer.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Siemens: Cerberus, Faraday.
2. Edwards Company.
3. Fenwal, Inc.
4. Fire Alarm and Systems Technology, Inc.
5. Honeywell, Inc: Farenhyt, Silent Knight, Notifier, Fire Lite.
2.02
EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL
1. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The
materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally
recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protective signaling system, meeting
the National Fire Alarm Code.
2. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with
manufacturers' recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all
wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system
installation.
3. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held
firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings).
Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.
16722-10
4. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade, decimal address
switches. Devices shall be capable of being set to an address in a range of 001 to 127.
5. Addressable devices, which use a binary-coded address setting method, such as a DIPswitch, are not an allowable substitute.
6. Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wires
to the fire alarm control panel Signaling Line Circuits. Detectors shall use Flash Scan
technology.
7. Addressable devices shall store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall
use to identify the type of device.
B. MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
1. Main FACP shall be an intelligent analog/addressable fire control panel and shall
contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU) and power supply in an
economical space saving single board design. The CPU shall communicate with and
control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent
addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable modules and other system
controlled devices as shown on drawings.
2. Operator Control
a. Acknowledge Switch:
1. Activation of the control panel acknowledge switch in response to new alarms
and/or troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the
alarm and trouble LEDs from flashing mode to steady-ON mode. If multiple
alarm or trouble conditions exist, depression of this switch shall advance the
LCD display to the next alarm or trouble condition.
2. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annunciator
piezo sounders.
b. Alarm Silence Switch:
1. Activation of the alarm silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm
notification appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an
alarm condition. The FACP software shall include silence inhibit and autosilence timers.
c. Alarm Activate (Drill) Switch:
1. The Alarm Activate switch shall activate all notification appliance circuits. The
drill function shall latch until the panel is silenced or reset.
16722-11
d. System Reset Switch:
1. Activation of the System Reset switch shall cause all electronically-latched
initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output
devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition.
e. Lamp Test:
1. The Lamp Test switch shall activate all local system LEDs, light each segment
of the liquid crystal display and display the panel software revision for service
personal.
3. System Capacities and General Operation
a. The control panel shall provide, or be capable of a minimum of 127 SLC
intelligent/addressable devices.
b. The control panel shall include Form-C alarm, trouble, supervisory, and security
relays rated at a minimum of 2.5 amps @ 24 VDC. It shall also include four Class B
(NFPA Style Y) or two Class A (NFPA Style Z) programmable Notification
Appliance Circuits.
c. The system shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation
panel that shall include a backlit 80 character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD),
individual color coded system status LEDs, and an keypad with easy touch rubber
keys for the field programming and control of the fire alarm system.
d. The system shall be programmable, configurable, and expandable in the field
without the need for special tools, PROM programmers or PC based programmers.
It shall not require replacement of memory ICs to facilitate programming changes.
e. The system shall allow the programming of any input to activate any output or
group of outputs. Systems that have limited programming (such as general alarm),
have complicated programming (such as a diode matrix), or require a laptop
personal computer are not considered suitable substitutes.
f. The FACP shall provide the following features:
1. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. Drift compensation
shall also include a smoothing feature, allowing transient noise signals to be
filtered out.
2. Detector sensitivity test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72, Chapter 7.
3. Maintenance alert, with two levels (maintenance alert/maintenance urgent), to
warn of excessive smoke detector dirt or dust accumulation.
16722-12
4. The ability to display or print system reports.
5. Alarm verification, with counters and a trouble indication to alert maintenance
personnel when a detector enters verification 20 times.
6. PAS pre-signal, meeting NFPA 72 3-8.3 requirements.
7. Rapid manual station reporting (under 3 seconds) and shall meet NFPA 72
Chapter 1 requirements for activation of notification circuits within 10 seconds
of initiating device activation.
8. Periodic detector test, conducted automatically by the software.
9. Self-optimizing pre-alarm for advanced fire warning, which allows each detector
to learn its particular environment and set its pre-alarm level to just above
normal peaks.
10. Walk test, with a check for two detectors set to same address.
g. The FACP shall be capable of coding main panel node notification circuits in March
Time (120 PPM), Temporal (NFPA 72 A-2-2.2.2), and California Code. Panel
notification circuits (NAC 1, 2, 3 and 4) shall also support Two-Stage operation,
Canadian Dual Stage (3 minutes) and Canadian Dual Stage (5 minutes). Two stage
operation shall allow 20 Pulses Per Minute (PPM) on alarm and 120 PPM after 5
minutes or when a second device activates. Canadian Dual stage is the same as
Two-Stage except will only switch to second stage by activation of Drill Switch 3 or
5 minute timer. The panel shall also provide a coding option that will synchronize
specific strobe lights designed to accept a specific "sync pulse."
4. Central Microprocessor
a. The microprocessor shall be a state-of-the-art, high speed, 16-bit RISC device and it
shall communicate with, monitor and control all external interfaces. It shall include
an EPROM for system program storage, Flash memory for building-specific
program storage, and a "watch dog" timer circuit to detect and report microprocessor
failure.
b. The microprocessor shall contain and execute all control-by-event programs for
specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system. Controlby-event equations shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory, and shall
not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs.
c. The microprocessor shall also provide a real-time clock for time annotation of
system displays, printer, and history file. The time-of-day and date shall not be lost
if system primary and secondary power supplies fail. The real time clock may also
be used to control non-fire functions at programmed time-of-day, day-of-week, and
day-of-year.
16722-13
d. A special program check function shall be provided to detect common operator
errors.
e. An auto-program (self-learn) function shall be provided to quickly install initial
functions and make the system operational.
f. For flexibility and to ensure program validity, an optional Windows(TM) based
program utility shall be available. This program shall be used to off-line program the
system with batch upload/download, and have the ability to upgrade the
manufacturers (FLASH) system code changes. This program shall also have a
verification utility, which scans the program files, identifying possible errors. It shall
also have the ability to compare old program files to new ones, identifying
differences in the two files to allow complete testing of any system operating
changes. This shall be in incompliance with the NFPA 72 requirements for testing
after system modification.
5. System Display
a. The system shall support the following display mode options:
1. 80 character display option. The display shall include an 80-character backlit
alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
b. The display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the system operator:
1. The 80-character display shall include the following operator control switches:
ACKNOWLEDGE, ALARM SILENCE, ALARM ACTIVATE (drill),
SYSTEM RESET, and LAMP TEST.
c. The display shall annunciate status information and custom alphanumeric labels for
all intelligent detectors, addressable modules, internal panel circuits, and software
zones.
1. The display shall also provide Light-Emitting Diodes.
d. The 80-character display shall provide 8 Light-Emitting-Diodes (LEDs) that indicate
the status of the following system parameters: AC POWER, FIRE ALARM,
PREALARM WARNING, SECURITY ALARM, SUPERVISORY SIGNAL,
SYSTEM TROUBLE, DISABLED POINTS, and ALARM SILENCED.
e. The LCD-80 display:
1. This shall be part of the standard system and have the capability to command all
system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and field
programming. Two different password levels shall be provided to prevent
unauthorized system control or programming.
16722-14
f. The system shall support the display of battery charging current and voltage on the
80-character LCD display.
6. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC)
a. Each FACP shall support one SLC interface and shall provide power to and
communicate with intelligent detectors (ionization, photoelectric or thermal),
intelligent modules (monitor or control) for a loop capacity of 127 devices. Each
SLC shall be capable of NFPA 72 Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 (Class A or B) wiring.
b. CPU shall receive analog information from all intelligent detectors to be processed
to determine whether normal, alarm, pre-alarm, or trouble conditions exist for each
detector. The software shall automatically maintain the detector's desired sensitivity
level by adjusting for the effects of environmental factors, including the
accumulation of dust in each detector. The analog information shall also be used for
automatic detector testing and for the automatic determination of detector
maintenance requirements.
7. Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) Module
a. The Notification Appliance Circuit module shall provide four fully supervised Class
A or B (NFPA Style Z or Y) notification circuits.
b. The notification circuit capacity shall be 3.0 amperes maximum per circuit.
c. The module shall not affect other module circuits in any way during a short circuit
condition.
d. The module shall provide four green ON/OFF LEDs and four yellow trouble LEDs.
e. The module shall also provide a momentary switch per circuit that may be used to
manually turn the particular circuit on or off or to disable the circuit.
f. Each notification circuit shall have a custom label to identify each circuit's location.
g. The notification circuit module shall have terminal strips UL listed for use with up
to 12 AWG wire.
h. Each circuit shall be capable of, through system programming, deactivating upon
depression of the signal silence switch.
8. Control Relay Module
a. The control relay module assembly shall provide two Form-C auxiliary relay circuits
rated at 2.5 amperes, 24 VDC.
16722-15
b. Each relay circuit shall be capable of being activated (change in state) by any
initiating device or from any combination of initiating devices.
c. The module shall provide a momentary switch per relay circuit that may be used to
manually turn the relay ON/OFF or to disable the relay.
d. Each relay circuit shall include a custom label to identify its location.
e. The control relay module shall have terminal blocks UL listed for use with up to 12
AWG wire.
9. Enclosures:
a. The control panel shall be housed in a UL-listed cabinet suitable for surface or semiflush mounting. The cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rustresistant prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish.
b. The back box and door shall be constructed of 0.060 steel with provisions for
electrical conduit connections into the sides and top.
c. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent
opening, as applicable, for viewing of all indicators. For convenience, the door may
be site configured for either right or left hand hinging.
10. Power Supply:
a. A high tech off-line switching power supply shall be available for the fire alarm
control panel or network node and provide 6.0 amps of available power for the
control panel and peripheral devices.
b. Provisions will be made to allow the audio-visual power to be increased as required
by adding modular expansion audio-visual power supplies.
c. Positive-Temperature-Coefficient (PTC) thermistors, circuit breakers, or other overcurrent protection shall be provided on all power outputs. The power supply shall
provide an integral battery charger for use with batteries up to 33 AH or may be
used with an external battery and charger system. Battery arrangement may be
configured in the field.
d. The power supply shall continuously monitor all field wires for earth ground
conditions, and shall have the following LED indicators:
1) Ground Fault LED
2) AC Power Fail LED
3) NAC on indication
16722-16
e. The main power supply shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz, and shall provide all
necessary power for the FACP.
f. The main power supply shall provide a battery charger using dual-rate charging
techniques for fast battery recharge and be capable of charging batteries up to 33
AH.
g. All circuits shall be power-limited, per UL864 requirements.
11. Specific System Operations
a. Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: A means shall be provided for adjusting the
sensitivity of any, or all, addressable intelligent detectors in the system from the
system keypad. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL window.
b. Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable smoke detectors in the
system may be independently selected and enabled to be an alarm verified detector.
The alarm verification delay shall be programmable from 5 to 30 seconds and each
detector shall be able to be selected for verification.
c. The FACP shall keep a count of the number of times that each detector has entered
the verification cycle. These counters may be displayed and reset by the proper
operator commands.
d. Point Disable: Any addressable device or conventional circuit in the system may be
enabled or disabled through the system keypad.
e. Point Read: The system shall be able to display or print the following point status
diagnostic functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Device status
Device type
Custom device label
View analog detector values
Device zone assignments
All program parameters
f. System Status Reports: Upon command from an operator of the system, a status
report will be generated and printed, listing all system status.
g. System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall contain
a history buffer that will be capable of storing up to 200 events minimum. Up to 50
events shall be dedicated to alarm and the remaining events are general purpose.
Systems that do not have dedicated alarm storage, where events are overridden by
non-alarm type events, are not suitable substitutes. Each of these activations will be
stored and time and date stamped with the actual time of the activation. The
contents of the history buffer may be manually reviewed, one event at a time, or
16722-17
printed in its entirety. The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems
that use volatile memory for history storage are not acceptable substitutes.
h. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The fire alarm control panel shall
automatically interrogate each intelligent detector and shall analyze the detector
responses over a period of time. If any intelligent detector in the system responds
with a reading that is above or below normal limits, then the system will enter the
trouble mode, and the particular detector will be annunciated on the system display,
and printed on the optional printer. This feature shall in no way inhibit the receipt of
alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require any special hardware, special
tools or computer expertise to perform.
i. Pre-Alarm Function: The system shall provide two levels of pre-alarm warning to
give advance notice of a possible fire situation. Both pre-alarm levels shall be fully
field adjustable. The first level shall give an audible indication at the panel. The
second level shall give an audible indication and may also activate control relays.
The system shall also have the ability to activate local detector sounder bases at the
pre-alarm level, to assist in avoiding nuisance alarms.
j. Software Zones: The FACP shall provide 100 software zones, 10 additional special
function zones, 10 releasing zones, and 20 logic zones.
k. The fire alarm control panel shall include a walk test feature. It shall include the
ability to test initiating device circuits and notification appliance circuits from the
field without returning to the panel to reset the system. Operation shall be as
follows:
1. Alarming an initiating device shall activate programmed outputs, which are
selected to participate in walk test, for 3 seconds.
2. Introducing a trouble into the initiating device shall activate the programmed
outputs for 8 seconds.
3. All devices tested in walk test shall be recorded in the history buffer.
12. Supervisory Operation
a. An alarm from a supervisory device shall cause the appropriate indication on the
system display, light a common supervisory LED, but will not cause the system to
enter the trouble mode.
13. Signal Silence Operation
a. The FACP shall have the ability to program each output circuit (notification, relay,
speaker etc) to deactivate upon depression of the signal silence switch.
16722-18
C. INITIATING DEVICES
1. General: Comply with UL 268. Include the following features:
a. Factory Nameplate: Serial number and type identification.
b. Operating Voltage: 24-V DC, nominal.
c. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
d. Plug-In Arrangement: Detector and associated encapsulated electronic components
are mounted in a module that connects to a fixed base with a twist-locking plug
connection. The plug connection requires no springs for secure mounting and
contact maintenance. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring. Design
detector for mounting on interchangeable type base, capable of operating on either
2-wire or 4-wire loop. For Class A Style 7 systems, base shall contain internal
isolation so that no external isolation device is necessary.
e. Visual Indicator: Connected to indicate detector has operated. Provide flashing
LED indicator for normal operation, which changes to steady on alarm condition.
f. Addressability: Detectors include a communication transmitter and receiver having
a unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP.
g. Remote Controllability: Individually monitor detectors at the FACP for calibration,
sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjust for sensitivity from the
FACP.
i. Each of the intelligent addressable detector in the system may be independently
selected and enabled to be an alarm verified detector The FACP shall keep count of
the number of times each detector has entered the verification cycle. These counters
may be displayed and reset by the proper operator commands.
j. Detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow
environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be
listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA
Standard 72, Chapter 7.
k. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm
condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated
at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on
command from the control panel.
16722-19
l. Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures its
designed environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based on
real-time measured values.
2. Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
a. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5- and 3.5-percent-per-foot smoke obscuration
when tested according to UL 268.
b. Sensor: An infrared or LED light source with matching photo diode receiver.
c. Furnish with isolator integral to base for Class A Style 7.
3. Addressable Photoelectric Duct Smoke Detector:
a. Photoelectric-type, with sampling tube of design and dimensions as recommended
by the manufacturer for the specific duct size and installation conditions where
applied shall be used within the duct housing mounted in the proper location as per
NFPA 72 and 90A. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at
the FACP, and appropriate action taken to take over air handling systems to help
prevent the rapid distribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas
served by the duct system. Fan shutdown shall occur throughout the entire building
on a general basis. Duct sampling tubes shall extend the entire width of the A/C
ductwork. Remote test stations shall be provided for each duct mounted smoke
detector.
b. Furnish housing with detector, sampling tube and remote test switch. Coordinate
exact sampling tube size with HVAC.
4. Addressable Manual Pull Stations
a. Description: U.L. Listed, double-action or single action type, fabricated of metal or
plastic, and finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions of
contrasting color. Stations requiring the breaking of a glass panel are not acceptable.
Stations requiring the breaking of a concealed glass rod may be provided.
b. Station Reset: Key-operated, double-pole, double-throw, switch-rated for the
voltage and current at which it operates. The key shall operate a test-reset lock, and
shall be designed so after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to
normal use except by the use of a key.
c. Addressable pull stations shall on command from the control panel, send data to the
panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable
communication module status.
16722-20
d. Indoor general use: provide manufacturer’s standard unit. Outdoor, weather resistant
and corrosion resistant use: furnish a die cast metal manual pull station with
addressable monitor module.
D. NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
1. Horn/Strobe
a. Horn/strobe shall be UL 1971 and UL 464 listed, operates on 24VDC, and shall be
approved for fire protective service. Unit shall be wired as a primary signaling
notification appliance and shall comply with ADA requirements for visible
signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobes entire operating voltage
range. Operating voltage range shall be 17-33VDC.
b. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector
system. The horn shall be temporal 3 pattern at 24 VDC. Strobes shall be powered
independently of the sounder with the removal of factory installed jumper wires.
The horn shall operate on a coded or non-coded power supply.
c. Supply appliances rated for the conditions in which installation will take place.
Appliances to be used in outdoor, wet or corrosive locations shall have appropriate
materials of construction and degradation resistance.
2. Synchronization Module
a. Synchronization Module shall be UL 464 listed and shall be approved for fire
protective service. The unit shall synchronize strobes at 1 Hz and horns at temporal
3. Also, the module shall silence the horns on horn/strobe units, while operating the
strobes, over a single pair of wires. The module shall control two Class B (Style Y)
or one Class A (Style Z) circuit. Module shall be capable of multiple-zone
synchronizing by daisy chaining multiple modules together and re-synchronizing
each other along the chain.
E.
ACCESSORIES
1. Addressable Input Module
a. Addressable input modules shall be provided to connect one supervised alarm
initiating device circuit zone of conventional, dry contact, alarm initiating devices
(or single non-addressable conventional alarm initiating device) to one of the fire
alarm control panel SLC’S. Unit shall operate on Class A, Style 7. Unit shall fit in a
standard 4” square box.
b. The alarm-initiating device shall be suitable for Style D or Style B operation. An
LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the
monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.
16722-21
c. For difficult to reach areas, the input module shall be available in a miniature
package that shall fit in a single gang box.
2. Addressable Relay Module
a. Addressable Relay Module assemblies shall be used for HVAC control, elevator
recall, exhaust fan operation and other building functions. The relay shall be form C
and rated for a minimum of 2.0 Amps @ 30V DC or 0.6A @120VAC. The relay
coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to
insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or NAC’S may be energized at the same time
on the same pair of wires. Unit shall mount in a 4” square box.
3. Line Isolator Module
a. Line isolator modules shall isolate a short circuit fault on a Class A Style 7 SLC
without disrupting the communication on the remainder of the circuit. Unit shall
operate on mount in a standard 4” box.
4. Batteries
a. The battery shall be rechargeable sealed lead-acid type with sufficient capacity to
power the fire alarm system for not less than twenty-four hours plus five minutes of
alarm upon a normal AC power failure.
b. The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid
level checks for refilling, spills, and leakage shall not be required.
c. If necessary to meet standby requirements, external battery and charger systems may
be used.
d. Battery enclosures shall be ventilated if necessary to meet standby requirements.
e. Provide material safety data sheets for all batteries supplied.
5. Surge Suppression Device (SPD)
a. SPD protection shall be provided to protect the electronic components from induced
surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines. The protection systems
shall be such that the protective level shall not interfere with normal operation, but
shall be lower than the device surge withstand level, and be maintenance free and
self-restoring.
b. Devices shall be housed in a suitable case, properly grounded. Ground wires for all
SPD’s shall be connected to the building grounding counterpoise and where
practical, each ground wire run individually and insulated from each other. These
protectors shall be mounted within the device enclosure or a separate junction box
next to the enclosure.
16722-22
c. Power Supply:
1. Protection of all 120 VAC FACP power supply lines shall be provided.
d. Signal Line and Notification Appliance Circuits
1. Protection of SLCs and NACs originating and terminating not in the same
building shall be provided by TVSS.
2.03
CONDUIT AND WIRE:
A. Conduit:
1. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and
state requirements.
2. All conductors shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40
percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a
single conduit.
3. Fire alarm conductors shall be separate from any open conductors of power, or Class 1
circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing
these types of conductors, per NEC Article 760-29.
4. Wiring for 24 volt DC control, alarm notification, emergency communication and
similar power-limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating
and signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression
devices and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits
without interference or loss of signals.
5. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted
control panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the
FACP manufacturer.
6. Conduit shall be 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) minimum painted red.
7. Exposed conduits installed indoors shall be as per specification 16110.
B. Wire:
1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new.
2. Wiring shall be in accordance with state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and
as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of
conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less
than 16 AWG (1.29 mm) for Initiating Device Circuits and Signaling Line Circuits, and
14 AWG (1.63 mm) for Notification Appliance Circuits.
16722-23
3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use
with a protective signaling system.
4. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and
unshielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 6,000 feet. The design of the
system shall permit use of NAC wiring in the same conduit with the SLC
communication circuit.
5. All field wiring shall be electrically supervised for open circuit and ground fault.
6. Class A: 4-wire initiating and 2-wire alarm indicating circuits with electrical supervision
for shorts and open conditions.
C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets:
1. All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose. All junction boxes
must be painted red and identified as fire alarm.
2. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, waterflow).
Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits
connected to intelligent reporting devices.
3. The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit,
minimum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution panel
as FIRE ALARM. Fire alarm control panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG.
The control panel cabinet shall be grounded securely to either a cold water pipe or
grounding rod.
4. Provide basic wiring materials that comply with Division 16.
2.04.
TAGS
A. Tags For Identifying Tested Components: Comply with NFPA 72.
B. Test Chart Instructions: Provide fire alarm system test instructions chart mounted in lexan
enclosed frame assembly on control cabinet hinged door or adjacent to control panel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, Local County and state codes,
as shown on the drawings, and per the major equipment manufacturer specifications.
B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished
areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior
to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period,
16722-24
measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical
damage.
C. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be
flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in
unfinished areas.
D. Manual pull stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi-flush mounting as
shown on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1067 mm), nor more than
48 inches (122 mm) above the finished floor.
E.
Install in accordance with plans and supplier’s data sheets. Provide “as-built” data to
Engineer upon completion.
F.
After installation, the fire alarm system shall be balanced, checked, operated and certified in
writing as operational by factory representative or agency. Certify by letter that system is
installed in accordance with data sheets and conforms to plans and specifications.
CONTRACTOR shall obtain a written approval of the installed fire alarm system from the
Fire Chief and send one (1) copy to the Owner and one (1) copy to the Engineer.
G. Installation and maintenance manuals shall be provided on all components and the system.
H. Number, size and type of wires shall be as specified by Equipment Manufacturer. Conduit
type and size shall be as per NEC.
G. Submit as-built drawings including, but not limited to, dimensional drawings, installation
instructions, operation instructions, and wiring diagram for all fire alarm equipment and
wiring diagrams for all fire alarm equipment and wiring.
I.
3.02
Fire Alarm Power Supply Disconnect: Paint red and label "FIRE ALARM." Provide with
lockable handle or cover.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semi-flush in recessed back boxes with operating handles in
accordance with ADA requirements.
B. Smoke Detectors: Install ceiling-mounted detectors not less than 4 inches from a sidewall to
the near edge. Install detectors located on the wall at least 4 inches but not more than 12
inches below the ceiling. For exposed solid joist construction, mount detectors on the
bottoms of the joists. On smooth ceilings, install detectors not over 30 feet apart in any
direction. Install detectors no closer than 5 feet from air registers. Detectors installed in
suspended ceiling tiles shall be supported from structure above using T-bar hangers per
NEC article 300.
C. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 80 inches above the finished floor
nor less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back
16722-25
boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille or as indicated.
Combine audible and visual alarms at the same location into a single unit. In process areas,
mounting height shall be between 80 inches and 96 inches as necessary depending upon
process equipment layout.
D. Visual Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and not
less than 80 inches above the finished floor and at least 6 inches below the ceiling. In
process areas, mounting height shall be between 80 inches and 96 inches as necessary
depending upon process equipment layout.
E.
Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in the public space immediately adjacent to the
device they monitor.
F.
Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) and/or Remote Annunciator Panel: Surface mount with
tops of cabinets not more than 6 feet above the finished floor.
3.03
WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 16 Section
"Raceways." Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated.
B. Wiring Within Enclosures: Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to the sides and
back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to terminal points with no
excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure
associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to
the wiring diagrams of the system. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal
spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull or outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where any circuit tap is made.
D. System Wiring: For the low-voltage portion of the fire alarm system, install No. 18 VNTC
conductors for SLC and 75-deg C THWN insulation in wet or damp locations. For NAC
wiring, install No. 12 AWG THWN with insulation rated 75 deg C minimum in wet or
damp locations.
E.
3.04
Risers: Install at least 2 vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers
in close proximity to each other with a minimum two-hour-rated wall or a minimum of 10
feet of separation, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of
signal from other floors or zones.
GROUNDING
A. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. Provide 5-ohm ground at main
equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance.
3.05
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
16722-26
A. Manufacturer's Field Services:
Provide services of a factory-authorized service
representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system.
B. Pre-testing: Upon completing installation of the system, align, adjust, and balance the
system and perform complete pre-testing. Determine, through pre-testing, the conformance
of the system to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies
observed in pre-testing. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new and retest
until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic
recording of acceptance test results.
C. Report of Pre-testing: After pre-testing is complete, provide a letter certifying the
installation is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of the witnesses to
the preliminary tests.
D. Final Test Notice: Provide a 10-day minimum notice in writing when the system is ready
for final acceptance testing.
E.
Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to the procedures outlined in NFPA 72
Chapter 7. All testing shall be completed by a factory-trained/certified technician
authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall
technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system.
All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 7 and shall meet all city
requirements to the satisfaction of the Fire Marshall. Minimum required tests are as follows:
1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground.
2. Megger test all conductors other than those intentionally and permanently grounded
with electronic components disconnected. Test for resistance to ground and conductor
to conductor. Report readings less than 100-megohm for evaluation.
3. Test all conductors for short circuits utilizing an insulation-testing device.
4. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit
resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on the record
drawings.
5. Verify the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's
operating and maintenance manual.
6. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit
conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of the
initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class
of wiring used.
7. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at the
control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.
16722-27
8. Test the system for all specified functions according to the manufacturer's operating and
maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at
each station including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all
communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all system
devices, affected by the item, under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights,
displays, signal tones, and annunciator indications. Observe all voice audio for routing,
clarity, and quality, freedom from noise and distortion, and proper volume level.
9. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the secondary power
system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified.
10. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
11. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
12. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.
13. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
14. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.
15. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using
the walk test.
F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by
such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications
and complies with applicable standards.
G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed
test results in the form of a test log. Submit log upon the satisfactory completion of tests.
H. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily
completed.
3.06
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and
mars of finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials
recommended by the manufacturer.
B.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels and adjusting controls and
sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to the site for this
purpose.
16722-28
3.07
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate the
system and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in
operating, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintaining of the system.
Provide a minimum 2 4-hour training sessions.
2. Schedule training with the Owner at least seven days in advance
3.08 . WARRANTY
A. Provide (3) Three years on all related components.
3.09 MAINTENANCE & TESTING CERTIFICATION AGREEMENT
A.
Provide in bid a (5) Five year Maintenance and Testing Certification Agreement
covering full maintenance and recommended system testing on an annual basis for the
period of the agreement.
B. Maintenance Agreement shall provide 24 Hour on call maintenance for the period of
the agreement.
END OF SECTION
16722-29
SECTION 16950
ELECTRICAL TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
REFERENCES
A.
The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1.
2.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a.
450, Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and
Replacement of Large lead Storage Batteries for Generator Stations
and Substations.
b.
C2, National Electrical Safety Code.
c.
C37.20.1, Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
Switchgear.
d.
C37.20.2, Metal-Clad and Station-Type Cubicle Switchgear.
e.
C37.20.3, Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear.
f.
C62.33, Standard Test Specifications for Varistor Surge- Protective
Devices.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a.
D665, Standard Test Method for Rust Preventing Characteristics of
Inhibited Mineral Oil in the Presence of Water.
b.
DS77, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of
Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes.
c.
D923, Standard Test Method for Sampling Electrical Insulating
Liquids.
d.
D924, Standard Test Methods for A-Class Characteristics and
Relative Permittivity (Dielectric Constant) of Electrical Insulating
Liquids.
e.
D971, Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of 0.1 Against
Water by the Ring Method.
f.
D974, Standard Test Method for Acid and Base Number by ColorIndicator Titration.
g.
D1298, Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density
(Specific Gravity), or API Gravity of Crude Petroleum and Liquid
Petroleum Products by Hydrometer Method.
h.
D1500, Standard Test Method for ASTM Color of Petroleum
Products.
i.
D1524, Standard Test Method for Visual Examination of Used
Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin in the Field.
j.
D1533, Standard Test Methods for Water in Insulating Liquids.
16950-1
k.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.02
D1816, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage
of Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin Using VDE Electrodes.
l.
D2285, Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Electrical
Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin Against Water by the DropWeight Method.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a.
43, Recommended Practice for Testing Insulating Resistance of
Rotating Machinery.
b.
48, Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for High-Voltage
Alternating-Current Cable Terminators.
c.
81, Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance,
and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System.
d.
95, Recommended Practice for Insulation Testing of Large AC
Rotating Machinery with High Direct Voltage.
e.
118, Standard Test Code for Resistance Measurement.
f.
400, Guide for Making High-Direct-Voltage Tests on Power
Cable Systems in the Field.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
AB 4, Guideline for Inspection and Preventive Maintenance of
Molded Case Circuit Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial
Applications.
b.
PB 2, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.
c.
WC 7, Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene- Wire
and
Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical
Energy.
d.
WC 8, Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for
the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.
International Electrical Testing Association (NETA): ATS, Acceptance
Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
Systems.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a.
70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
b.
70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Administrative Submittals: Submit 30 days prior to performing inspections or
tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Schedule for performing inspection and tests.
List of references to be used for each test.
Sample copy of equipment and materials inspection form(s).
Sample copy of individual device test form.
Sample copy of individual system test form.
16950-2
B.
Quality Control Submittals: Submit within 30 days after completion of test:
1.
C.
Contract Closeout Submittals:
1.
1.03
Test or inspection reports and certificates for each electrical item tested.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
a.
In accordance with Section 01730, OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE DATA.
b.
After test or inspection reports and certificates have been reviewed
by ENGINEER and returned, insert a copy of each in operation and
maintenance manual.
QUALITY' ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Firm Qualifications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as an
unbiased testing authority.
Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers, of
electrical equipment and systems being tested.
Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing and
inspecting of electrical equipment, installations, and systems.
Supervising engineer accredited as Certified Electrical Test Technologist
by National Institute for Certification of Engineering Technologists
(NICET), or International Electrical Testing Association and having a
minimum of 5 years testing experience on similar projects.
Technicians certified by NICET or NETA.
Assistants and apprentices assigned to project at ratio not to exceed two
certified to one noncertified assistant or apprentice.
Registered Professional Engineer to provide comprehensive project report
outlining services performed, results of such services, recommendations,
actions taken, and opinions.
In compliance with OSHA Title 29, Part 1907 criteria for accreditation of
testing laboratories or a full Member Company of International Electrical
Testing Association.
B.
Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to, or greater than,
requirements established by NETA ATS.
C.
Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS.
16950-3
1.04
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment has been installed.
B.
Perform tests with apparatus de-energized whenever feasible.
C.
Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment are to be:
1.
2.
Scheduled with OWNER prior to de-energization.
Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the operating
plant equipment.
D.
Notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing with a minimum of 7 days’ notice
prior to performing tests
E.
All testing reports to be submitted to OWNER and ENGINEER for review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Tests specified in this section are to be performed in accordance with the
requirements of Section 01650, FACILITY STARTUP.
B.
Tests and inspection shall establish that:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's
tolerances.
Installation operates properly.
Equipment is suitable for energization.
Installation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents and
NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, and ANSI C2.
C.
Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETA ATS, industry
standards, and manufacturer's recommendations.
D.
Set, test, and calibrate protective relays, circuit breakers, fuses, and other
applicable devices in accordance with values established by the short circuit and
coordination study as specified in Section 16015, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
ANALYSIS.
16950-4
E.
Adjust mechanisms and moving parts for free mechanical movement.
F.
Adjust adjustable relays and sensors to correspond to operating conditions, or as
recommended by manufacturer.
G.
Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents.
H.
Realign equipment not properly aligned and correct unlevelness.
I.
Properly anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored.
J.
Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with
calibrated torque wrench to manufacturer's recommendations, or as otherwise
specified.
K.
L.
Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by
manufacturer.
Provide proper lubrication of applicable moving parts.
M.
Inform ENGINEER of working clearances not in accordance with NFPA 70.
N.
Investigate and repair or replace:
1.
2.
3.
O.
Electrical items that fail tests.
Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
Damaged electrical equipment.
Electrical Enclosures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior.
Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior.
Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces.
Repair or replace, as determined by ENGINEER, door and panel sections
having dented surfaces.
Repair or replace, as determined by ENGINEER, poor fitting doors and
panel sections.
Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking
devices.
Replace missing or damaged hardware.
Finish:
a.
Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and mars.
b.
If required due to extensive damage, as determined by
ENGINEER, refinish the entire assembly.
16950-5
3.02
P.
Replace fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and type required
by the Contract Documents.
Q.
Replace transformer insulating oil not in compliance with ASTM D923.
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
3.03
Physical and insulator damage.
Proper winding connections.
Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10.1, unless
otherwise specified by manufacturer.
Defective wiring.
Proper operation of fans, indicators, and auxiliary devices.
Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing.
Free and properly installed resilient mounts.
Cleanliness and improper blockage of ventilation passages.
Verify that tap-changer is set at correct ratio for rated output voltage under
normal operating conditions.
Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground after
energization and prior to loading.
Insulation Resistance Tests:
a.
Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS,
Table 7.2.3 for each:
1)
Winding-to-winding.
2)
Winding-to-ground,
b.
l0-minute test duration with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1
minute, and 10 minutes.
c.
Results temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS,
Table 7.2.4.
d.
Temperature corrected insulation resistance values equal to, or
greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer.
e.
Insulation resistance test results to compare within 1 percent of
adjacent windings.
Perform tests and adjustments for fans, controls, and alarm functions as
suggested by manufacturer.
LOW VOLTAGE CABLES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
16950-6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Electrical Tests for Conductors No. 6 and Larger:
1.
2.
3.04
Inspect Each Individual Exposed Power Cable No. 6 and Larger For:
a.
Physical damage.
b.
Proper connections in accordance with single-line diagram.
c.
Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer's minimum
allowable bending radius where applicable.
d.
Color coding conformance with specifications.
e.
Proper circuit identification.
Mechanical Connections For:
a.
Proper lug type for conductor material.
b.
Proper lug installation.
c.
Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10. 1,
unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.
Shielded Instrumentation Cables For:
a.
Proper shield grounding.
b.
Proper terminations.
c.
Proper circuit identification.
Control Cables For:
a.
Proper termination.
b.
Proper circuit identification.
Cables Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify that neutrals and
grounds are terminated for correct operation of protective devices.
Insulation Resistance Tests:
a.
Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent
conductors per IEEE 118 procedures for 1 minute.
b.
Evaluate ohmic values by comparison with conductors of same
length and type.
c.
Investigate values less than 50 megohms.
d.
Utilize 1,000V dc megohmmeter for 600V insulated conductors.
Continuity test by ohmmeter method to ensure proper cable connections.
SAFETY SWITCHES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Proper blade pressure and alignment.
Proper operation of switch operating handle.
Adequate mechanical support for each fuse.
Proper contact-to-contact tightness between fuse clip and fuse.
Cable connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table
10.1.
Proper phase barrier material and installation.
Verify that fuse sizes and types correspond to one-line diagram.
16950-7
8.
B.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
3.05
Perform mechanical operational test and verify electrical and mechanical
interlocking system operation and sequencing.
Insulation Resistance Tests:
a.
Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS,
Table 10.2.
b.
Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each pole.
c.
Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values
established by manufacturer.
Contact Resistance Tests:
a.
Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade and fuse
holder.
b.
Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles or
similar switches.
MOLDED AND INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
B.
General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated 70 amperes and
larger and to motor circuit protector breakers rated 50 amperes and larger.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Proper mounting.
Proper conductor size.
Feeder designation according to nameplate and one-line diagram.
Cracked casings.
Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10.1.
Operate breaker to verify smooth operation.
Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or oneline diagram.
Verify that terminals are suitable for 75 degrees C rated insulated
conductors.
Electrical Tests:
1.
Insulation Resistance Tests:
a.
Utilize 1,000-volt dc meg-ohmmeter for 480- and 600-volt circuit
breakers and 500-volt dc meg-ohmmeter for 240-volt circuit
breakers.
b.
Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for 1
minute.
c.
Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for 1
minute.
d.
Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 10.2.
16950-8
2.
3.
3.06
Contact Resistance Tests:
a.
Contact resistance in micro-ohms across each pole.
b.
Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles
and similar breakers.
Primary Current Injection Test to Verify:
a.
Long-time minimum pickup and delay.
b.
Short-time pickup and delay.
c.
Ground fault pickup and delay.
d.
Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method.
e.
Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall be within
manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance
band, including adjustment factors.
f.
Trip times shall be within limits established by NEMA AB 4,
Table 5-3.
g.
Instantaneous pickup value shall be within values established by
NEMA AB 4, Table 5-4.
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Visually Check Current, Potential, and Control Transformers For:
a.
Cracked insulation.
b.
Broken leads or defective wiring.
c.
Proper connections.
d.
Adequate clearances between primary and secondary circuit
wiring.
Verify Mechanically That:
a.
Grounding and shorting connections have good contact.
b.
Withdrawal mechanism and grounding operation, when applicable,
operate properly.
Verify proper primary and secondary fuse sizes for potential transformers.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
Current Transformer Tests:
a.
Insulation resistance test of transformer and wiring-to-ground at
1,000 volts dc for 30 seconds.
b.
Polarity test.
Potential Transformer Tests:
a.
Insulation resistance test at test voltages in accordance with NETA
ATS, Table 7.1.1 for 1 minute on:
1)
Winding-to-winding.
2)
Winding-to-ground.
16950-9
b.
3.
3.07
METERING
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.08
Polarity test to verify polarity marks or H1-X1 relationship as
applicable.
Insulation resistance measurement on instrument transformer shall not be
less than that shown in NETA ATS, Table 7.1.1.
Verify meter connections in accordance with appropriate diagrams.
Verify meter multipliers.
Verify that meter types and scales conform to Contract Documents.
Check calibration of meters at cardinal points.
Check calibration of electrical transducers.
GROUNDING SYSTEMS
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Equipment and circuit grounds in motor control centers, panel boards,
switchboards, and switchgear assemblies for proper connection and
tightness.
Ground bus connections in motor control centers, panel boards,
switchboards, and switchgear assemblies for proper termination and
tightness.
Effective transformer core and equipment grounding.
Accessible connections to grounding electrodes for proper fit and
tightness.
Accessible exothermic-weld grounding connections to verify that molds
were fully filled and proper bonding was obtained.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
Fall-Of-Potential Test:
a.
In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.5 for measurement of
main ground system's resistance.
b, Main ground electrode system resistance to ground to be no greater
than 5 ohms.
Two-Point Direct Method Test:
a.
In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2. 1.1 for measurement of
ground resistance between main ground system, equipment
frames, and system neutral and derived neutral points.
b.
Equipment ground resistance shall not exceed main ground
system resistance by 0.50 ohm.
16950-10
3.09
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
A.
General: Inspection and testing limited to motors rated 5 horsepower and larger.
B.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Proper electrical and grounding connections.
Shaft alignment.
Blockage of ventilating air passageways.
Operate Motor and Check For:
a.
Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
b.
Overheating.
c.
Correct rotation.
d.
Check vibration detectors, resistance temperature detectors, or
motor inherent protectors for functionality and proper operation.
e.
Excessive vibration.
Check operation of space heaters.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Insulation Resistance Tests:
a.
In accordance with IEEE 43 at test voltages established by
NETA ATS, Table 10.2 for:
1)
Motors above 200 horsepower for l0-minute duration with
resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10
minutes.
2)
Motors 200 horsepower and less for 1-minute duration with
resistances tabulated at 30 and 60 seconds.
b.
Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values
established by manufacturers.
Calculate polarization index ratios for motors above 200 horsepower.
Investigate index ratios less than 1.5 for Class A insulation and 2.0 for
Class B insulation.
Insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
Measure running current and voltage, and evaluate relative to load
conditions and nameplate full-load amperes.
Over potential Tests:
a.
Applied dc voltage in accordance with IEEE 95.
b.
Limited to 4,000-volt motors rated 1,000 horsepower and greater.
c.
Test results evaluated on pass/fail basis.
16950-11
3.10
SWITCHGEAR AUTOMATIC TRANSFER
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Check doors and panels for proper interlocking.
Check connections for high resistance by low resistance ohmmeter.
Check positive mechanical and electrical interlock between normal and
alternate sources.
Check for Proper Operation:
a.
Manual transfer function switch.
b.
Generator under load and non-load conditions.
c.
Auto-exerciser of generator under load and no-load conditions.
Verify settings and operation of control devices.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Insulation Resistance Tests:
a.
Applied meg-ohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA
ATS, Table 10.2 for each phase with switch CLOSED in both
source positions.
b.
Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute.
c.
Test values in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
Contact Resistance Test:
a.
Contact resistance in micro-ohms across each switch blade for both
source positions.
b.
Investigate values exceeding 500 micro-ohms.
c.
Investigate values deviating from adjacent pole by more than 50
percent.
Set and Calibrate in Accordance with Specifications:
a. Voltage and frequency sensing relays.
b.
Time delay relays.
c.
Engine start and shutdown relays.
Perform Automatic Transfer Tests By:
a.
Simulating loss of normal power.
b.
Return to normal power.
c.
Simulating loss of alternate power.
d.
Simulating single-phase conditions for normal and alternate
sources.
Monitor and Verify Operation and Timing Of:
a. Normal and alternate voltage sensing relays.
b.
Engine start sequence.
c.
Timing delay upon transfer and retransfer.
d.
Engine cool down and shutdown.
e.
Interlocks and limit switch functions.
f.
Engine cool down and shutdown feature.
16950-12
3.11
BATTERY SYSTEM
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
3.
3.12
Physical damage and electrolyte leakage.
Evidence of corrosion.
Intercell bus link integrity.
Battery cable insulation damage and contaminated surfaces.
Operating conditions of ventilating equipment.
Visual check of electrolyte level.
Measure:
a.
Bank charging voltage.
b.
Individual cell voltage.
c.
Electrolyte specific gravity in each cell.
d.
Measured test values to be in accordance with manufacturer's
published data.
Verify During Recharge Mode:
a.
Charging rates from charger.
b.
Individual cell acceptance of charge.
Load tests for integrity and capacity; test values in accordance with ANSI
450.
LOW VOLTAGE SURGE ARRESTORS
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1.
2.
B.
Adequate clearances between arrestors and enclosures.
Ground connections to ground bus or electrode.
Electrical Tests:
1.
Varistor Type Arrestors:
a.
Clamping voltage test.
b.
Rated RMS voltage test.
c.
Rated dc voltage test.
d.
Variator arrester test values in accordance with ANSI C62.33,
Sections 4.4 and 4.7.
16950-13
3.13
STANDBY AND EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEMS
A.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Proper grounding via neutral grounding resistor.
Blockage of ventilating passageways.
Proper operation of jack water heaters.
Integrity of engine cooling and fuel supply systems.
Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
Overheating of engine or generator.
Proper installation of vibration isolators.
Proper cooling liquid type and level.
Operate Engine-Generator and Check For:
a.
Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
b.
Overheating.
c.
Correct rotation.
d.
Check resistance temperature detectors or generator inherent
thermal protectors for functionability and proper operation.
e.
Excessive vibration.
Verify that voltage regulator and governor operation will cause unit speed
and output voltage to stabilize at proper values within reasonable length of
time.
Proper operation of meters and instruments.
Compare generator nameplate rating and connection with one-line
diagram.
Verify engine-generator operation with adjustable frequency drives
energized and operating under normal load conditions.
Electrical and Mechanical Tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cold start test by interrupting normal power source with test load
consisting of connected building load to verify:
a.
Transfer switch operation.
b.
Automatic starting operation.
c.
Operating ability of engine-generator.
d.
Overcurrent devices capability to withstand inrush currents.
Phase rotation tests.
Test Engine Protective Shutdown Features For:
a.
Low oil pressure.
b.
Overtemperature.
c.
Overspeed.
Vibration base-line test on generator sets rated above 250 kW; levels in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
16950-14
5.
6.
3.14
Load bank test with reactors and resistors adjusted to 80 percent power
factor for each load step. Record voltage, frequency, load current, oil
pressure, and engine coolant temperature at 15-minute intervals:
a.
25 percent applied load for 30 minutes.
b.
50 percent applied load for 30 minutes.
c.
75 percent applied load for 30 minutes.
d.
100 percent applied load for 3 hours.
e.
Load test results to demonstrate ability of unit to deliver rated load
for test period.
One-Step Rated kW Load Pickup Test:
a.
Perform test immediately after performing load bank test.
b.
Apply rated load, minus largest rated horsepower motor, to
generator.
c.
Start largest rated horsepower motor and record voltage drop for 20
cycles minimum with high-speed chart recorder or digital storage
oscilloscope.
d.
Compare voltage drop with maximum allowable voltage dip for
specified starting situation.
THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY
A.
Provide a thermo-graphic survey of connections associated with incoming service
conductors, bus work, and branch feeder conductors No. 2 and larger at each:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Medium voltage switchgear and transformer.
Switchboard.
Low voltage motor control center.
Panel board.
Provide a thermo-graphic survey of feeder conductors No. 2 and larger
terminating at:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Motors rated 30 horsepower and larger.
Medium and low voltage disconnect switches.
Transfer switches.
Engine-generators.
C.
Remove necessary enclosure metal panels and covers prior to performing survey.
D.
Perform with equipment energized during periods of maximum possible loading.
E.
Do not perform survey on equipment operating at less than 20 percent of rated
connected operating load.
16950-15
F.
Utilize Thermo-graphic Equipment Capable Of:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Temperature Gradients Of:
1.
2.
3.
H.
3 degrees C to 7 degrees C indicates possible deficiency that warrants
investigation.
7 degrees C to 15 degrees C indicates deficiency that is to be corrected as
time permits.
16 degrees C and above indicates deficiency that is to be corrected
immediately.
Provide Written Report Of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.15
Detecting emitted radiation.
Converting detected radiation to visual signal.
Detecting 1 degree C temperature difference between subject area and
reference point of 30 degrees C.
Areas surveyed and the resultant temperature gradients.
Locations of areas having temperature gradients of 3 degrees C or greater.
Cause of heat rise and actions taken to correct the cause of heat rise.
Detected phase unbalance.
MEDIUM VOLTAGE TESTING
A. All medium voltage testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency and
shall provide a certified copy of all test results to the OWNER.
B. Engage the services of a recognized independent testing firm to inspect and test the
installed equipment prior to energizing. The testing firm shall provide all material,
labor, equipment and technical supervision to perform the tests and inspection. Notify
the ENGINEER at least two weeks prior to scheduling any testing.
C. Equipment testing and inspection shall be performed before energizing the switchgear
in accordance with the latest NETA Standard ATS and shall include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Visual and mechanical inspection.
Phasing check.
Ratio and polarity tests on current and voltage transformers.
Ground resistance test.
Current injection test on each circuit.
Insulation resistance tests (phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground).
Over potential test on each bus section (phase-to-ground).
Meter calibration.
Circuit breaker contact resistance test.
16950-16
j. Insulation power factor and resistance test for surge arresters.
D. In the event of an equipment fault, notify the ENGINEER immediately. After the
cause of the fault has been identified and corrected, a joint inspection of the
equipment shall be conducted by the CONTRACTOR, the ENGINEER, the OWNER
and the equipment manufactures factory service technician. Repair of replace the
equipment as directed by the ENGINEER and OWNER prior to placing the
equipment back into service.
E. Adjustment:
a. The switchgear manufacturer shall provide the services of a factory trained
service technician for 16 hours. The first trip shall be coordinated with the
field testing. The second trip shall include any necessary follow-up or punch
list work, and technical instruction for the OWNER’S designated personnel.
The manufacturer’s service technician shall demonstrate all operational
features of the installed switchgear.
i. As part of demonstration the operational features, utility power loss
shall be done on an individual phase basis, in addition to all three
phases.
b. The switchgear manufacturers factory service technician shall make the
following test and adjustments:
i. Calibrate and test all protective relays and controls.
ii. Adjust and lubricate circuit breaker operating mechanisms and
contacts.
END OF SECTION
16950-17
Download PDF

advertising